null  null
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE
VERSION 5.8
ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE
ImageTrend, Inc.
20855 Kensington Blvd.
Lakeville, MN 55044
Tel: (952) 469-1589
Toll Free: (888) 469-7789
Fax: (952) 985-5671
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |2
Copyright
Service Bridge Version 5.8
Copyright © 2013 ImageTrend, Inc. All rights reserved.
Service Bridge
Viewer contains copyrighted materials licensed from various copyright owners.
Service Bridge
Viewer contains copyrighted materials, which are licensed to you, the end user, for your personal use
subject to the terms of the enclosed end user license agreement. You must treat this software and its
contents like any other copyrighted material, such as a Portfolio or musical recording. Any other use,
duplication, or distribution of this product or its contents may violate applicable U.S. or international
copyright laws, and may subject you to prosecution under penalty of law.
EMS Service Bridge logo is a trademark of ImageTrend, Inc.
NOTICE Unless otherwise provided by written agreement with ImageTrend, Inc., this publication, and the
software sold with this publication, are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. The entire risk arising out of the user or performance of this publication and software remains
with you. In no event will ImageTrend, Inc., or any of its suppliers, be liable for any lost profits, lost
savings, direct, incidental or indirect damages or other economic or consequential damages, even if
ImageTrend, Inc. or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages. ImageTrend, Inc.
reserves the right to modify this document at any time without obligation to notify anyone.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |3
Table of Contents
COPYRIGHT ................................................................................................................................................. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................... 3
Introduction to the Service Bridge............................................................................. 15
1.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 16
1.2 OVERVIEW OF THE SERVICE BRIDGE APPLICATION................................................................................. 16
Web/Application Server Hardware ....................................................................................................... 16
Operating Systems Supported ............................................................................................................. 16
Web Server Software ........................................................................................................................... 16
Additional Service Software ................................................................................................................. 16
Additional Application Software ........................................................................................................... 17
Database Server Hardware ................................................................................................................. 17
Database Software .............................................................................................................................. 17
Internet Browser Requirements for End Users .................................................................................... 17
1.4 THE SERVICE BRIDGE ENVIRONMENT.................................................................................................... 17
1.5 RECORD KEEPING ................................................................................................................................ 19
1.6 LOGIN.................................................................................................................................................. 19
Forgetting Your Password or Username ............................................................................................. 21
Security Questions ............................................................................................................................... 22
1.7 SELECTING AN AGENCY ........................................................................................................................ 22
Searching for an Agency ..................................................................................................................... 22
Browsing for an Agency ....................................................................................................................... 23
1.8 PERSONALIZING THE DASHBOARD ......................................................................................................... 24
Posting a Messages on the Dashboard ............................................................................................... 27
1.9 ACCESSING HELP................................................................................................................................. 28
Service Information and Setup .................................................................................. 33
2.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 34
2.2 SETTING UP AUTOMATIC CALL NUMBERS .............................................................................................. 34
2.3 ENABLING AND DISABLING EXPORTS ..................................................................................................... 35
2.4 SETTING UP EMS AUDIT EVENTS ......................................................................................................... 35
2.5 W ORKING WITH LEAVE OF ABSENCE REASONS ...................................................................................... 37
2.6 SETTING A DEFAULT DATE RANGE FOR RUN HISTORY SEARCHES .......................................................... 38
2.7 SETTING UP RUN LOCKING ................................................................................................................... 38
2.8 SETTING UP CATEGORIES FOR DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................... 38
Adding a New Document Category ..................................................................................................... 38
Editing an Existing Document Category .............................................................................................. 39
2.9 ADDING W ORDS TO THE EMS RUN FORM SPELLCHECK DICTIONARY ..................................................... 41
Adding an Individual Word to the Spellcheck Dictionary ..................................................................... 41
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |4
Uploading a Dictionary to the Spellcheck Dictionary ........................................................................... 41
2.10 W ORKING WITH REPEAT PATIENTS ..................................................................................................... 42
Enabling the Repeat Patient Feature................................................................................................... 42
Managing Repeat Patient Records ...................................................................................................... 43
2.11 W ORKING WITH SERVICE DEFINED QUESTIONS ................................................................................... 45
Service Defined Questions on Standard Run Forms ........................................................................... 45
Viewing and Editing Service Defined Questions ................................................................................. 46
Adding a New Service Defined Question............................................................................................. 47
2.12 W ORKING WITH STATISTICAL YEAR INFORMATION ................................................................................ 48
Viewing and Editing Information for a Year ......................................................................................... 48
Adding Information for a New Year ...................................................................................................... 49
2.13 SETTING UP EMS SHIFTS .................................................................................................................. 49
2.14 ADDING FAVORITE LOCATIONS ........................................................................................................... 50
Setting Up a New City .......................................................................................................................... 51
2.15 VIEWING BASIC SERVICE INFORMATION............................................................................................... 53
2.16 EDITING BASIC SERVICE INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 54
2.17 W ORKING WITH STATIONS .................................................................................................................. 56
Viewing and Editing Station Information .............................................................................................. 56
Adding a New Station .......................................................................................................................... 56
Setting a Default Station ...................................................................................................................... 58
2.18 W ORKING WITH VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 58
Viewing and Editing Vehicle Information ............................................................................................. 58
Viewing and Entering Vehicle Mileage ................................................................................................ 59
Adding a New Vehicle .......................................................................................................................... 60
Changing the Order of Vehicles ........................................................................................................... 62
2.19 W ORKING WITH ZONES AND DISTRICTS ............................................................................................... 62
Adding a Zone or District Record ......................................................................................................... 62
Editing a Zone or District Record ......................................................................................................... 63
2.20 SETTING UP AMA QUESTIONS ........................................................................................................... 64
Adding an AMA Question .................................................................................................................... 64
Editing the Run Form for AMA Questions............................................................................................ 65
2.21 W ORKING WITH EMPLOYERS............................................................................................................... 68
Adding an Employer Record ................................................................................................................ 68
Editing an Employer Record ................................................................................................................ 69
2.22 SETTING UP FIRST EMS UNIT ARRIVING ............................................................................................. 69
2.23 SETTING UP MEDICATIONS REQUIRING A USER DESCRIPTION .............................................................. 70
2.24 SETTING UP OTHER EMS AGENCIES AT THE SCENE ............................................................................ 71
2.25 W ORKING WITH INSURANCE COMPANIES ............................................................................................. 72
Adding an Insurance Company Record ............................................................................................... 72
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |5
Editing an Insurance Company Record ............................................................................................... 73
2.26 SETTING UP OTHER RESPONDING UNITS ............................................................................................ 74
2.27 CUSTOMIZING SIGNATURE CONSENT TEXT .......................................................................................... 75
2.28 ENABLING THE AUTO NARRATION FEATURE ......................................................................................... 75
2.29 ENABLING THE CMS BILLING CALCULATOR ......................................................................................... 76
2.30 ENABLING THE INTERACTIVE PHYSICAL ASSESSMENT .......................................................................... 77
2.31 SETTING UP MEDICATION AND PROCEDURE PERMISSIONS ................................................................... 78
2.32 SETTING UP THE PRIMARY ROLE OF UNIT ........................................................................................... 79
2.33 SETTING UP TIME FORMATS ............................................................................................................... 79
2.34 SORTING TRANSFERRING AGENCIES ................................................................................................... 80
2.35 SORTING CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES ................................................................................................. 81
2.36 SORTING FAVORITE DESTINATIONS ..................................................................................................... 81
2.37 SETTING UP DYNAMIC RUN FORM OPTIONS ........................................................................................ 82
Setting Up Automatic Completion for Activity Times ........................................................................... 82
Displaying the Response Times Panel ................................................................................................ 83
Selecting Odometer Field Auto Entry .................................................................................................. 83
Enabling Audit Tracking for Run Forms ............................................................................................... 84
Setting Automatic Saving between Tabs ............................................................................................. 84
Enabling Rapid Entry Listboxes ........................................................................................................... 85
2.38 SETTING UP FIELD BRIDGE OPTIONS .................................................................................................. 86
Forcing Field Bridge Syncing ............................................................................................................... 87
Configuring Automatic Posting and Syncing ....................................................................................... 88
Configuring Incident Clearing .............................................................................................................. 89
Showing or Hiding Dashboard Widgets ............................................................................................... 90
Requiring Passwords for Posting ......................................................................................................... 91
Controlling EKG Monitor Setup ............................................................................................................ 91
Setting Up Power Tool Options ........................................................................................................... 92
Setting Up Power Tool Versions .......................................................................................................... 93
Setting Power Tool Display Options .................................................................................................... 94
Configuring Quick Launch Links .......................................................................................................... 95
Working with Custom Reports and Narratives ..................................................................................... 96
Deactivating Specific Reports or Narratives .................................................................................... 97
Enabling Default Reports and Narratives ......................................................................................... 97
Uploading New Reports and Narratives ........................................................................................... 98
Uploading Logos for Reports ............................................................................................................... 99
Configuring Validity Compliance Documentation .............................................................................. 100
Configuring Required Signature Validation ....................................................................................... 101
Setting Up Automatic Time Entry ....................................................................................................... 101
Setting Up Automatic Saving ............................................................................................................. 102
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |6
2.39 W ORKING WITH ACTIVE PROTOCOLS ................................................................................................. 103
Creating Active Protocols .................................................................................................................. 103
Viewing and Editing Active Protocols ................................................................................................ 104
2.40 SETTING A BACKGROUND IMAGE FOR FIELD BRIDGE XPRESS ............................................................. 105
Reverting to the Default Image .......................................................................................................... 106
2.42 CONFIGURING INCIDENT CLEARING FOR FIELD BRIDGE XPRESS ......................................................... 107
Working with the Layout Editor ............................................................................... 108
3.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 109
3.2 OVERVIEW OF TEMPLATE TYPES......................................................................................................... 109
3.3 GETTING STARTED WITH TEMPLATES .................................................................................................. 109
Dynamic Run Form Templates: Tips and Recommendations ........................................................... 109
QA/QI Review Templates: Tips and Recommendations ................................................................... 110
Report Templates: Tips and Recommendations ............................................................................... 110
Template Structure Overview ............................................................................................................ 111
3.5 LAYOUT EDITOR TERMS TO KNOW ...................................................................................................... 112
3.4 OPENING THE LAYOUT EDITOR ........................................................................................................... 114
Opening the Layout Editor for a Service ............................................................................................ 115
Opening the Layout Editor for the System ......................................................................................... 115
3.5 UPDATING THE DISPLAY OF THE LAYOUT EDITOR ................................................................................. 116
3.6 CREATING A COPY OF A TEMPLATE ..................................................................................................... 117
Creating a Copy for the Current Location .......................................................................................... 117
Creating a Copy for a Specific Service .............................................................................................. 118
3.7 ADDING A NEW TEMPLATE .................................................................................................................. 119
3.8 CHANGING A RUN FORM TEMPLATE TO A PDF TEMPLATE .................................................................... 121
3.9 EDITING THE NAME OF A TEMPLATE .................................................................................................... 121
3.10 CHANGING THE STATUS OF A TEMPLATE ........................................................................................... 122
3.11 ADDING A TAB.................................................................................................................................. 123
3.12 UPDATING THE DETAILS OF A TAB ..................................................................................................... 124
3.13 ADDING A PANEL TO A TEMPLATE...................................................................................................... 126
3.14 UPDATING EXISTING PANELS ............................................................................................................ 127
Editing Panel Details .......................................................................................................................... 127
Moving a Panel to a Different Tab ..................................................................................................... 129
Hiding a Panel with No Data .............................................................................................................. 130
3.15 ADDING A CONTROL TO A TEMPLATE ................................................................................................. 131
Adding a QA/QI Question .................................................................................................................. 134
3.16 UPDATING CONTROLS ...................................................................................................................... 136
Working with Parent Controls ............................................................................................................ 136
Editing the Details of a Control .......................................................................................................... 139
Moving a Control ................................................................................................................................ 144
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |7
Setting Default Values for a Run Form Template .............................................................................. 145
Hiding a Control with No Data ........................................................................................................... 147
Deleting a Control .............................................................................................................................. 148
3.17 ADDITIONAL RUN FORM TEMPLATE SETUP OPTIONS .......................................................................... 150
Adding an Event Visibility Rule for a Template .................................................................................. 150
Setting Up Provider Actions ............................................................................................................... 152
Setting a Default Template for the Field Bridge ................................................................................. 154
3.18 ADDITIONAL REPORT TEMPLATE SETUP OPTIONS .............................................................................. 154
Editing the Header and Footer for your Reports ................................................................................ 154
Updating the Display Options for the Template ................................................................................. 160
Previewing an Example Report ......................................................................................................... 161
Working with Training Information for Services..................................................... 163
4.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 164
4.2 W ORKING WITH TRAINING CATEGORIES .............................................................................................. 164
Accessing Training Categories: for Service Administrators............................................................... 164
Accessing Training Categories: for System Administrators............................................................... 165
Viewing and Editing Categories ......................................................................................................... 166
Adding Categories ............................................................................................................................. 167
Setting Access to Categories ............................................................................................................. 168
4.3 W ORKING WITH TEMPLATES ............................................................................................................... 170
Accessing Training Templates: for Service Administrators ............................................................... 170
Accessing Training Categories: for System Administrators............................................................... 170
Adding New Templates ...................................................................................................................... 171
Viewing and Editing Templates ......................................................................................................... 175
4.4 SETTING UP TRAINING TOPICS ........................................................................................................... 176
Creating a New Topic ........................................................................................................................ 176
Editing a Training/Activity Topic ......................................................................................................... 177
4.5 SETTING TRAINING AND ACTIVITY TIME CALCULATIONS ........................................................................ 178
4.6 W ORKING WITH CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SYSTEM ....................................................... 178
4.7 SETTING UP TRAINING CERTIFICATIONS FOR THE SYSTEM ................................................................... 179
4.8 SETTING UP POSITIONS...................................................................................................................... 180
4.9 W ORKING WITH TRAINING RECORDS ................................................................................................... 181
Viewing and Editing Training Records ............................................................................................... 181
Adding Training Records ................................................................................................................... 184
Staff Information and Setup ..................................................................................... 187
5.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 188
5.2 STAFF PROFILE INFORMATION ............................................................................................................ 188
The Demographics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 189
Signing Up for ImageTrend Email Notifications ............................................................................. 189
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |8
The Employment Tab......................................................................................................................... 190
The Certifications Tab ........................................................................................................................ 191
The Permissions Tab ......................................................................................................................... 192
The Emergency Contacts Tab ........................................................................................................... 195
The Training Tab................................................................................................................................ 196
The Documents Tab .......................................................................................................................... 196
5.3 ADDING STAFF PROFILES ................................................................................................................... 197
Data Collection and Analysis ................................................................................... 199
6.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 200
6.2 ADDING A NEW INCIDENT REPORT WITH DYNAMIC RUN FORMS ............................................................ 200
Incident Report Tips ........................................................................................................................... 200
Run Form Tools ................................................................................................................................. 201
Working with Run Validation .............................................................................................................. 202
Completing a New Incident Report .................................................................................................... 202
6.3 ADDITIONAL DYNAMIC RUN FORM OPTIONS......................................................................................... 206
Adding a Patient to a Run Report ...................................................................................................... 207
Adding QA/QI Notes to a Run Report ................................................................................................ 207
Adding Addendums............................................................................................................................ 209
Adding Attachments ........................................................................................................................... 210
Switching Templates .......................................................................................................................... 210
6.4 ADDING A NEW INCIDENT REPORT WITH STANDARD RUN FORMS.......................................................... 211
Incident Report Tips ........................................................................................................................... 211
Understanding Validity ....................................................................................................................... 212
Run Form Tools ................................................................................................................................. 213
Completing a New Incident Report .................................................................................................... 213
6.5 ADDITIONAL STANDARD RUN FORM OPTIONS ...................................................................................... 215
Adding a Patient to a Run Report ...................................................................................................... 215
Adding QA/QI Notes to a Run Report ................................................................................................ 216
Adding Addendums............................................................................................................................ 217
Adding Attachments ........................................................................................................................... 218
Switching Templates .......................................................................................................................... 218
6.6 RECORDING MONTHS WITH NO RUNS TO REPORT ............................................................................... 219
6.7 VIEWING AND EDITING PAST RUN REPORTS ........................................................................................ 219
Working with the Incident List ............................................................................................................ 219
Overview of Incident List Options ................................................................................................... 220
Searching for Incidents from the Incident List ................................................................................ 220
Setting the Refresh Frequency ...................................................................................................... 223
Creating a View .............................................................................................................................. 224
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Incident List ........................................................................................ 228
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |9
Working with Run History................................................................................................................... 228
Editing the Run History Display Options ........................................................................................ 230
Working with Run History Results .................................................................................................. 231
Changing the Run Form Template ................................................................................................. 231
6.8 UPDATING MULTIPLE RUNS ................................................................................................................ 232
Printing Multiple Runs ........................................................................................................................ 233
Updating the Status of Multiple Runs ................................................................................................ 233
Locking and Unlocking Multiple Runs ................................................................................................ 233
6.9 ACCESSING PRE-CREATED SERVICE REPORTS ................................................................................... 234
Communicating with the Service Bridge ................................................................. 235
7.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 236
7.2 W ORKING WITH THE INBOX ................................................................................................................. 236
Viewing Messages in the Inbox ......................................................................................................... 236
Replying to Messages in the Inbox .................................................................................................... 237
Sending New Messages .................................................................................................................... 238
Flagging Messages for Follow Up ..................................................................................................... 240
Deleting Messages ............................................................................................................................ 241
7.3 SUBMITTING FEEDBACK TO IMAGETREND ............................................................................................ 241
Guidelines .......................................................................................................................................... 241
Submitting a New Idea ....................................................................................................................... 242
Voting for an Idea............................................................................................................................... 244
Removing Votes for an Idea ........................................................................................................... 245
Commenting on an Idea .................................................................................................................... 247
7.4 W ORKING WITH DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................. 248
Viewing Documents ........................................................................................................................... 248
Editing Document Information ........................................................................................................... 249
Adding New Documents .................................................................................................................... 249
Deleting Documents........................................................................................................................... 250
Working with the QA/QI Module ............................................................................... 252
8.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 253
8.2 OVERVIEW OF THE QA/QI MODULE ..................................................................................................... 253
8.3 SETTING PERMISSIONS FOR THE QA/QI MODULE ................................................................................ 253
Setting Access to the QA/QI Module for Permission Groups ............................................................ 253
Setting System Controls for QA/QI Questions ................................................................................... 255
8.4 CREATING QA/QI GROUPS ................................................................................................................. 256
8.5 FLAGGING QA/QI TEAM MEMBERS ..................................................................................................... 257
8.6 CREATING QA/QI QUESTIONS ............................................................................................................ 258
Creating QA/QI Questions for your Service ....................................................................................... 258
Creating QA/QI Questions for the System ......................................................................................... 260
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 10
8.7 OVERVIEW OF QA/QI TEMPLATES....................................................................................................... 261
Creating a QA/QI Template: Process Overview ................................................................................ 261
8.8 CREATING VIEWS FOR QA/QI BATCHES .............................................................................................. 262
8.9 QA/QI PROCESS OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. 265
8.10 CONFIGURING YOUR DASHBOARD ..................................................................................................... 265
8.11 OVERVIEW OF BATCHES ................................................................................................................... 266
8.12 CREATING A BATCH.......................................................................................................................... 268
8.13 SETTING UP AUTOMATED BATCHES .................................................................................................. 272
8.14 REVIEWING AN INCIDENT .................................................................................................................. 275
8.15 SENDING A QA/QI NOTE .................................................................................................................. 275
8.16 UPDATING THE QA/QI STATUS OF THE INCIDENT ............................................................................... 278
8.17 ASSIGNING REVIEW TO ANOTHER STAFF MEMBER ............................................................................. 279
8.18 UN-ASSIGNING REVIEWERS FOR AN INCIDENT ................................................................................... 281
8.19 CHANGING THE STATUS OF MULTIPLE BATCHES ................................................................................ 282
Using the Data Exchange ......................................................................................... 284
9.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 285
9.2 INTRODUCTION TO DATA EXCHANGE ................................................................................................... 285
9.3 CREATING A NEMSIS EXPORT XML................................................................................................... 285
9.4 POSTING FROM A SERVICE BRIDGE TO THE STATE BRIDGE................................................................... 287
Working with the Report Writer................................................................................ 290
10.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 291
10.2 SUMMARY OF REPORT W RITER ........................................................................................................ 291
10.3 TYPES OF REPORTS ......................................................................................................................... 291
10.4 REQUESTING STANDARD REPORTS AND CHARTS............................................................................... 291
10.5 ADDITIONAL STANDARD REPORT OPTIONS ........................................................................................ 293
Adding Favorite Reports .................................................................................................................... 293
Exporting Reports .............................................................................................................................. 294
10.6 W ORKING WITH TRANSACTIONAL REPORTS ....................................................................................... 295
Step One: Selecting a Data Set ......................................................................................................... 297
Step Two: Selecting Columns ............................................................................................................ 298
Changing the Column View (Optional) ........................................................................................... 298
Step Three: Setting Display Options (Optional) ................................................................................. 299
Step Four: Setting Grouping Rules (Optional) ................................................................................... 300
Step Five: Setting Sorting Rules (Optional) ....................................................................................... 301
Step Six: Setting Criteria and Filters (Optional) ................................................................................. 302
Step Seven: Changing the Appearance of the Report (Optional) ..................................................... 303
Step Eight: Viewing the Report .......................................................................................................... 305
Step Nine: Saving the Report (Optional) ........................................................................................... 305
Step Ten: Deleting the Report (Optional) .......................................................................................... 307
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 11
Step Eleven: Assigning Permissions (Optional) ................................................................................ 307
Step Twelve: Scheduling Reports (Optional) ..................................................................................... 308
Step Thirteen: Exporting and Printing Reports (Optional) ................................................................. 309
Working with the Certification Dashboard .............................................................. 310
11.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 311
11.2 CERTIFICATION DASHBOARD OVERVIEW............................................................................................ 311
11.3 VIEWING UPCOMING CERTIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... 311
11.4 APPROVING OR DISAPPROVING RECORDS ......................................................................................... 312
11.5 VIEWING TRAINING INFORMATION...................................................................................................... 312
System Administration ............................................................................................. 314
12.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 315
12.2 W ORKING WITH SYSTEM USERS ....................................................................................................... 315
Adding New User Profiles .................................................................................................................. 315
Viewing and Editing Existing Profiles ................................................................................................. 320
Removing User Profiles ..................................................................................................................... 320
Assigning Service Rights ................................................................................................................... 320
Assigning Additional Permissions ...................................................................................................... 321
Creating User Associations ............................................................................................................... 322
12.3 W ORKING WITH PERMISSION GROUPS .............................................................................................. 325
Viewing Permission Group Settings .................................................................................................. 325
Creating New Permission Groups ..................................................................................................... 327
Editing Permission Setup ................................................................................................................... 330
12.4 W ORKING WITH REPORT W RITER 2.0 PERMISSION GROUPS .............................................................. 334
12.5 W ORKING WITH LOGIN INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 335
12.6 CONTROLLING CONTENT FOR THE PUBLIC SITE ................................................................................. 337
12.7 SETTING QA/QI NOTE SETTINGS FOR THE SYSTEM ........................................................................... 338
12.8 SETTING A SYSTEM EMAIL ADDRESS................................................................................................. 339
12.9 REQUIRING USER APPROVAL FOR ACCOUNT CREATION ..................................................................... 340
Enabling the User Approval Feature .................................................................................................. 340
Responding to Requests for Access .................................................................................................. 342
Signing Up for Email Notifications ..................................................................................................... 343
12.10 SETTING THE LIMIT ON FUTURE INCIDENT DATES ............................................................................. 344
12.11 SETTING UP FIELD BRIDGE AUTOMATIC UPDATES ........................................................................... 345
Manually Applying Field Bridge Updates ........................................................................................... 346
12.12 ADDING W ORDS TO THE EMS RUN FORM SPELLCHECK DICTIONARY ............................................... 347
Adding an Individual Word to the Spellcheck Dictionary ................................................................... 347
Uploading a Dictionary to the Spellcheck Dictionary ......................................................................... 348
12.13 W ORKING WITH SERVICES AND REGIONS ........................................................................................ 349
Viewing and Editing Regions ............................................................................................................. 349
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 12
Adding New Regions ......................................................................................................................... 350
Viewing and Editing Services ............................................................................................................ 350
Adding New Services ......................................................................................................................... 351
12.13 VIEWING CURRENT IMPORTS AND EXPORTS .................................................................................... 354
Viewing Current Exports .................................................................................................................... 354
Viewing Current Imports .................................................................................................................... 355
Viewing All Completed Imports .......................................................................................................... 356
Viewing Imports in Progress .............................................................................................................. 356
Viewing Import Performance ............................................................................................................. 357
12.14 SCHEDULING NEW EXPORTS .......................................................................................................... 357
Scheduling Individual Exports ............................................................................................................ 358
Scheduling Recurring Exports ........................................................................................................... 358
12.15 VIEWING MAPPED DATA EXCHANGE DESTINATIONS ......................................................................... 358
12.16 DATA EXPORT SETUP..................................................................................................................... 359
12.17 SETTING UP A SITE FOR THE PATIENT TRACKING INTEGRATION ........................................................ 359
12.18 W ORKING WITH VALIDATION OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 360
Validity Rule Terms ............................................................................................................................ 360
Editing Existing Validation Rules ....................................................................................................... 361
Adding New Validation Rules ............................................................................................................ 364
Applying Validation Rules to Run Forms ........................................................................................... 366
Setting Up Validation based on Disposition ....................................................................................... 367
12.19 W ORKING WITH RESOURCE SETUP ................................................................................................. 368
Working with Destinations ................................................................................................................. 368
Viewing and Editing Destination Regions ...................................................................................... 369
Adding a New Destination Region ................................................................................................. 370
Viewing and Editing Destinations ................................................................................................... 371
Creating New Destinations ............................................................................................................. 371
Working with Transferring Agencies .................................................................................................. 373
Viewing and Editing Transferring Agencies ................................................................................... 374
Adding New Transferring Agencies ................................................................................................ 374
Working with Patient Medication Records ......................................................................................... 375
Viewing and Editing Medication Records ....................................................................................... 375
Adding Medication Records ........................................................................................................... 376
Working with Run Form Statuses ...................................................................................................... 377
Viewing and Editing Run Form Statuses........................................................................................ 377
Creating New Statuses................................................................................................................... 377
Updating Statuses for Past Run Reports ....................................................................................... 378
Setting Up the CMS Billing Calculator ............................................................................................... 378
Working with Message Types ............................................................................................................ 380
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 13
Adding a New Message Type ........................................................................................................ 380
Viewing and Editing Existing Message Types ............................................................................... 381
Mass Updating Message Types ..................................................................................................... 381
Viewing Data Element Details ........................................................................................................... 382
Mapping Codes for Exports and Posting ........................................................................................... 384
Mapping a Code or Name .............................................................................................................. 384
Working Reports and Narratives ........................................................................................................ 386
Deactivating Specific Reports or Narratives .................................................................................. 386
Uploading New Reports and Narratives ......................................................................................... 387
Setting Field Bridge Report and Narrative Permissions................................................................. 388
Uploading a Logo for System Reports ........................................................................................... 389
Adding a Custom Postal Code ........................................................................................................... 390
Setting Up AMA Questions for the System ........................................................................................ 391
Adding an AMA Question ............................................................................................................... 392
Editing the Run Form for AMA Questions ...................................................................................... 393
12.20 SETTING UP SYSTEM DEFINED QUESTIONS ..................................................................................... 395
System Defined Questions on Standard EMS Run Forms ................................................................ 395
Viewing and Editing System Defined Questions ............................................................................... 396
Adding a New System Defined Question........................................................................................... 397
12.21 OVERVIEW OF SIGNATURES OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 398
Working with Translated Form Labels ............................................................................................... 398
Working with Consent Form Text ...................................................................................................... 399
Working with Consent Text Languages ............................................................................................. 400
12.22 ADDING AND EDITING STANDARD RUN FORMS ................................................................................. 401
Adding New Run Forms ..................................................................................................................... 401
Editing Existing Run Forms ............................................................................................................... 402
Formatting Run Form Options ........................................................................................................... 402
Working with Form Summary Information ...................................................................................... 403
Working with Run Form Fields ....................................................................................................... 404
12.23 W ORKING WITH FIELDS AND TAGS FOR STANDARD RUN FORMS ....................................................... 405
Working with Field Properties ............................................................................................................ 405
Previewing Fields ............................................................................................................................... 406
12.24 SETTING SERVICE ACCESS TO SYSTEM RUN FORMS ....................................................................... 406
12.25 W ORKING WITH REPORT W RITER 2.0 SETTINGS .............................................................................. 407
Setting Up Access to Data Sets ......................................................................................................... 407
Managing Display Options ................................................................................................................. 408
Updating Report Layout Options ....................................................................................................... 409
Managing Access to Standard Reports ............................................................................................. 410
Scheduling a Standard Report ........................................................................................................... 411
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 14
12.26 SETTING UP SYSTEM CONTROLS .................................................................................................... 414
Setting Up Audit Tracking .................................................................................................................. 414
Setting Up Active Protocols ............................................................................................................... 415
Setting Up Run Locking ..................................................................................................................... 417
Setting Up Custom AMA Questions ................................................................................................... 418
Setting Up Activities and Training Options ........................................................................................ 418
Setting Up QA/QI Questions .............................................................................................................. 419
12.27 W ORKING WITH EMERGENCY ALERTS ............................................................................................. 420
Viewing and Editing Past Alerts ......................................................................................................... 420
Creating New Alerts ........................................................................................................................... 420
12.28 W ORKING WITH CORRESPONDENCE ................................................................................................ 421
Working with Correspondence Templates ......................................................................................... 421
Adding New Correspondence Templates ...................................................................................... 422
Viewing and Editing Correspondence Templates .......................................................................... 422
Working with Merge Fields ................................................................................................................ 423
Creating New Correspondence ......................................................................................................... 423
12.29 SETTING A BACKGROUND IMAGE FOR FIELD BRIDGE XPRESS ........................................................... 425
Reverting to the Default Image .......................................................................................................... 426
12.30 SYSTEM REPORTS ......................................................................................................................... 427
User Login Report .............................................................................................................................. 427
User Lockout Report .......................................................................................................................... 428
User Performance Report .................................................................................................................. 428
Field Changes Report ........................................................................................................................ 428
Services Reporting Report ................................................................................................................. 429
Runs Per Month Report ..................................................................................................................... 429
System Report ................................................................................................................................... 430
Import Processor Status Report ........................................................................................................ 430
Application Exception Report ............................................................................................................. 431
Field Bridge Error Log Report ............................................................................................................ 431
Printing System Reports .................................................................................................................... 432
Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 433
GLOSSARY .............................................................................................................................................. 434
Help and Support ...................................................................................................... 447
HELP AND SUPPORT................................................................................................................................. 448
Before Contacting ImageTrend .......................................................................................................... 448
Contacting ImageTrend ..................................................................................................................... 448
Technical Support .............................................................................................................................. 448
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 15
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION TO THE SERVICE BRIDGE
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 16
1.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter will cover basic information about the purpose, structure and technical requirements of the
Service Bridge and the roles of individuals given administrative capabilities for the application.
1.2 Overview of the Service Bridge Application
The ImageTrend EMS Service Bridge is a pre-hospital emergency data collection, analysis and reporting
system. EMS Service Bridge integrates information across the entire emergency medical community,
whether in the ambulance, the local station, the county or state offices. With the EMS Service Bridge,
ambulance services are able to satisfy reporting requirements easily, without major investment and
without learning complex new technology.
The system provides:
 Data collection based upon the NHTSA V2.2.1 data set.
 The aggregation of information from various units and the possibility of sharing this with other
systems and agencies.
 Electronic transfer of information to other systems and agencies to improve communications and
to share pertinent information.
 Standard and ad hoc reporting to turn data into useful information.
 Easy expansion through its open architecture as needs grow and evolve.
 Scalability to conform to the needs of small, medium and large services as required.
Additionally, the system is HIPAA compliant and sensitive to medical data security issues. The application
meets and exceeds state and federal data privacy requirements.
1.3 System Requirements
Web/Application Server Hardware
Recommended
Dual Quad Core Processors
8-16 GB RAM
100 GB Available Hard Disk Space
RAID 5 SCSI Hard Drives with OS
and Data Partitions
ImageTrend Hosted
Dual Quad Core Processors
32 GB RAM
SAN Data Storage
Blade Servers with Microsoft
Hyper-V
Operating Systems Supported
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Microsoft Windows 2003 R2 Server
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 Server (recommended)
Web Server Software
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Microsoft IIS version 6.0, 7.5 or later
Additional Service Software
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 17
Microsoft Tablet PC SDK
Additional Application Software
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Adobe ColdFusion 9 Enterprise
Database Server Hardware
A separate database server is required (unless hosted by ImageTrend)
Required
Recommended
2 GHz Processor
Dual Quad Core Processors
4 GB RAM
8–16 GB RAM
40 GB Available Hard Disk Space
80 GB Available Hard Disk Space
RAID 5 SCSI Hard Drives
Database Software
64-bit software is recommended.
Microsoft SQL Server 2005
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 (recommended)
Internet Browser Requirements for End Users
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 and above
Other browsers that support Mozilla 4.0 and above
Adobe Flash 8 or higher (recommended)
Adobe Reader 8 or higher (recommended)
Silverlight 4
1.4 The Service Bridge Environment
The Service Bridge allows all users to enter data for run reports, as well as view a variety of information
about the service, past run data to which the user has access and messages and alerts directed towards
that user. Upon logging in, users will see several tools for navigation in the header at the top of the page.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 18
The links in the top left will bring you between modules and will display the same options no matter what
the user is doing with the Service Bridge. Additional links may be available depending on which modules
you have access to. If you have access to many different modules, some of them may be included under
the More link. Additional options in the top right allow you to edit your profile, search for run reports or
services, access your inbox and log out.











My Service or EMS Services provides access to service-specific functions to service
administration, individual run (incident) reporting and standard reports.
HINT: If multiple services are managed through this Service Bridge, the tab will say EMS
Services.
Data Exchange allows administrators to import new information to the system from particular
formats or export data gathered in the system to a supported format.
Report Writer 2.0 provides access to the new Report Writer for working with standard, search, ad
hoc and multi-dimensional reporting.
Cert Dashboard provides access to the Certification Dashboard, which is a module that can be
used to track staff members’ certifications, training courses and renewals.
Help provides access to ImageTrend University, allowing you to view and download videos, quick
guides and manuals to learn to best use your applications.
User Voice provides access to a forum where you can leave and vote for suggestions for the
Service Bridge, Field Bridge and associated modules.
The username in the top right opens the currently logged-in user’s profile.
Admin allows system administrators to configure the application for their entire system. This tab is
only visible for system administrators.
The number icon in the top right opens your inbox. This number changes based on the number of
unread inbox messages you have.
The Maximize/Minimize icon in the top right allows you to toggle between collapsing the top area
of the page (which contains the tabs) to show more of the page content or showing it again.
The Logout link logs the user out of the application.
The tabs allow you to access pages and sections within the module you have selected from the links at
the top of the page. These tabs will change depending on the module you are working within. You can
hover over any tab displaying an arrow to view a list of sections you can open.
Many users will work primarily with the tabs available in the My Service (or EMS Services) section.





7/3/2013
Dashboard brings you to your Dashboard for this service.
Incidents opens a drop down menu that allows you to jump to the page to add a new incident or
search run history.
Modules opens a drop down menu that allows you to open any of the sections available for your
service, such as the Documents, No Runs to Report or Training modules. The modules available
here may differ from those shown in this manual based on the modules that your service uses.
Staff brings you to the Staff page for this service, with a list of all staff members.
Setup brings you to the setup options for your service on the system.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 19
To return to the home page for this service at any time, from the top toolbar, click My Service or, if
available, the Dashboard tab.
System administrators can create alerts to be sent to users’ inboxes or displayed on the home page of
the application. Alerts set to display on the application home page will appear in a banner across the top
of the screen. Clicking this banner will take the user to a page with more information, if the administrator
entered additional information.
The logged-in user’s name will appear in the upper right corner of the screen. If this link is clicked, the
user’s profile will open for editing. Use the provided fields to enter or change information, and the tabs at
the top of the screen to navigate through the profile.
1.5 Record Keeping
The Service Bridge system allows administrators to delete most information that has been added to the
system. However, deleting information is strongly discouraged except in the case of test or training
information, as deleted profiles or records can result in finished records becoming incomplete. Once a
record or profile is deleted from the system, all other records or reports containing information from the
deleted profile will also lose the deleted information. For instance, if a staff member’s profile is deleted, all
run reports that the staff member has ever completed will no longer contain that staff member’s
information.
All profiles and records that may be used in documentation will allow administrators to make the record
inactive, which allows administrators to keep the record from being used within the system but still keeps
the information within the system and allows records to be complete. This option is recommended in
place of deleting any records.
1.6 Login
System users must log in to the Service Bridge application online in order to use the system.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 20
1. Using a Web browser, navigate to the URL for the Service Bridge system.
The ImageTrend Service Bridge page appears.
2. In the System Login section in the middle of the page, in the Username text box, type the
username you were provided.
3. In the System Login section, in the Password text box, type your password for the system.
HINT: Initially, you should be provided with a password, which may come from the state, your
service administrator or ImageTrend. After you have logged in once, the system will require you
to change your password.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 21
4. Below the Username and Password fields, click Submit.
The data privacy statement appears.
5. Read the data privacy statement.
HINT: Agreeing to the terms automatically creates a user history and audit trail of site access
to comply with HIPAA requirements.
6. If you agree, to log in to the system, click Yes.
You are logged and the home page of the Service Bridge system is displayed.
Forgetting Your Password or Username
If you forget your login information, the system can email you your username and password as
long as your profile has been set up with a current email address. If you do not have a current
email address included in your user profile, you will need to contact your state or service
administrator to receive your login information.
1. In your Web browser, go to the URL provided for the Service Bridge system.
The ImageTrend Service Bridge page appears.
2. In the middle of the page, in the System Login section, click the CLICK HERE IF YOUR
FORGOT YOUR PASSWORD link.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 22
The Forget Your Password? Window appears.
3. In the E-Mail Address text box, type the email address that is listed in your Service Bridge
profile.
4. Click Send.
The system will send your login information to the email address you entered.
Security Questions
If the security question option is enabled, users will need to complete a security question before
being able to access the Service Bridge. These questions will be answered the first time the user
logs in to the application and those answers will be required for any further logins in the future.
1.7 Selecting an Agency
When you initially log in, you will be brought to the home page for your default agency or (if you have no
default agency) that last agency that you viewed. If you intend to view or work with information for a
specific agency, you will need to select the correct agency. You can do this by searching using the
agency name or browsing through the list of agencies you have access to.
Searching for an Agency
You can search for the agency that you want to open if you know its name in the system.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 23
1. From the upper right, click the Search icon.
The Search text box appears.
2. Type the name of the agency (or part of the name) in the text box.
3. Click Go.
The Service Search Results window appears, with a list of all services matching your
search terms.
4. Click the name of the service.
The Dashboard tab for that service appears.
Browsing for an Agency
You can look through a list of agencies that you have access to, which will be sorted by region.
1. From the upper right, click the name of the currently displayed service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 24
The Select a Service window appears.
2. As needed, from the Region drop down menu in the upper left, select the region
containing the agency you want to view.
3. Click the name of the service.
The Dashboard tab for that service is displayed.
1.8 Personalizing the Dashboard
The Dashboard is the page that will appear when you first open the Service Bridge or when you return to
the My Service section. The Dashboard offers a collection of widgets that you can use to arrange your
Dashboard so that you see information that is important to you when you first log in. You can select which
widgets you want to see and move them on the Dashboard, and those settings will be displayed for you
each time you log in.
1. If needed, click the Dashboard tab.
2. To view a list of all widgets that can be displayed, from the My Dashboard bar, click Display
Preferences.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 25
A list of available types of widgets appears.
3. Click the type of widget you want to add.
A list of available widgets appears.
4. From the list that appears, to display one of the widgets on the page, select the corresponding
checkbox.
5. To hide a widget that is currently displayed on the page, deselect the corresponding checkbox.
6. When finished, to hide the list, click Display Preferences again.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 26
7. To save your chances so that the Dashboard appears like this the next time you log in, click
Save.
8. To move elements, hover the mouse directly above the widget’s title until it becomes a four-sided
arrow.
9. Click and drag the element to its new place on the page; all other elements will automatically
move to accommodate the new layout.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 27
10. When finished adding/hiding or moving widgets, click Save.
NOTE: The Save link does not appear until you have made changes to the Dashboard.
Posting a Messages on the Dashboard
Every Dashboard will have widgets available that each Service Bridge user can arrange and
display according to their personal preferences. These widgets include a Service Notifications
and System Notifications widget. For Service Bridge users who have service administrator or
system administrator level permissions, this widget will display a link that allows you to create a
message that will be displayed in this widget for everyone in your service or system. This
message will not be displayed to individuals who have chosen to hide the Service Notifications or
System Notifications widgets.
1. Open your Dashboard.
2. Locate the Service Notifications or System Notifications widget, as appropriate.
3. Click the Edit link.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 28
A pop up window appears with a WYSIWYG editor.
4. Enter the notification information into the text box.
NOTE: Users will see the notification as it is displayed in this text box, including
formatting. If you delete information that is included in this text box from previous
notifications, it will no longer be displayed.
5. When finished, click Save.
The notification information is updated and will be displayed on the Service Notifications
widget for everyone in your service or the System Notifications widget for everyone in
your system.
1.9 Accessing Help
Various videos, manuals and help articles are available to you through ImageTrend University. You can
open ImageTrend University at any time from your Service Bridge to find help content. ImageTrend
University will also display help for all associated products and modules (e.g., the Report Writer, EMS
Field Bridge or Hospital Dashboard).
1. From the top left, click Help.
ImageTrend University appears in a new window or tab.
HINT: Depending on the number of modules you have access to, you may have to click the
More link to see the Help link.
NOTE: Depending on the page you clicked the Help link from, you may see the home page for
the application you were working with, or an article related to the page you were viewing may
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 29
open directly in the viewing window.
2. To view an article listed in the viewing pane, click the name of the article.
3. To browse through the articles available, use the left menu to expand the desired product and
category until you locate an article to view.
HINT: You can expand any category that you so not see articles underneath by clicking its
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 30
name. To collapse it, click its name again.
4. To view a specific article, click its name.
The article appears in the main viewing window.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 31
5. To jump to a related article, click the name of the article.
NOTE: Not all articles will have related articles listed.
6. To search for an article by name or keyword,
a. Type the search terms in the Enter keyword(s) text box at the top of the page.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 32
b. Click Search.
A list of articles containing your search terms appears.
c.
To move between pages of search results, click the Next and Previous links at the bottom
of the viewing pane.
d. When you see an article you want to look at, click the name of the article.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 33
CHAPTER 2
SERVICE INFORMATION AND SETUP
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 34
2.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how administrators can access, change and add information about their service and
its resources in the Service Bridge. Setting up the service information can make data collection much
easier, and can provide an easy reference for users who need to access data about the service.
2.2 Setting Up Automatic Call Numbers
You can set up a format for automatic call numbers, which will be added to each run form to ensure that
no run form has the same number. Your format for auto call numbers should be different from any other
system submitting to the same database (e.g., if you are submitting to a state system).
Auto call numbers that are set up here will control any run forms added to the Service Bridge. You can set
up formats for call numbers for the Field Bridge system on each Field Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Auto-Call Number.
The EMS Auto Call Number Setup page appears.
5. In the Text 1 box, type any text to appear at the beginning of the call number.
6. From the Date Format drop down menu, select the format for the date information that will be
included in the call number.
7. In the Text 2 text box, type any text that will appear in the middle of the call number.
8. From the Auto-Number Format drop down menu, select the number of digits that will be used at
the end of the number.
HINT: These numbers will automatically increase by one with each incident report that is
entered.
9. To automatically enter an incident number the same as the automatic call number, select the
Auto fill Incident Number with Auto Call Number checkbox.
10. To generate a new call number when a new patient is added to an existing incident, select the
Increment on New Patient checkbox.
11. To start the last numbers of the call number over at 0 based on a period of time, from the Reset
Auto Number drop down menu, select how often to reset the number.
12. To manually set the next number that will be automatically generated, in the Next Auto Number
text box, type the next number.
13. To save the changes, click Submit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 35
2.3 Enabling and Disabling Exports
If your service exports information (to a state or to billing software), you may need to enable exports. This
setting allows you to determine whether your service’s information can be exported from the Data
Exchange section of the Service Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Data Exchange Export.
The Data Exchange Export Setup page appears.
5. To enable your service’s information to be exported through the Data Exchange, select On.
OR
To prevent your service’s information from being exported through the Data Exchange, select Off.
6. When finished, click OK.
The changes are saved.
2.4 Setting Up EMS Audit Events
Each service administrator can set up which events will require be tracked for auditing and which will
request or require a reason for users performing the event. If these options are disabled, they are
controlled for all services by the system administrator.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 36
4. Under Configuration, select EMS Audit.
The EMS Audit Events Setup page appears.
5. To require users who generate a PDF report to enter a reason for doing so,
a. In the Generate PDF Reports section, in the Is Reason Required column, select Yes.
b. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should appear to
prompt users to add a reason.
6. To track users who view existing reports online, in the View Existing Online Report section, click
Active.
7. To require users who view existing reports online to enter a reason for doing so,
a. In the View Existing Online Report section, in the Is Reason Required column, select
Yes.
b. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should appear to
prompt users to add a reason.
8. To keep track of all changes to a run form after it has been marked as completed, in the Track All
Changes After Completed section, select Active.
The Additional Audit Workflow Configurations section appears at the bottom of the page.
9. To require users who make changes to a report that was marked as completed to enter a reason
for doing so,
a. In the Track All Changes After Completed section, in the Is Reason Required column,
select Yes.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
P a g e | 37
b. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should appear to
prompt users to add a reason.
To keep track of any user who performs a bulk action (e.g., generates a batch print), in the Bulk
Action section, select Active.
To require users who perform bulk actions to record a reason for doing so,
a. In the Bulk Action section, in the Is Reason Required column, select Yes.
b. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should appear to
prompt users to add a reason.
To automatically mark run reports as completed for auditing when they are locked, in the Mark
Runs as Completed Upon Locking Them section, click Yes.
NOTE: This field will not be displayed unless you choose to track all changes after run reports
are completed.
To automatically update the run report’s status when it is marked for completion for auditing,
a. In the Update Status Upon Marking Run as Completed section, select Yes.
b. From the Select Status to Update To drop down menu, select the new desired status.
NOTE: These fields will not be displayed unless you choose to track all changes after
run reports are completed.
When finished, click Submit.
2.5 Working with Leave of Absence Reasons
Administrators can add reasons for leaves of absence, which can then be used when recording a leave of
absence on a staff member’s profile.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Leave Of Absence.
The Leave of Absence Setup page appears.
5. To add a new reason, in the Add New Reason row, type the reason and its desired order in the
list of reasons.
6. Click OK.
7. To remove a reason, select the corresponding Delete checkbox.
8. Click OK.
9. To change a reason’s information, in the text boxes, make the desired changes.
10. Click OK.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 38
2.6 Setting a Default Date Range for Run History Searches
When searching run history, a default date range automatically appears for the search. You can set up
the length of time before the current date that should be automatically entered for searches.
NOTE: This applies only to the Run History feature, not the Incident List.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Run History.
The Run History Incident Date Range Default page appears.
5. From the Run History Incident Date Range Default drop down menu, select the desired time
period before the current date that should be selected as the default date range.
6. Click OK.
2.7 Setting Up Run Locking
You can choose to automatically lock runs for editing a certain number of days after they are created. If
this option is disabled, these settings are controlled by your system administrator.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Run Locking.
The Runs Locking Option page appears.
5. In the Number of Days text box, type the number of days that should pass before a run is locked.
6. Click OK.
2.8 Setting Up Categories for Documents
You can create categories to organize and control access to documents that you add to staff profiles.
After setting up a new category, you can assign which permission groups should be able to access
documents that are assigned to that category.
Adding a New Document Category
You can set up new document categories for your service as needed.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 39
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Document Categories.
The Document Categories page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the name of the category.
6. In the Permissions scroll list, select all permission groups that should be able to view
documents in this category.
HINT: To select multiple permission groups, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired permission group.
7. Click Submit.
The document category is saved.
Editing an Existing Document Category
You can make changes to which permission groups can view documents in a category that has
already been created.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 40
4. Under Configuration, select Document Categories.
The Document Categories page appears.
5. Click the Edit button for the category you want to work with.
The category opens.
6. To select another permission group, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each
desired permission group.
7. To remove access for a permission group that current has access to this category, click
the name of that permission group.
The permission group is deselected.
8. When finished, click Submit.
The changes are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 41
2.9 Adding Words to the EMS Run Form Spellcheck
Dictionary
You can either add individual words to the spellcheck dictionary for your Field Bridge run forms and
dynamic run forms, or you can upload a file with multiple words. Note that the spellcheck dictionary is
case sensitive, so if you were to enter a word with all lowercase letters and a provider types that word into
a run form with a capital letter, the word would still be marked as misspelled.
Adding an Individual Word to the Spellcheck Dictionary
You can add individual words as needed to prevent the Check Spelling tool from marking them as
misspelled in run forms.
1. From the top right, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under Service Settings and Resources > Configuration, click Spellcheck Dictionary.
The Spellcheck Dictionary page appears.
HINT: If no sub-menu is displayed under Service Settings and Resources or
Configuration, click the appropriate header to expand the sub-menu.
4. Click Add Word.
The Add New Custom Word window appears.
5. In the New Word text box, type the word.
6.
NOTE: Remember that the spellcheck dictionary is case sensitive.
Click Save.
The word is added.
Uploading a Dictionary to the Spellcheck Dictionary
You can upload a collection of words to the spellcheck dictionary to quickly add multiple words.
To create this collection, add each of the words to a spreadsheet file (e.g., a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet), with each word in its own row in the first column.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 42
1. From the top right, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under Service Settings and Resources > Configuration, click Spellcheck Dictionary.
The Spellcheck Dictionary page appears.
HINT: If no sub-menu is displayed under Service Settings and Resources or
Configuration, click the appropriate header to expand the sub-menu.
4. Click Upload Dictionary.
The Upload Dictionary window appears.
5. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
6. Navigate to and select the dictionary file.
7. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
8. Click Upload.
The file is uploaded and all included words are added to the dictionary.
2.10 Working with Repeat Patients
The Repeat Patient feature allows you to keep records for patients who you frequently encounter,
allowing your providers to quickly pull saved information about those patients (e.g., name, address,
medical history, allergies, next of kin) into their run forms instead of filling out the information manually for
each incident.
Enabling the Repeat Patient Feature
In order to enable your system to keep repeat patient records and to allow providers to enter
repeat patient records into run forms, you must enable the repeat patient feature.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 43
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Repeat Patient.
The Repeat Patient Setup page appears.
5. In the first section, select whether the repeat patient feature should or should not be
available for use.
6. OPTIONAL: In the Deactivate Repeat Patient After section, type the number of days after
which a repeat patient should be deactivated if not treated or transported.
7. When finished, click OK.
The settings are saved.
Managing Repeat Patient Records
Administrators can manage the database of repeat patients, ensuring that staff member will not
need to search through duplicate records, deceased patients or patients who are unlikely to
receive service again to find the correct repeat patient for a call. Individual repeat patient
accounts can be marked as inactive to hide them from the list that service providers will see in a
run form, and can be edited to provide the most up-to-date information for a particular patient.
1. From the upper left, select My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
The Setup tab appears.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select EMS.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS, select Repeat Patient Records.
The Repeat Patient Administration page appears.
5. To find repeat patients fitting particular criteria, using the fields at the top of the page,
select or type in the criteria.
Records matching those criteria appear.
6. To view or edit a particular record, click the patient’s last name.
The patient’s record appears in a new window.
NOTE: After making changes to each tab, click Save (Tab Name) Information before
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 44
switching to a new tab.
WARNING: If information is not saved before opening a new tab, any changes will
be lost.
7. In the Demographics tab, enter any information regarding the patient’s address or
personal demographics.
8. To prevent a patient from appearing in the list of repeat patients on a run form, in the
Current Status section, select Inactive.
NOTE: This record will still be available in the Service Bridge system to
administrators, but will need to be activated again to select from the run form as a repeat
patient.
9. Click Save Demographics Information.
10. Click the Allergies tab.
11. Select whether the allergy is for a medication or environmental/food allergy.
12. Use the provided fields to enter information about the allergy.
13. When finished, before entering another allergy or moving to the next tab, click Save
(Allergy Type).
14. Repeat steps 10–12 until all known allergies are saved.
15. Click the Current Medications tab.
16. Using the provided fields, enter information for a medication the patient is currently
taking.
17. When finished, before entering another medication or moving to the next tab, click Save
Current Medication.
18. Repeat steps 15–16 until all medications are entered.
19. Click the Medical History tab.
20. From the scroll box, select all known medical history options.
HINT: To select multiple options, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each option.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
P a g e | 45
Click Save Medical History Info.
Click the Billing tab.
Enter information for billing the patient.
When finished, click Save Billing Information.
Click the Insurance tab.
Enter the patient’s insurance information.
Click Save Insurance.
When finished, click Close.
2.11 Working with Service Defined Questions
Administrators can create new questions and a section to include them in on their service’s run form. This
allows a particular service to gather data that is particularly relevant to their service but may not be
already included in the form. Depending on permissions, all users will generally be able to view a list of
these custom questions, but only administrators will be able to edit them or add new questions.
Administrators can also designate specific service defined questions are required, which will include
those questions in calculation of a validity score. Each required service defined question will be worth one
point for run validity.
Service Defined Questions on Standard Run Forms
Service defined questions are collected in a single section on the standard run form, which the
administrator can give an appropriate title. When creating and editing service defined questions,
administrators can use the Question # text box to define the order of each question.
To change the title of the section for service defined questions:
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select EMS.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS, select Service Defined Questions.
The Service Defined Questions page appears.
5. In the Header text box, type a name for the section.
6. Click Submit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 46
Viewing and Editing Service Defined Questions
Administrators can view and edit service defined questions from the same place.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select EMS.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS, select Service Defined Questions.
A list of service defined questions appears.
5. To view or edit a particular question, click the corresponding Edit button.
The Service Defined Question page appears.
6. OPTIONAL: To change the question, available answers, or question setup,
a. Use the provided fields to enter all information about the question.
NOTE: For this option to appear on a run form, be sure the Active checkbox is
selected. To include this run in validity scores, ensure that Yes is selected in the
Required Field section.
b. When finished, to save the changes, click Submit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 47
Adding a New Service Defined Question
Only administrators can add a new service defined question to the system.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select EMS.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS, select Service Defined Questions.
A list of existing questions appears.
5. From the top right, click Add.
6. In the Question text box, type the desired question.
7. From the Question Type drop down menu, select the type of answer that should be given
for this question (e.g., selected from a drop down menu or a text box for free typing).
8. If Drop Down is selected, to enter the possible answers, in the Answer Choices text box,
type each possible answer separated by a comma (,).
9. To enable this question to currently be in use, select the Active checkbox.
OR
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
P a g e | 48
To keep this question in the system but prevent it from currently appearing on run forms,
deselect the Active checkbox.
To select how wide the field will appear for this question (in pixels), in the Answer Width
text box, type the number of pixels wide that the field should appear.
To make this field required and subtract a point from the validity score if it is not
completed, in the Required Field section, select Yes.
In the Export to NEMSIS Research Survey Fields, select whether this question and its
answers should be included in NEMSIS exports.
If you chose to include this question in NEMSIS exports, in the Export Field section,
select whether the export should include the question number or the text of the question.
When finished, to save the new question in the system, click Submit.
To return to the list of questions without saving the new question, click Cancel.
2.12 Working with Statistical Year Information
Administrators can view statistical information about their service in a particular year, as well as adding or
editing the information for particular years.
Viewing and Editing Information for a Year
Statistical information can be viewed and edited from the same page.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select EMS.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS, select Statistical Year Information.
5. From the Information for the following statistical year(s) is available drop down menu,
select the correct year.
6. Click Continue.
The Statistical Information For (Year) page appears.
7. OPTIONAL: To edit the information for that year, in the provided text boxes, type any
desired information.
8. To keep any changes, click Save.
To return to the list of statistical years without saving any changes, click Cancel.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 49
Adding Information for a New Year
Administrators can add a new year to the list and fill in the desired information.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select EMS.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS, select Statistical Year Information.
5. Click Create New Year.
The Create New Statistical Year Information page appears.
6. In the provided fields, type all desired information.
NOTE: The user must fill in at least the Statistical Year text box.
7. To keep the information and the new year in the system, click Save.
To return to the list of statistical years without saving the new year information, click
Cancel.
NOTE: In order to cancel, the Statistical Year text box must contain a valid year,
although this year information will not be saved.
2.13 Setting Up EMS Shifts
You can record which EMS shift is on duty either on the Dashboard of a Field Bridge or, if the field is
added to a run form, on your run form. Before this, however, you must set up the names of your shifts.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Service, select EMS Shifts.
The EMS Shift Setup page appears.
5. To edit an existing shift, click the corresponding edit button.
OR
To add a new shift, click Add New Shift.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 50
The EMS Shift Setup page appears.
6. In the Shift text box, type the name of the shift.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional information about the shift.
8. In the Current Status section, to mark this shift as currently available for use in the system, select
Active.
To save this shift for reference in the system but not make it available for use, in the Current
Status section, select Inactive.
9. When finished, click Submit.
2.14 Adding Favorite Locations
Favorite locations allow users to select a city from a list and automatically complete the county, state and
postal code information in a run form. If users choose to look up a location, favorite locations will appear
at the top of the list for easy entry.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Service, select Favorite Locations.
The Favorite Location Setup page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 51
5. Click Add New Favorite Location.
The Favorite Location Setup page appears.
6. In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code for the desired location.
7. To enter the remaining information, automatically based on the most commonly entered
information for this zip code, select the Check to populate City, County, State from Postal Code
checkbox.
OR
To enter the remaining information by searching for information related to a zip code,
a. Click Lookup.
The Lookup window appears.
b. Using the provided fields, enter as much information as is known about the desired
location.
c. Click Search.
A list of matching locations appears.
d. Click the desired location.
The fields are populated with the selected information.
8. In the Current Status section, select whether the location should currently be active or inactive.
NOTE: Only administrators can re-activate an inactive record.
9. Click Submit.
The location record is saved.
Setting Up a New City
If you need to set up a favorite location for a city that does not appear when you use the Lookup
option, you can do so.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 52
4. Under Service, select Favorite Locations.
The Favorite Location Setup page appears.
5. Click Add New Favorite Location.
The Favorite Location Setup page appears.
6. From the bottom of the page, click Add New City.
The Add New Favorite Location window appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 53
7. From the State drop down menu, select the state that the new city is in.
Additional fields appear.
8.
9.
10.
11.
From the County drop down menu, select the county that the new city is in.
In the City text box, type the name of the city.
In the Postal Code text box, type the postal code for the city.
In the City FIPS text box, type the FIPS code of the city.
NOTE: If you cannot find the correct FIPS code, enter -25.
12. Click Populate Form.
The city information is entered into the form.
13. Click Submit.
The new city is saved as a favorite location.
2.15 Viewing Basic Service Information
The system keeps a summary of your service’s contact and organizational information with the service
profile.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 54
4. Under Service, select Service Information.
The View Service Info page appears, displaying basic information about the service.
2.16 Editing Basic Service Information
Service information is used to provide contact and identification information to any persons who may have
access to the Service Bridge or who receive exported data from the system. This is the information that
appears in the View Service Information section.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 55
4. Under Service, select Service Information.
The View Service Info page appears, displaying basic information about the service.
5. From the bottom of the page, click Edit.
The page becomes editable.
6. Using the provided fields, change or enter any information about the service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 56
7. When finished, to save the information, click OK.
To return to the service information without making the changes, click Cancel.
2.17 Working with Stations
A service can create profiles within the Service Bridge for multiple stations or divisions. Depending on the
permission groups set up for that service, most system users will be able to view the information for each
station, but administrators can also change the station information or add a new station to the system.
Viewing and Editing Station Information
Administrators can view existing station information and, if necessary, change the information for
a particular station.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Service, select Stations.
A list of stations appears.
5. To view or edit information for a particular station, click the name, number or Station icon
for that station.
A summary of the station information appears.
6. OPTIONAL: To edit the station information,
a. Click Edit.
b. Using the provided fields, enter any new or different information desired.
c. When finished, click OK.
Adding a New Station
Only administrators can add a new station to the system.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 57
4. Under Service, select Stations.
A list of existing stations appears.
5. From below the list of stations, click Add a Station.
6. Using the provided fields, enter all desired information for the station.
NOTE: Be sure to enter at least a station number and name and specify whether the
station is active or inactive. Active stations can be worked with in the system, while
inactive stations will have their information stored in the list of stations but will not appear
anywhere else in the system.
7. When finished, to save the new station in the system, click OK.
To clear all fields and start over, click Reset.
To return to the list of stations without saving the new station, click Cancel.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 58
Setting a Default Station
A default station is the station that will automatically be selected on new run forms. Your service
does not need to set a default station but can choose to do so to save data entry time. For this
feature to work, the station you select as the default station must be active.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Service, select Stations.
A list of existing stations appears.
5. For the station to set as the default, in the Default Station column, click the checkbox.
A check appears, indicating that this is now set as the default station.
6. OPTIONAL: To remove any settings controlling the default station,
a. Click the Clear Default Station button.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
b. Click OK.
The default station settings are removed and no station is set as the default.
2.18 Working with Vehicle Information
Run forms can document the vehicles that responded to an incident if the vehicle information has been
added to the system. Depending on permissions, most system users will be able to view vehicle
information, but only administrators will be able to change vehicle information or add or delete a vehicle.
Vehicle profiles can also keep track of a vehicle’s mileage for the year.
Viewing and Editing Vehicle Information
Administrators can view existing vehicle information and, if necessary, change the information for
a particular vehicle.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 59
4. Under Service, select Vehicles.
A list of vehicles appears.
5. To view or edit information for a particular vehicle, click the vehicle ID, call sign or Edit
button for that vehicle.
A summary of the vehicle information appears.
6. OPTIONAL: To edit the vehicle information,
a. Click Edit.
b. Using the provided fields, enter any new or different information desired.
c. When finished, click OK.
Viewing and Entering Vehicle Mileage
Administrators can keep track of a vehicle’s mileage for each year using the EMS Service Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 60
4. Under Service, select Vehicles.
A list of existing vehicles appears.
5. For the appropriate vehicle, click the corresponding Manage Mileage icon
All mileage totals saved in the system appear.
6. OPTIONAL: To add information about mileage for a new year,
a. Click Add Entry.
b. Using the provided fields, type all information about mileage.
c.
.
To save the information, click OK.
To clear all fields and start again, click Reset.
To return to the list of mileage totals without saving, click Cancel.
Adding a New Vehicle
Only administrators can add a new vehicle to the system.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 61
4. Under Service, select Vehicles.
A list of existing vehicles appears.
5. From below the list of stations, click Add a Vehicle.
6. In the Use of Emergency Vehicle section, select the type of incident this vehicle is used
for.
7. In the Unit/Vehicle Number text box, type the ID number of the unit.
8. In the Unit Call Sign text box, type the call sign of the unit used by dispatch.
9. From the Default for EMS Reports drop down menu, select the default vehicle type that
should be applied when this vehicle is selected on EMS reports.
10. From the At Station drop down menu, select the station that this vehicle is used at.
11. In the remaining fields, enter any information about the vehicle that you would like to
track.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 62
12. In the Active Status section, select whether you want this vehicle to be active and
available for use, or inactive and saved in the system only for reference.
13. When finished, to save the new vehicle in the system, click OK.
To clear all fields and start over, click Reset.
To return to the list of vehicles without saving the new vehicle, click Cancel.
Changing the Order of Vehicles
You can update the order in which vehicles will appear on any list of vehicles by changing their
sort order.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Vehicles.
A list of existing vehicles appears.
5. To move a vehicle up in the list of vehicles, click the Up arrow in the Sort column.
The vehicle is moved up in the list.
6. To move a vehicle down in the list of vehicles, click the Down arrow in the Sort column.
The vehicle is moved down in the list.
2.19 Working with Zones and Districts
Administrators can add or edit zone or district information and target performance time for use in run
forms.
Adding a Zone or District Record
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 63
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Service, select Zones/Districts.
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
5. Click Add Zone/District.
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
6. In the provided fields, enter information for the zone or district and the type of
zone/district it is (e.g., fire or EMS).
7. When finished, click OK.
The record is saved.
Editing a Zone or District Record
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 64
4. Under Service, select Zones/Districts.
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
5. For the desired zone or district, click the Edit icon
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click Submit.
2.20 Setting Up AMA Questions
You can choose to set up extra questions to be displayed in the Against Medical Advice signature panel
for patients. These questions can help you collect more detailed information than is collected by default.
When you set up questions, make sure they are worded so that they can be answered with the default
answers of either “I agree/I disagree/ N/A,” or “Yes/No.”
After you set up AMA questions you must also edit the dynamic run form to enable the questions to
appear.
Adding an AMA Question
You can set up as many AMA questions as you would like.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 65
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Custom AMA Questions.
The Manage AMA Questions page appears.
5. Click Add Question.
The Edit AMA Questions page appears.
6. From the Language drop down menu, select the language that this question will be in.
7. In the Question Text text box, type the question.
HINT: The question should be answerable by either “I agree/I disagree/ N/A,” or
“Yes/No,” as these are the options that will be available.
8. In the Active section, select whether this question should be active and available for run
forms, or inactive and stored in the system for reference.
9. In the Include Response Textbox section, select the checkbox to include a text box with
this question that can collect additional information.
10. From the Question Type drop down menu, select which answers should be available to
patients answering this question.
11. When finished, click Save.
The question is added and will be displayed if the appropriate section is available on the
run form.
Editing the Run Form for AMA Questions
If you want to include AMA questions on your run form, you will need to add a new control to the
run form.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 66
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Configuration, select Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor appears.
5. Locate the template you want to edit.
HINT: It might be beneficial to begin with a copy of the template that you want to edit,
if you are editing a template that is in use. This will ensure that providers are still working
with an appropriate run form while you are working on it, as well as giving you a backup if
the run form does not turn out the way you want.
6. For the appropriate run form, click View Tabs.
A list of the run forms tabs appears, with the first tab’s information displayed.
7. Click the tab that contains your signature panels.
HINT: This is usually the Signatures tab, but your service may have assigned a
different name to the tab in your template.
8. Locate the AMA parent control.
OR
If the AMA control is not yet set up on the run form you are working with,
a. Locate or add a new panel for the AMA section.
b. Click Add Control.
The Add Control dialog box appears.
c. Search for the AMA Parent control.
d. Select the AMA Parent Control option.
e. Click View Selected Control.
f. Click Add Control.
The field is added and you are returned to the run form template.
9. For the parent AMA control, click Edit.
The Edit Control dialog box appears.
10. Click View/Edit Child Controls button.
A preview of the control appears.
11. For the control including the current AMA question, click Edit.
NOTE: There are several different controls contained within the AMA parent control.
When you click the correct one, the header in the dialog box should refresh to say
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 67
Control ID: 593.
12. Click View/Edit Child Controls.
The dialog box is refreshed to display the Edit Child Controls page.
13. On the empty space where you would like to include the AMA questions, click Add
Control.
The dialog box refreshes to display the Edit Control options.
14. Use the advanced search options to search for control ID 1266.
15. Select the control with ID 1266.
16. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the control appears.
17. Click Add Control.
The control is added and you are returned to the Edit Child Controls page.
18. OPTIONAL: To change the number of rows or columns that this control spans,
a. For the new control, click Edit.
The Control ID: 1266 dialog box appears.
b. Use the Row Span and/or Column Span options to select the size of the control.
c. When finished, click Save & Back.
The changes are made.
19. Click Back.
The Control ID: 593 page is displayed.
20. Click Save & Back.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 68
21. From the upper right corner of the dialog box, click the Close icon.
The changes are saved.
2.21 Working with Employers
Employer records can be added or edited for selection from a run form.
Adding an Employer Record
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Employers.
The Employer Setup page appears.
5. Click Add New Employer.
The Employer Setup page appears.
6. In the provided fields, enter the employer information.
7. When finished, click Submit.
The employer record is saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 69
Editing an Employer Record
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Employers.
The Employer Setup page appears.
5. For the desired employer, click edit.
The Employer Setup page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click Submit.
2.22 Setting Up First EMS Unit Arriving
If you want to include a field on your run form for the first EMS units that arrives you can set up the values
for that field here. (These values should be your own department’s unit numbers.) This field will not be
included in your run form automatically; you will need to add it in the run form editor.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select First EMS Unit Arriving.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 70
The First EMS Unit Arriving Setup page appears.
5. To edit an existing EMS unit, click the corresponding edit button.
OR
To add a new EMS unit, click Add New EMS Unit.
The page refreshes to display an EMS unit profile.
6. OPTIONAL: To assign this EMS unit to a particular order in the list of EMS units, in the Sort
Order text box, type a number corresponding to this unit’s order (e.g., 1 for first).
7. In the EMS Unit Name text box, type a name for this EMS unit.
8. In the Current Status section, to mark this unit as currently available for use in the system, select
Active.
To save this unit for reference in the system but not make it available for use, in the Current
Status section, select Inactive.
9. When finished, click Submit.
2.23 Setting Up Medications Requiring a User Description
If your run forms include the Other Medication Name control (control #1051), you can set up the list of
medications that will cause the Other Medication Name field to appear and prompt the user for a
description. This option is only available if you use a dynamic run form template and if the Other
Medication Name field is available on your template.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 71
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Other Medications.
The Other Medication Name Setup page appears.
5. In the Medications list, select the medication(s) that should cause the Other Medication Name
field to appear.
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired option.
6. Click OK.
The medications are added to the list.
7. Repeat steps 5–6 until all desired medications are added to the list.
2.24 Setting Up Other EMS Agencies at the Scene
You can set up names of any other EMS agencies in the area that might respond to a scene, which can
then be selected and documented on run forms.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 72
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Other EMS Agencies at Scene.
The Other EMS Agencies at Scene Setup page appears.
5. To add a new agency name to the list,
a. In the Add New Agency text box at the bottom of the page, type the name of the agency.
b. OPTIONAL: To specify this agency’s position in the list of other agencies, in the Sort
Order text box, type a number corresponding to the desired position (e.g., type 1 for first).
c. Click OK.
The agency is added to the list and a new blank row appears.
6. To make changes to any existing EMS agency names,
a. Make the desired changes.
b. Click OK.
7. To delete an agency that is currently in the list,
a. Select the corresponding Delete checkbox.
b. Click OK.
The agency is removed from the list and will no longer be available on run forms.
2.25 Working with Insurance Companies
Insurance company records can be added to a run form for easy selection.
Adding an Insurance Company Record
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 73
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Insurance Companies.
The Insurance Company Setup page appears.
5. Click Add New Insurance Company.
The Insurance Company Setup page appears.
6. In the provided fields, enter the company’s information.
7. When finished, click Submit.
The insurance company record is saved.
Editing an Insurance Company Record
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Insurance Companies.
The Insurance Company Setup page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 74
5. For the desired insurance company, click edit.
The Employer Setup page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click Submit.
2.26 Setting Up Other Responding Units
If you want to include a field on your run form for other units that respond to a call (e.g., fire departments,
police departments, utility companies), you can set up the values for that field here. This field will not be
included in your run form automatically; you will need to add it in the run form editor.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Other Responding Units.
The Other Responding Units Setup page appears.
5. To edit an existing unit, click the corresponding edit button.
OR
To add a new unit, click Add New EMS Unit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 75
The page refreshes to display an unit profile.
6. OPTIONAL: To assign this unit to a particular order in the list of units, in the Sort Order text box,
type a number corresponding to this unit’s order (e.g., 1 for first).
7. In the EMS Unit Name text box, type a name for this unit.
8. In the Current Status section, to mark this unit as currently available for use in the system, select
Active.
To save this unit for reference in the system but not make it available for use, in the Current
Status section, select Inactive.
9. When finished, click Submit.
2.27 Customizing Signature Consent Text
If you would like to edit the consent text included for signatures, you can do so. If you change the consent
text, previous run forms will not be affected by the changes.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Signatures.
If no customized signatures are set up, a warning appears.
5. Click Yes.
The Signature Edit Setup page appears.
6. Using the drop down menus, select the consent text you would like to edit.
A preview of the existing consent text appears.
7. Click Edit.
The consent text becomes editable.
8. Make any desired changes.
OR
To return edited consent text to the system default text, in the Set signature text to system default
section, click Yes.
9. Click Submit.
2.28 Enabling the Auto Narration Feature
You can choose whether or not to enable the auto narration feature, which will enter narrative text into a
run form based on the information that is already in the run form. If auto narration is enabled, patient care
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 76
providers can select the type of narrative to be generated and in some cases will be required to answer
additional questions, after which the narrative is generated.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Configuration, select Auto-Narration.
The Auto Narration Setup page appears.
5. To enable automatic narrative generation, select On.
OR
To prevent automatic narratives from being generated, select Off.
6. Click OK.
The setting is saved.
2.29 Enabling the CMS Billing Calculator
If enabled, the CMS Billing Calculator automatically generates a suggested CMS billing rate. You can
choose whether to enable the CMS Billing Calculator, as well as whether the calculated billing rate should
be changeable by the provider entering the run form or not.
This option may or may not be available to you, based on the system setup by the state.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Configuration, select CMS Billing Calculator.
The CMS Billing Calculator Setup page appears.
5. To enable the CMS Billing Calculator, select On.
OR
To prevent the CMS Billing Calculator from providing a billing rate, select Off.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 77
6. If the CMS Billing Calculator is enabled, select whether the calculated rate should be changeable
by the provider filling out the run form (Suggest) or automatically applied and unchangeable
(Overwrite).
7. When finished, click Save.
The settings are saved.
2.30 Enabling the Interactive Physical Assessment
You can choose whether to enable the interactive physical assessment for your run forms. You may want
to turn this off if your computers do not allow Flash or if you do not have a high bandwidth (128KB or
greater) connection.
If the interactive physical assessment is enabled, providers will be able to work with an interactive
physical image to enter medical and injury assessments. If the interactive physical assessment is not
enabled, providers will work with a collection of fields similar to the rest of the run form to enter these
assessments. However, if you turn off the interactive assessment, you must have the non-interactive
assessment control included in your run forms.
EXAMPLE:
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 78
4. Under EMS Form Configuration, select Interactive Physical Assessment.
The Interactive Assessment Setup page appears.
5. To enable the interactive physical assessment, select On.
OR
To disable to interactive physical assessment, select Off.
6. When finished, click OK.
The changes are applied.
2.31 Setting Up Medication and Procedure Permissions
Administrators can set which medications and procedures can be documented by personnel in each
certification level. Procedures and medications that are not set for a certification level will not be available
when staff members with this level are selected from the run form.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Meds/Procs by Certification Level.
The Modify Medication and Procedure Permissions by Certification Level page appears.
5. From the Certification Level drop down menu, select the certification level for which to set
permissions.
6. From the Activities drop down menu, select the type of activity for which to set up permissions.
The Assigning Permissions section appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 79
7. To add an activity to the allowed activities for the certification level,
a. From the Restricted list, select the desired activity.
HINT: To select multiple activities, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each desired
activity. To select a range of activities, press and hold Shift while clicking the first and last
activity in the range.
b. Click Add
.
The activity is added to the Allowed list.
8. To remove an activity from the list of allowed activities for the certification level,
a. From the Allowed list, select the desired activity.
HINT: To select multiple activities, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each desired
activity. To select a range of activities, press and hold Shift while clicking the first and last
activity in the range.
b. Click Remove
.
9. To change the order of allowed activities,
a. From the Allowed list, select the activity to move.
b. Click the Up and/or Down buttons until the activity is in the desired place.
10. When finished with this level and type of activity, click Submit.
11. Repeat steps 5–10 until all certification levels and types of activities are set up.
2.32 Setting Up the Primary Role of Unit
You can set up the value that will be automatically entered for the role of a unit of run forms.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Resources, select Primary Role of Unit.
The Primary Role of Unit Setup page appears.
5. From the Primary Role of Unit drop down menu, select the desired default role.
6. Click OK.
2.33 Setting Up Time Formats
You can determine whether run forms should document all times (including response times, transfer of
care times and activity times) down to the second or the minute.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 80
4. Under EMS Form Configuration, click Time Documentation.
The Time Documentation Setup page appears.
5. Select the desired time format.
6. Click OK.
The format is saved.
2.34 Sorting Transferring Agencies
The agencies that your service could transfer patients to or from that will be available to add to run forms
are set up in the Administration section. In this section, you can select which of the available agencies
should be added to the run form for this service at the top of the list. Transferring agencies can then be
quickly selected from run forms when necessary.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Sorting.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Sorting, click Agency Transfer/Transport.
The Agencies Transferred To/From Names Setup page appears.
5. To add an agency to the list, from the New Agency section, click the agency to add.
6. Click OK.
7. To remove a agency from the list, from the list of agencies at the top of the page, select the
desired Delete checkbox.
8. Click OK.
9. To re-order agencies, in the Sequence text boxes, type the number corresponding to the desired
order.
HINT: You only need to type in the desired numbers for the agencies you want to move. Other
agencies will take their order in the list based on the new numbers.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 81
10. When finished making changes, to save, click OK.
2.35 Sorting Controlled Substances
You can add controlled substances to appear on the run form. These will appear in the grid when you add
a controlled substance signature.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Sorting.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Sorting, click Controlled Substances.
The Controlled Substances page appears.
5. To add a substance to the list, from the Medications section, click the medication to add.
6. Click Save.
The medication is added.
7. To enter the default dosage that will appear on the grid when this medication is selected, in the
Amount Taken and Controlled Substance Amount Units sections, enter the amount.
8. To remove a substance from the list, from the list of substances at the top of the page, select the
desired Delete checkbox.
9. Click Save.
2.36 Sorting Favorite Destinations
The destinations that will be available to add to run forms are set up in the Administration section. In this
section, you can select which of the available destinations should be added to the run form for this
service. Favorite destinations will be at the top of the list of destinations, allowing them to be selected
quickly and easily from run forms.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Sorting.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 82
4. Under Sorting, click Destinations.
The Destination Names Setup page appears.
5. To add a destination to the list, from the New Destination section, click the destination to add.
6. Click OK.
7. To remove a destination from the list, from the list of destinations at the top of the page, select the
desired Delete checkbox.
8. Click OK.
9. To re-order destinations, in the Sequence text boxes, type the number corresponding to the
desired order.
HINT: You only need to type in the desired numbers for the destinations you want to move.
Other destinations will take their order in the list based on the new numbers.
10. When finished making changes, to save, click OK.
2.37 Setting Up Dynamic Run Form Options
When using the dynamic run form, there are several options that you can set up that will apply to all
dynamic run form templates that your agency uses.
Setting Up Automatic Completion for Activity Times
You can set up the system to automatically fill in a specific time for activity records added to your
dynamic run forms.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 83
4. Under Dynamic Run Form, select Activity Times.
The Auto Fill In Time Fields for Activities page appears.
5. In the Default Times To section, select the option that times should be automatically set
to for new activity records added to any dynamic run form template.
6. Click OK.
The setting is saved.
Displaying the Response Times Panel
You can set the Response Times panel to automatically be open and pinned when the dynamic
run form is first opened.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Dynamic Run Form, select Auto Dock Response Times.
The Dynamic Run Form Setup page appears.
5. To display the Response Times panel whenever a dynamic run form is opened, select
Yes.
6. Click OK.
The setting is saved.
Selecting Odometer Field Auto Entry
You can choose to have the dynamic run form automatically fill in odometer fields with the value
that you enter in the first odometer field in the run form.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 84
4. Under Dynamic Run Form, select Auto-Popular Odometer Fields.
The Dynamic Run Form Setup page appears.
5. To automatically enter the first odometer field in all subsequent odometer fields, select
Yes.
6. Click OK.
The setting is saved.
Enabling Audit Tracking for Run Forms
You can choose to either enable audit tracking for all run forms or to allow run form audit tracking
to be selected per incident.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Dynamic Run Form, select Audit Tracking.
The Audit Tracking Always On Setup page appears.
5. To ensure that incident audit tracking is always used, select Yes.
OR
To allow incident audit tracking to be determined by incident, select No.
6. Click OK.
The settings are saved.
Setting Automatic Saving between Tabs
You can set the dynamic run form to automatically save each time a user switches tabs in the run
form.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 85
4. Under Dynamic Run Form, select Auto-Save After Switching Tabs.
The Dynamic Run Form Setup page appears.
5. To enable automatic saving whenever a user switches tabs, click Yes.
6. Click OK.
The setting is saved.
Enabling Rapid Entry Listboxes
Rapid entry listboxes are a type of run form field that allow you to select options by typing within
the list box and selecting the desired option or by using the Lookup button. You can choose to
enable these or to instead use drop down menus for all these fields.
EXAMPLE:
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Dynamic Run Form, select Rapid Entry Listboxes.
The Rapid Entry Listboxes Setup page appears.
5. To enable rapid entry listboxes, select On.
6. Click OK.
The setting is applied.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 86
2.38 Setting Up Field Bridge Options
Services that are using the EMS Field Bridge in addition to the EMS Service Bridge can set information to
flow between the two applications. This allows any changes that are made to run forms or staff lists to be
sent to the run forms in the Field Bridge and any data collected with the Field Bridge to be automatically
uploaded to the Service Bridge database for central access. Administrators can set these options for
information sharing.
To change the Field Bridge integration options:
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Preferences, click General.
The Field Bridge Setup page appears.
5. To ensure that your service is using the Field Bridge with this Service Bridge, in the Do you use
the EMS Field Bridge for field data collection? section, select Yes.
6. To set the incident number to automatically be the same as the call number for run forms in the
Field Bridge, in the Incident Number Same as Call Number section, select Yes.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
P a g e | 87
HINT: In order for this option to work, your Field Bridge must be updated to at least version
4.2.
To set new users to synchronize to the Field Bridge by default, in the Default to Synchronize Staff
section, select Yes.
To enable active protocols and synchronize all active protocols set up on the Service Bridge to
your Field Bridge systems, in the Active Protocol section, select On.
To enable CAD integrations, in the CAD Download section, select Yes.
NOTE: This option is only available if the CAD module has been integrated.
If you have the CAD module and want to warn users if they are entering data that will overwrite
CAD data, in the Prompt User if overwriting CAD data section, select Yes.
To display a warning message to any user who is posting and will be overwriting an existing call
in the system, in the Prompt User if overwriting a call when posting section, select Yes.
NOTE: Run forms can be overwritten if they have the same incident number, call number and
PCR number.
To set run locking options for calls that are posted, in the Lock Calls Upon Post section, select the
desired option.
HINT: In order for this option to work, your Field Bridge must be updated to at least version
5.3.
To set options for marking calls as completed when they are posted from the Field Bridge, in the
Marks calls as “Completed” Upon Post section, select the desired setting.
To copy repeat patient data to the Field Bridge during syncing, in the Sync Repeat Patients to the
EMS Field Bridge section, select Yes.
HINT: In order for this option to work, your Field Bridge must be updated to at least version 4.
To set Field Bridge systems to search the repeat patient database online, in the Online Repeat
Patient Search section, select Yes.
HINTs:
This option will not appear unless you have the Sync Repeat Patients section set to No.
If you set this option to Yes, Field Bridge systems will not be able to use repeat patients if they do
not have access to the Internet. However, the repeat patient database will not need to be stored
on each computer with the Field Bridge.
To copy documents available on the Service Bridge to the Field Bridge, in the Allow documents to
be synced down to each Field Bridge section, select Yes.
HINT: In order for this option to work, your Field Bridge must be updated to at least version 4.
To automatically fill in odometer fields with the value that was entered into the previous odometer
field, in the Auto Populate Odometer Fields section, select Yes.
HINT: In order for this option to work, your Field Bridge must be updated to at least version
4.5.2.
To display a notification and link to the Service Bridge inbox when the logged in user has an
unread inbox message, in the Display Inbox Notification section, select Yes.
To require providers to confirm the information included in the Field Bridge Dashboard each time
a new run is begun, in the display Inbox Notification section, select Yes.
HINT: If this option is set to Yes, a prompt will appear each time a new run form is started
confirming that the shift information on the Dashboard is still accurate before it will enter that
information into the new run form.
When finished, click Submit.
The information to be copied to the Field Bridge on syncing is set.
Forcing Field Bridge Syncing
If you have made major changes to the Field Bridge settings or for any other reason want to force
the Field Bridge systems connected to your Service Bridge to sync the next time they post data,
you can choose to do so.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 88
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Preferences, click General.
The Field Bridge Setup page appears.
5. From the bottom of the page, click Force Re-Sync for Version 4.X and 5.X.
All Field Bridge systems will download all resources the next time they sync.
Configuring Automatic Posting and Syncing
Administrators can create a message that will prompt users to post runs or sync the Field Bridge
and select when the message(s) will appear.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 89
4. Under Preferences, click Auto Post/Sync.
The Auto Post/Sync page appears.
5. To create a pop up window that will prompt users to post runs, select the Auto-Post on
Log On, Auto-Post on Log Off or Auto-Post upon Closing Incident Window checkboxes.
HINT: The option that is selected will determine when the pop up window will appear.
NOTE: All three options can be selected for multiple reminders.
6. In the Auto-Post Message text box, type the text that should appear in the pop up
window.
7. To select times when the Field Bridge should prompt users to sync, in the Auto Sync
section, select the desired time.
HINT: This option will only work on Field Bridge systems that have been updated to
version 4.5.3.1 or above.
8. When finished, click OK.
Configuring Incident Clearing
You can use your Service Bridge to set the Field Bridge to automatically delete run reports from
the system after they have been posted and after a particular amount of time. Runs will still be
saved on the Service Bridge system.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 90
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Preferences, click Clear Out Old Incidents.
The Clear Out Old Incidents page appears.
5. To automatically delete old incidents, in the Automatically Clear Old Incidents section,
select Yes.
6. To select the number of days an incident report should be saved before deleting it from
the system, in the Number of Days Old section, type the desired number of days.
7. Click OK.
The changes are saved.
Showing or Hiding Dashboard Widgets
The Field Bridge Dashboard has several widgets that can control information being input into run
forms, such as the Current Crew or Current Shift widgets. Administrators can choose whether
these widgets should be displayed on the Dashboard for the Field Bridge or hidden. Widgets will
be displayed by default until an administrator changes these settings.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Preferences, click Dashboard Widgets.
The Customize Dashboard Widgets page appears.
5. For any widget to hide from the Dashboard, select Off.
6. For any widget to display on the Dashboard, select On.
7. When finished, click OK.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 91
Requiring Passwords for Posting
You can set the Field Bridge to require the primary patient caregiver(s) from each incident to
enter their passwords before the incident is posted.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Preferences, click Password On Post.
The Password on Post page appears.
5. To require a password from the primary patient caregiver for a run to be posted, select
Yes.
6. If you required a password, in the Password on Post Message text box, type the
message that should appear when the prompt for the password appears.
7. When finished, click OK.
The settings are saved and will be applied once each Field Bridge system syncs.
Controlling EKG Monitor Setup
If your service uses EKG monitors with the Field Bridge, you can control some setup options on
the Service Bridge. These options will then be set up in the same way for all Field Bridge
systems.
All settings specific to connecting to the monitor will still need to be set up per computer on the
Field Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 92
4. Under Preferences, click EKG Monitor.
The EKG Monitor Setup page appears.
5. Click the name of the type of monitor you want to set up.
6. Configure the settings you want to be applied to all Field Bridge systems.
NOTE: For more information about these settings, please refer to the setup guide for
that type of EKG monitor and the Field Bridge.
7. When finished, click Submit.
The settings are saved.
8. To return to the list of EKG monitors, click Cancel.
9. Select the checkbox for the type of monitor you just set up.
10. Click Submit.
11. From the top of the page, in the Sync Service Bridge EKG settings to the Field Bridge
section, select Yes.
12. Click Submit.
The settings will be copied to all Field Bridge systems when they sync.
Setting Up Power Tool Options
Administrators can configure the options that will be available for the Medication, Medication
Ordered, IV, Procedure, Procedure Ordered and Cardiac power tools. This information will sync
to any Field Bridge systems.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Power Tools.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Power Tools, click Power Tools Setup.
5. From the Select Power Tool drop down menu, select the power tool to configure.
6. From the Select Power Tool Section drop down menu, select the portion of the power tool
for which to configure the possible options.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 93
Any current settings will appear.
7. To add a new option, from the Options scroll list, select the first option to be available and
click Submit.
8. To change the name that will appear in the list, in the Button Abbreviation text box, type
the new name.
9. To change the order in which the item will appear, in the Sequence text box, type the
number corresponding to the item’s place in the list.
10. To remove an option from the list, select the corresponding Deactivate checkbox and
select Submit.
Setting Up Power Tool Versions
Version 5 introduced enhanced versions of several power tools. You can select whether to use
the enhanced version or to stick with the familiar, classic power tools. The enhanced tools will be
selected by default.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Power Tools.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 94
4. Under Power Tools, click Power Tools Version Setup.
The Power Tools Version Setup page appears.
5. Select the version you want to display for each power tool.
6. Click Submit.
The changes are saved.
Setting Power Tool Display Options
Service administrators can configure which power tools will appear on the Power Tool toolbar in
the Field Bridge. By default, all power tools will be displayed and available for use. Service
administrators can choose to hide certain power tools from the toolbar, but will need to edit run
forms to remove any links to the power tools that are within the run form.
You can also choose to move the Power Tool toolbar from the left side of the run form to a button
on the right side (which will appear in the toolbar with the Response Times and Validation
buttons). With the left side option, the toolbar will always be visible. With the right side option, the
toolbar will open when the right pane is opened.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Power Tools.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 95
4. Under Power Tools, click Power Tools Visibility.
The Power Tools Visibility page appears.
5. From the Power Tools Position section, select where the toolbar should appear.
HINT: If you choose to leave the toolbar on the left, it will always be displayed on the
left. If you choose to place it on the right, it will add a Power Tools button to the right
toolbar, which will display the toolbar when the right pane is expanded.
6. For any power tool to hide from the Power Tool toolbar, select Off.
7. To change the order of the power tools in the toolbar, from the Sort Order drop down
menus for each power tool, select the desired position in the list.
8. When finished, click Save.
Configuring Quick Launch Links
Administrators can set up links to applications or websites that will open from the Quick Launch
button in the Field Bridge. In order for this option to work with applications, the applications must
be located in the same location on each computer with the Field Bridge and the administrator
must know the path to that application (e.g., C:\Program Files\Microsoft
Office\Office12\Word.exe).
NOTE: Quick launch links may not work correctly if using Internet Explorer 7 or higher.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Non Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 96
4. Under Non Run Form Resources, click Quick Launch Links.
The Quick Launch Links page appears.
5. For the next blank link, or for a link to be replaced, in the Label Name text box, type the
text that will appear in the Quick Launch menu for this application or website.
6. In the New Path text box, type the link or click Browse… to navigate to a location on your
computer.
HINT: It may be most effective to copy the path from a computer running the Field
Bridge to avoid errors.
7. When finished, click OK.
Working with Custom Reports and Narratives
Administrators have the option to deactivate certain reports or narratives if they are not used, or
for advanced users, to edit or upload customized reports or narratives.
The Service Bridge controls the reports and narratives that are available for both the Service
Bridge system and the Field Bridge system. The reports and narratives available for the Service
Bridge are by default applied to the Field Bridge list, although that list can be changed. System
administrators will set up the reports and narratives for the Service Bridge in the Administration
section.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 97
Deactivating Specific Reports or Narratives
If there are certain reports or narratives that your service does not use or that you would
like to be unavailable from the Field Bridge, you can deactivate them using the Service
Bridge. System administrators will set up the reports and narratives for the Service Bridge
in the Admin section.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Non Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Non Run Form Resources, click PDF Reports & Narratives.
The Manage ImageTrend EMS Field Bridge Reports & Narratives page appears.
5. For the report(s) or narrative(s) to deactivate, deselect the Active checkbox.
The report(s) or narrative(s) are deactivated and will not be available for use from
the Field Bridge.
NOTE: If these reports or narratives were previously available for use, they
will not be removed until each Field Bridge system syncs.
Enabling Default Reports and Narratives
If you have set up different reports and narratives to be available from the Field Bridge as
from the Service Bridge, you have the option of resetting the available reports and
narratives to be the same as those set up for the Service Bridge. System administrators
will set up the reports and narratives for the Service Bridge in the Admin section.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Non Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 98
4. Under Non Run Form Resources, click PDF Reports & Narratives.
The Manage ImageTrend EMS Field Bridge Reports & Narratives page appears.
5. Click Get System Narratives and Reports.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click Yes.
The reports and narratives are reset to be the same as those set up for the
Service Bridge.
Uploading New Reports and Narratives
People who have knowledge of XML, XSL, XSLT and ImageTrend’s reports and
narratives can create custom reports, narratives and narrative questions. ImageTrend
recommends not creating new reports and narratives unless you are extremely familiar
with the data structure and reports and narratives used for the Service Bridge and Field
Bridge. Once these files have been created, you can upload them to the Service Bridge
to be distributed to the Field Bridge. After uploading a new report, narrative or narrative
question, be sure to select whether this file should be active or inactive.
This option is useful for uploading reports, narrative or narrative questions that will only
be available for the Field Bridge. Please keep in mind that if you enable the default
reports and narratives, this will delete any custom reports or narratives uploaded in this
way. System administrators will set up the reports and narratives for the Service Bridge in
the Admin section.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Non Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 99
4. Under Non Run Form Resources, click PDF Reports & Narratives.
The Manage ImageTrend EMS Field Bridge Reports & Narratives page appears.
5. In the last section on the pace, in the New file section, click Browse…
The Choose File dialog box appears.
6. Navigate to and select the desired file.
7. Click Open.
The Choose File dialog box closes.
8. Click Upload.
The file is added to the list of reports, narratives or narrative questions.
Uploading Logos for Reports
You can upload your service’s logo to be printed on any reports from the Field Bridge systems.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Non Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 100
4. Under Non Run Form Resources, click Upload Report Logo.
The Upload Logo page appears.
5. In the New Logo section, click Choose File…
The Choose file dialog box appears.
6. Navigate to and select the desired logo document.
7. Click Open.
The Choose file dialog box closes.
8. Click Upload.
The file is uploaded and will be sent to each Field Bridge when it syncs.
Configuring Validity Compliance Documentation
Administrators can cause a pop up window to appear whenever the validity of a run form being
closed is less than 100%. This window can either inform the user of the fields that were required
and not completed or require the user to enter reasons as to why the fields were not completed.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Validation.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Validation, click Compliance Settings.
The Validity Compliance page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 101
5. To cause the pop up window to appear, in the Form Pop Up section, select On.
6. To require a reason to be entered for each field that was not completed, in the Reasons
Required section, select Yes.
7. When finished, click OK.
Configuring Required Signature Validation
Using the Service Bridge, you can select which signature will be required for a complete run form.
These validity requirements will sync to the Field Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Validation.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Validation, click Signatures.
The Signature Validation page appears.
5. For the signatures to require using validation rules, select On.
6. For the signatures that should not be required, select Off.
7. When finished, click OK.
Setting Up Automatic Time Entry
You can set up the system to automatically enter a particular time when activity records are
added to a run form.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 102
4. Under Run Form Resources, click Auto-Fill Time Fields.
The Auto Fill Control page appears.
5. In the Default Times To section, select the time that should be automatically entered for
any activity added to a run form.
6. Click OK.
Setting Up Automatic Saving
If you set up options in the Web-based system, all Field Bridge systems will automatically be set
up with these configurations when they sync.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Run Form Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Run Form Resources, click Auto-Save.
The Auto Save Control page appears.
5. In the Auto Save section, select when the run form should be automatically saved.
HINTS:
ImageTrend highly recommends selecting the Auto Save When Switching Between Tabs
option, as this will prevent data from being lost if a provider forgets to save before moving
on to a new tab.
If you choose to save after a certain number of minutes, you can enter the number of
minutes.
6. If you chose to automatically save after a specific number of minutes, in the Set How
Many Minutes Before Each Save text box, type the number of minutes.
7. When finished, click OK.
The settings are saved, and will be applied to all Field Bridge systems the next time they
sync.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 103
2.39 Working with Active Protocols
Active protocols provide a checklist of steps and links to specific fields in the run form that should be
taken for any primary impression or protocol. An active protocol can be defined for any provider
impression or protocol, and will help to guide staff members through performing and documenting any
standard procedure. If a situation differs from the norm, staff members can still skip steps and provide an
explanation or can change the standard values.
Administrators can set up new active protocols for use in the EMS Field Bridge and with dynamic run
forms. Active protocols can be accessed from two different places in the Setup tab, but changes made to
any active protocol will appear on both Active Protocol pages. There are two different lists of active
protocols that can be set up on the Active Protocol page; you can set up protocols from both lists and
they will be available for use.
Creating Active Protocols
Administrators can set up new active protocols for use on the EMS Field Bridge or dynamic run
form.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Run Form Resources > Active Protocol.
OR
Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form > Active Protocol.
The Active Protocol page appears.
4. From the Undefined Provider Impression Protocols scroll list or the Undefined Protocols
Used scroll list, select the impression to which the protocol will apply.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 104
5. Click Add Protocol.
The Protocol Setup window appears.
6. To create an item on the protocol checklist,
a. In the Checkbox section, select Yes.
b. In the Question Text text box, type the text for the item.
c. To determine where in the checklist the item will appear, in the Sort Order text
box, type the number of the item’s position.
d. When the item is ready, click Add Question.
The item appears in the Protocol Setup for “(Impression)” section.
e. To create a custom action, click the Edit Custom Actions icon
.
f. From the Category drop down menu, select the type of action that will be
completed.
g. From the Action Name drop down menu, select the action that should be
performed in the Field Bridge.
h. When finished, click Add Action.
i. To add another action for this step, repeat steps f–h.
7. To add more items on the protocol checklist, repeat step 7.
8. When finished, to save the protocol, click Done.
Viewing and Editing Active Protocols
Administrators can view currently set up protocols and, if necessary, edit them.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Run Form Resources > Active Protocol.
OR
Under the Run Forms section, select Dynamic Run Form > Active Protocol.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 105
The Active Protocol page appears.
4. From the Undefined Provider Impression Protocols scroll list or the Undefined Protocols
Used scroll list, click the name of the protocol to work with.
5. To edit the name or sort order of a step,
a. Click the corresponding Edit button.
b. Using the provided fields, make any changes.
c. When finished, click Update Question.
6. To edit the actions contained within a step,
a. Click the corresponding Edit Custom Actions icon
.
b. For the action to edit, click the corresponding Edit icon
c. Using the provided fields, make the desired changes.
d. When finished, click Edit Action.
7. To add new actions to a step,
.
a. Click the corresponding Edit Custom Actions icon
.
b. Using the provided fields, select the category and action.
c. When finished, click Add Action.
8. When finished, click Done.
2.40 Setting a Background Image for Field Bridge Xpress
If your service uses Field Bridge Xpress, you can set a custom image for the background of the login
page.
The recommended size for the background image is 768x719 pixels. If your image is a different size, it
will be resized automatically. However, uploading a picture of the recommended size can ensure that
your image does not get stretched or distorted in order to fit on the login page. Images must be in JPEG
format.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 106
3. Under the Field Bridge section, click Xpress Settings > Login Background Image.
The Login Page Background Image page appears.
4. In the Upload Image section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
5. Navigate to and select the image you want to set as the background image.
6. Click Open.
The file is selected.
7. From the bottom of the page, click Upload.
The new background image is applied.
Reverting to the Default Image
At any point, you can revert the system-set image back to the default background image, or reset
all services to the default background image.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, click Xpress Settings > Login Background Image.
The Login Page Background Image page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 107
4. To revert to the default background image, from the bottom of the page, click Revert to
default.
2.42 Configuring Incident Clearing for Field Bridge Xpress
You can use your Service Bridge to set Field Bridge Xpress to automatically delete run reports from the
system after they have been posted and after a particular amount of time. Runs will still be saved on the
Service Bridge system.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Field Bridge section, select Xpress Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Xpress Settings, click Clear Out Old Incidents.
The Clear Out Old Incidents page appears.
5. To automatically delete old incidents, in the Automatically Clear Old Incidents section, select Yes.
6. To select the number of days an incident report should be saved before deleting it from the
system, in the Number of Days Old section, type the desired number of days.
7. Click OK.
The changes are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 108
CHAPTER 3
WORKING WITH THE LAYOUT EDITOR
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 109
3.1 Chapter Overview
The Layout Editor allows you to create custom templates for PDF forms, QA/QI review forms and EMS
run forms. This chapter explains how to work with the report and run form templates in the Layout Editor,
including tips, terms and the steps you’ll need to take to update a template.
3.2 Overview of Template Types
The Layout Editor allows you to work with a variety of different types of templates that can be used
throughout Service Bridge and (if you use it) Field Bridge. Most of these templates will be edited in the
same way, although each type does have some unique items that you can work with.
Dynamic Run Form Templates
Updating a dynamic run form template allows you to make changes to the form that providers
use to document run forms with Service Bridge, Field Bridge and/or Field Bridge Xpress.
Dynamic run form templates allow you to enter and update the fields that can be filled out
within the form.
QA/QI Review Templates
Updating QA/QI review templates allows you to create or make changes to the form(s) that
are used to in QA/QI review. QA/QI review templates allow you to add and update QA/QI
questions that can be filled out within the form and the run form fields that will be read-only
for review.
NOTE: Before creating QA/QI templates, you will want to set up QA/QI questions.
PDF Report Templates
Updating PDF report templates allows you to create or make changes to the reports that can
be printed from a run form. PDF report templates allow you to add or edit the incident
information that will appear on the PDF report.
QA/QI Report Templates
Updating QA/QI report templates allows you to create or make changes to the reports that
can be printed from a QA/QI review form. QA/QI report templates allow you to add or edit
both the QA/QI questions and the incident information that will appear on the PDF report.
NOTE: Before creating QA/QI templates, you will want to set up QA/QI questions.
3.3 Getting Started with Templates
The following information about run form, PDF report and QA/QI form templates
Dynamic Run Form Templates: Tips and Recommendations
Using Service Bridge, administrators can create new custom EMS run forms for the Field Bridge
and Service Bridge or can edit existing templates using the dynamic run form. This allows you to
create templates for specific common situations, such as a cancelled call. In addition, you can
rearrange the fields, panels and tabs in existing run forms to make the run form specific to your
agency. Please keep in mind that no additional instructions will be available for filling out custom
run forms that you have created, although all features will work in the same way.
Both service and system administrators will have access to the Layout Editor for the dynamic run
form. As a service administrator, if you encounter run forms that you cannot edit, they may have
been set up on a system administrator level. In this case, you can create a copy of the run form
and edit the copy to your desired specifications.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE





P a g e | 110
When beginning to work with creating or editing run forms, ImageTrend recommends that
you create a copy of the run form you are working with. Make changes to the copy to
prevent accidental changes to a necessary run form that is currently in use.
When creating a new run form, it may be easier to copy an existing run form if much of
the information will be the same. This allows you to change, move or delete fields, panels
and tabs, without having to add all information in from scratch.
New Field Bridge templates will not be copied to each Field Bridge until the Field Bridge
syncs with Service Bridge.
If a template does not display multiple tabs for required fields, the run form may have a
low validity score due to fields that could not be completed.
When working on a template, be sure that template is inactive until it is finished.
Otherwise, crew members may attempt to document a run on an unfinished run form.
QA/QI Review Templates: Tips and Recommendations
A QA/QI form template allows you to create a form that displays both the question that needs to
be answered (e.g., Was the correct date of service entered) and the field that the data is
contained within (e.g., the Incident Date field). When reviewers use this template, they will see
the question as a field that they can fill out, and the associated field from the incident form will
display the information that is recorded for the incident they are working with.
As a service administrator, if you encounter report templates that you cannot edit, they may have
been set up on a system administrator level. In this case, you can create or request a copy of the
template and edit the copy to your desired specifications.




When beginning to work with creating or editing templates, ImageTrend recommends that
you create a copy of the QA/QI review form template you are working with. Make
changes to the copy to prevent accidental changes to a necessary form that is currently
in use.
When creating a new form, it may be easier to copy an existing template if much of the
information will be the same. This allows you to change, move or delete fields, panels
and tabs, without having to add all information in from scratch.
When working on a template, be sure that template is inactive until it is finished.
Otherwise, crew members may attempt to use an unfinished review form.
We recommend a two-column layout for QA/QI forms, so that you can put the QA/QI form
question in one column and the information that needs to be reviewed in the other
column.
Report Templates: Tips and Recommendations
The PDF Layout Editor is available for people who have access to the Layout Editor in Service
Bridge. The PDF Layout Editor allows you to customize templates for the printable PDF reports
that are generated from EMS run forms and/or QA/QI review forms. This information applies to
both types of PDF reports.
As a service administrator, if you encounter report templates that you cannot edit, they may have
been set up on a system administrator level. In this case, you can create or request a copy of the
template and edit the copy to your desired specifications. If you have worked previously with the
Layout Editor for the dynamic run form, you will find that working in the PDF Layout Editor is very
similar.
Before you can use the PDF Layout Editor, you must have access to the Layout Editor.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE



P a g e | 111
When beginning to work with creating or editing templates, ImageTrend recommends that
you create a copy of the report template you are working with. Make changes to the copy
to prevent accidental changes to a necessary report that is currently in use.
When creating a new report, it may be easier to copy an existing template if much of the
information will be the same. This allows you to change, move or delete fields, panels
and tabs, without having to add all information in from scratch.
When working on a template, be sure that template is inactive until it is finished.
Otherwise, crew members may attempt to print an unfinished report.
Template Structure Overview
When editing templates, you’ll find that there are several different “layers” of editing for each
template. At each layer, you will have access to different information for editing.
Layout Editor
There are several items that can be set up from the Layout Editor page that will not be
associated with any single template.

New and copied dynamic run form and QA/QI form templates
PDF Layout Editor
There are several items that can be set up from the Layout Editor page that will not be
associated with any single template. Keep in mind that the PDF Layout Editor is
contained within the Layout Editor for forms.

New and copied PDF report and QA/QI PDF report templates
Template
You can edit information for the entire template from the list of templates, by clicking the
Edit icon. The following information can be edited at this level:




Template name
Template status (e.g., active, inactive)
Setting determining whether this is a dynamic run form, QA/QI form, PDF report
or QA/QI PDF report
Setting determining which product (e.g., Service Bridge, Field Bridge) the
template will be used for (applicable for only dynamic run form templates)
Tabs
You can edit the following information after clicking the View Tabs button for a template:




Tab names and order
Tab status (e.g., active, inactive)
Header and footer content (for PDF and QA/QI PDF reports only)
Theme information (e.g., font, color) for the report (for PDF and QA/QI PDF
reports only)
Panels
You can edit the following information after navigating to the panel you want to work with:




7/3/2013
Panel names and order
Panel status (e.g., active or inactive)
Option to hide the panel if no data is entered (for PDF and QA/QI PDF reports
only)
Physical layout of panels (e.g., number of rows or columns)
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE

P a g e | 112
Controls included in a panel
Controls
You can edit the following information when editing a specific control:




Margins, alignment, text and position of labels and text for fields
Position and size of the control
Option to hide the field if no data is entered
Control status (e.g., active, inactive)
3.5 Layout Editor Terms to Know
Understanding the following terms and how they relate to templates will help you to edit and build
templates in the Layout Editor.
EXAMPLE: The following image illustrates several common terms related to the layout of run form
templates.
Active/Inactive
An active item will be displayed and can be used. An inactive item will be hidden and cannot
be used, but can still be referenced by the administrator if necessary.
App Type
The app type is a setting on each template that determines what applications will use this
template and for what. App types include:
 Field Bridge (for ONLY Field Bridge)
 Field Bridge/Service Bridge (For Field Bridge AND Service Bridge/State
Bridge/Rescue Bridge)
 Service Bridge (for ONLY Service Bridge/State Bridge/Rescue Bridge)
 QA/QI Review (for the doing QA/QI review in the QA/QI module)
 PDF Layout (for printable PDF reports from the dynamic run form)
 PDF QA/QI Report (for printable PDF reports from QA/QI forms)
 Field Bridge Xpress (for ONLY the Field Bridge Xpress application)
 TapChart (For the legacy TapChart application)
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 113
Control
A control is a specific field that can be inserted into a template using the Layout Editor.
Controls are also frequently called fields; however, a control can also contain several fields
(for example, the Technician Signature control contains individual fields for the technician to
sign, print his/her name and enter the date).
Default Value
A default value is the data that will be entered in a field automatically when a new run form is
started. (This option is available for dynamic run form templates and QA/QI form templates.)
Field
A field is a space for a piece of information within your template. Fields are also frequently
referred to as controls within the Layout Editor, although a control can contain multiple fields.
Footer
The footer is a section at the very bottom of each page of report templates that can be
configured to display certain information.
Header
The header is a section at the top of the page in report templates that can be configured to
display certain information. For the PDF Layout Editor, the section referred to as the header
will not be the section of the report that displays your service information, logo and name of
the report, but will be a separate section.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 114
Label
The label is the text attached to a specific field or control.
Panel
A panel within a template is a section containing several fields, within a single tab. Panels will
have a header with the name of the panel at the top of the section. For form templates,
panels can generally be expanded or collapsed to show or hide the information included
within that panel.
Tab
A tab is a collection of panels that will be grouped together. For report templates, a page
break will be placed at the beginning of each new tab. For form templates, users will need to
click on the tab to view the information within it.
Theme
A theme is the visual style settings that will be used in report templates, including font, color
and text styles.
Type
Each template is assigned a type of system or service. System templates can only be edited
by system administrators in the Admin section, and service templates can be edited within
the Setup tab for each service by the service administrator.
3.4 Opening the Layout Editor
Depending on your role and the permissions available to you, you can open the Layout Editor from
several different places within the system. Since the dynamic run form can be used for both Service
Bridge and Field Bridge, you will be able to edit run form templates for both applications in the Layout
Editor, no matter where you access it from.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 115
Opening the Layout Editor for a Service
This option will be used by service administrators or when setting up templates for an individual
service.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select EMS Form Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under EMS Form Configuration, select Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor opens.
HINTS:
The Layout Editor requires that you have Silverlight, a free plugin from Microsoft, installed
on your computer.
If you have not used the Layout Editor before or have performed an update, you may
receive a message asking you to increase your cache. It is recommended that you agree
to this, as it will help the Layout Editor load faster.
5. To work with the PDF Layout Editor, from the Template Actions toolbar, click PDF Layout
Editor.
Opening the Layout Editor for the System
This option will be used by system administrators or when setting up templates for the entire
system. Some additional options may be available through this section.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
The Admin section appears.
2. Under Run Forms > Templates & Permissions, click Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: If you do not see the sub-menu under Run Forms or Templates & Permissions,
click the appropriate header to expand the sub-menu.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 116
3. To work with the PDF Layout Editor, from the Template Actions toolbar, click PDF Layout
Editor.
3.5 Updating the Display of the Layout Editor
You can configure several settings in the Layout Editor to change the way it appears while you are
working with templates. These options will not affect the way that users see the template, but can change
what you see while you’re working with templates in the Layout Editor.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
HINTS:
For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page 114.
You can control the display options for run form and PDF report templates separately. If you are
updating the display for run form templates, use the Layout Editor for run forms. If you are
updating the display for PDF reports, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. Click the View Tabs button for a template.
The template details appear.
3. To display grid lines within each panel for the rows and columns, in the toolbar at the top of the
page, select the Show Grid Lines checkbox.
EXAMPLE:
4. To display the boundaries on each control, in the toolbar at the top of the page, select the Show
Control Boundaries checkbox.
HINTS:
This can be useful for identifying parent controls, as you will see the boundary line around the
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 117
group of sub-controls.
If you have grid lines displayed, it may be difficult to see the control boundaries in addition to the
grid lines.
EXAMPLE:
5. If you want to hide panels that were marked as inactive while you work with the template,
deselect the Show Inactive Panels checkbox.
OR
If you want to show panels that were marked as inactive while you work with the template, select
the Show Inactive Panels checkbox.
6. If you want to hide tabs that were marked as inactive while you work with the template, deselect
the Show Inactive Tabs checkbox.
OR
If you want to show tabs that were marked as inactive while you work with the template, select
the Show Inactive Tabs checkbox.
3.6 Creating a Copy of a Template
You can copy a template for testing, to keep a backup copy before editing or to create a new template
similar to an existing one. If you want to create a template, we recommend that you begin by copying an
existing template so that you do not need to start from scratch. If you are working with system templates
in the Admin section, you will have additional options for copying that will not be available when working
with templates for a specific service in the Setup tab.
Note that when you create the template, it will be automatically marked as inactive so that no one
attempts to use it before you are finished working with it. When you are finished, make sure to mark the
template as active.
Creating a Copy for the Current Location
You will have the option to copy a template to the current location in both the Admin and the
Setup section. If you are working within the Admin section, this will create a copy that is a system
template. If you are working in the Setup section, this will create a copy that is a service template
for that service.
Note that when you create the template, it will be automatically marked as inactive so that no one
attempts to print a report based on this template before you are finished working with it. When
you are finished, make sure to mark the template as active.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
NOTE: If you are copying a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. To create a copy of a template to your current location (i.e., to create a service template
for the service you are working with OR to create a system template if you are working at
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 118
the system level), click Copy Template to Here.
The Import/Copy a Template window appears.
3. From the list of available templates, select the template you want to copy.
4. In the Template Name text box, type a unique name for this template.
5. Click Import Selected Template.
A copy of the template is created and the Import/Copy a Template window closes.
Creating a Copy for a Specific Service
Only system administrators working in the Admin section can create a copy of a template and
assign it to a specific service. This option allows you to copy a template from one service to
another.
1. Open the Layout Editor from the Admin section.
NOTE: If you are copying a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor for the
System section on page 115.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 119
2. From the Template Actions section, click Copy Template to Service.
The Copy Template to Service window appears.
3. From the Source drop down menu, select the service that has set up the template you
want to copy.
4. From the Template drop down menu, select the template to be copied.
5. From the Target drop down menu, select the service that the template copy should be
created for.
6. Click Copy.
A copy of the template is created and can now be accessed by the service through the
Layout Editor under their Setup tab.
3.7 Adding a New Template
If necessary, you can add a new template with no content included. From there, you can edit the template
to add tabs, panels and fields.
ImageTrend recommends that you begin by copying an existing template rather than starting from
scratch; this prevents you from needing to add every single tab, panel and field individually. This is
frequently a much more efficient way to create your own template. For more information, please refer to
the Creating a Copy of a Template section on page 117.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
NOTE: If you are adding a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 120
114.
2. From the top of the page, click Add a New Template.
The Add Template dialog box appears.
3. In the Template Text text box, type the name of the new template.
4. To set this template as active and available for use, ensure that the Active Status checkbox is
selected.
OR
To set this template as inactive and not available for current use, deselect the Active Status
checkbox.
HINTS:
When you initially create a new template, we recommend that you mark it as inactive until you are
finished building the template.
You can change the active status of a template at any time from the Edit button.
5. From the App Type drop down menu, select which application should be able to use this
template.
HINT: If you are creating a PDF report template, PDF Layout Editor must be selected.
6. When finished, click OK.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
7. To create the template, click OK.
8. Continue by editing the template to add tabs, panels and fields.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 121
3.8 Changing a Run Form Template to a PDF Template
If needed, you can change a run form template to a PDF report template. This method is not
recommended, as not all fields will display correctly when changed from the interactive run form template
to a static PDF template, but it can be useful if you review the fields included to make sure they display
appropriately.
WARNING: If you do choose to change a run form template to a PDF report template, make sure
you are working with a copy of the run form template. You will not be able to change the template back to
a run form template once you change it.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
NOTE: Do not open the PDF Layout Editor; you will need to work with the run form template.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
2. Locate a copy of the run form template you want to turn into a PDF report template.
WARNING: If you do choose to change a run form template to a PDF report template,
make sure you are working with a copy of the run form template. You will not be able to change
the template back to a run form template once you change it.
3. For the run form copy, click Edit.
The Edit Template window appears.
4. From the App Type drop down menu, select PDF Layout Editor.
5. Click OK.
The Edit Template window closes and the template is removed from the run form Layout Editor
and moved to the PDF Layout Editor.
3.9 Editing the Name of a Template
Using Service Bridge, administrators can change the name of an existing dynamic run form or PDF report
template if necessary.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 122
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the desired template, click Edit.
The Edit Template dialog box appears.
3. In the Template Text text box, type the desired name for the template.
4. Click OK.
The name is changed.
3.10 Changing the Status of a Template
At any point, you can change the status of a specific template to mark it as inactive or active. The status
of a template is what determines whether users can see it in their list of reports to print or run forms to fill
out; active templates will be available to users, and inactive templates will not.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 123
2. For the template you want to update, click Edit.
The Edit Template window appears.
3. To indicate that this report is currently active and available for users, ensure that the Active
Status checkbox is selected.
OR
To indicate that this report is currently inactive and not yet available for users, deselect the Active
Status checkbox.
HINT: We recommend that you do not mark a template as active until you are finished
building it.
4. Click Save.
The changes are saved.
3.11 Adding a Tab
If necessary, you can add a new tab to any run form or PDF report template.
In a PDF report template, a tab will begin a page break. You can set up a new tab wherever you want to
ensure that a page break will be placed within the report.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. Click the Add Tab icon.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 124
The Add Tab window appears.
4. In the Tab Text text box, type the name of the tab.
5. In the Tab Order text box, type a number corresponding to the order that this tab should appear in
the list of tabs (e.g., 1 for first).
6. To set this tab as active and visible, ensure that the Active Status checkbox is selected.
OR
To set this tab is inactive and not visible on this run form, deselect the Active Status checkbox.
HINTS:



Regardless of its status, this tab will not be displayed anywhere if the template is inactive.
However, if you are working with an active template, this setting will keep the tab and any
included panels and fields from being displayed and printed when the report is generated.
Keep in mind that if you are working with an inactive template and you also mark this tab
as inactive, you will need to activate both the template AND the tab when you want to
make the report available to providers.
It can be a good idea to mark a tab as inactive until you are finished with it, if the run form
you are adding it to is currently active and being used. This will allow you to finish
creating and testing the new tab before providers start using it to document.
7. When finished, click OK.
The tab is added with no panels or controls included.
3.12 Updating the Details of a Tab
You can update the name or order of any tab in a template, as well as selecting whether that tab is active
or inactive.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Select the tab you want to update.
The panels for that tab are displayed.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 125
4. Click the Edit option for the tab.
The Edit Tab window appears.
5. In the Tab Text text box, update the name of the tab as needed.
6. To change the order of the tab in relation to other tabs in the template, type a number
corresponding to the desired order (e.g., 1 for first).
7. To indicate that this tab is currently active and should be visible if the report is printed, ensure that
the Active Status checkbox is selected.
OR
To keep this tab hidden if the report is printed, deselect the Active Status checkbox.
HINTS:

Regardless of its status, this tab will not be displayed anywhere if the template is inactive.
However, if you are working with an active template, this setting will keep the tab and any
included panels and fields from being displayed and printed when the report is generated.
 Keep in mind that if you are working with an inactive template and you also mark this tab
as inactive, you will need to activate both the template AND the tab when you want to
make the report available to providers.
 It can be a good idea to mark a tab as inactive until you are finished with it, if the run form
you are adding it to is currently active and being used. This will allow you to finish
creating and testing the new tab before providers start using it to document.
8. Click OK.
The changes to the tab are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 126
3.13 Adding a Panel to a Template
You can add a new panel to any tab in a template. When adding a panel, you may want to have some
idea of how many controls you would like to include so that you can set a number of rows and columns
for the panel.
For reports, a panel will appear as a new section with a header.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. Click the name of the tab to which you want to add a panel.
4. At the bottom of the list of panels, click the Add icon.
The Add Panel window appears.
5. In the Panel Text text box, type the name of the panel.
NOTE: This is the text that will appear in the header for this panel.
6. In the Row Count and Column Count text boxes, type the number or rows and columns wide and
tall this panel should appear.
7. To determine where this panel should appear in relation to the other panels in the tab (e.g., first,
second), in the Panel Order text box, type this panel’s position.
8. To indicate whether this panel should be open or closed by default when the tab is opened, select
(open) or deselect (closed) the Is Expanded checkbox.
NOTE: This option is not available for report templates. All panels will be expanded,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 127
9. To indicate that this panel should currently be available on the run form, select the Active Status
checkbox.
OR
To indicate that this panel should be saved but not visible on the run form, deselect the Active
Status checkbox.
HINTS:
Regardless of its status, this panel will not be displayed anywhere if the template or tab
containing it is inactive. However, if you are working with an active template, this setting will keep
the panel and any included fields from being displayed and printed when the report is generated.
Keep in mind that if you are working with an inactive template and you also mark this panel as
inactive, you will need to activate both the template AND the panel when you want to make the
report available to providers.
10. When finished, click OK.
The panel is added.
HINT: After adding the panel, there will be no content. You will need to add controls to see
form content within the panel.
3.14 Updating Existing Panels
You can edit or move existing panels within your template as needed. This section will explain how to
update the features associated with the panel itself (e.g., name, rows and columns, placement), not how
to work with the controls included in the panel.
Editing Panel Details
When you edit the details of a panel, you can change its name, the number of rows and columns
included in the panel, its order in relation to the other panels in the tab and its status (i.e., active
or inactive).
1. Open the Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the tab containing the panel you want to update.
The tab appears.
4. For the panel you want to update, click the Edit button.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 128
The Edit Panel window appears.
5. To change the header of the panel, in the Panel Text text box, type the appropriate
name.
6. In the Row Count and Column Count text boxes, update the number or rows and
columns that should appear in this panel, as needed.
7. To change the order that this panel should appear in relation to the other panels in the
tab, type a number associating to the desired position (e.g., type 1 if this panel should
appear first).
8. To mark that this panel is active, ensure that the Active Status checkbox is selected.
OR
To keep this panel hidden from users but available for administrative reference, deselect
the Active Status checkbox.
HINTS:
Regardless of its status, this panel will not be displayed anywhere if the template or tab
containing it is inactive. However, if you are working with an active template, this setting
will keep the panel and any included fields from being displayed and printed when the
report is generated.
Keep in mind that if you are working with an inactive template and you also mark this
panel as inactive, you will need to activate both the template AND the panel when you
want to make the report available to providers.
9. To hide this panel if none of the fields have data for the report being printed, select the
Hide Panel On Empty Value checkbox.
NOTE: This option is available only for PDF report templates.
10. To indicate whether this panel should be open or closed by default when the tab is
opened, select (open) or deselect (closed) the Is Expanded checkbox.
NOTE: This option is available only for run form templates.
11. When finished, click OK.
The changes are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 129
Moving a Panel to a Different Tab
You can move an entire panel to a different tab in the report if needed. Please note that after you
move a panel, you may want to check the new tab to make sure the panel appears in the correct
order.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the tab containing the panel you want to update.
The tab appears.
4. For the panel you want to update, click the Edit button.
The Edit Panel window appears.
5. From the Move Panel to Tab drop down menu, select the tab that this panel should be
moved to.
6. Click OK.
The panel is moved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 130
Hiding a Panel with No Data
NOTE: This option is available only for PDF report templates.
You can set panels to be hidden on printed reports if there is no data in any of the fields; for
example, if you have a panel for cardiac arrest data, you could set it to not print any time the call
you are printing a report for has no cardiac arrest data.
1. Open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the tab containing the panel you want to update.
The tab appears.
4. For the panel you want to update, click the Edit button.
The Edit Panel window appears.
5. To hide this panel if none of the fields have data for the report being printed, select the
Hide Panel On Empty Value checkbox.
6. When finished, click OK.
The changes are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 131
3.15 Adding a Control to a Template
You can add a new control to a template as long as there is an empty space in the panel where you want
to add the control. If you want to add a field to a panel with no empty space, you will need to edit the
panel to add additional rows and/or columns to make space for the new field.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on page
114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. Click the name of the tab containing the panel.
4. If necessary, to expand the panel you want to add the field to, click the Expand icon.
The panel opens.
5. Hover your mouse above the empty cell you want to add the control to.
The Add Control option appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 132
6. Click the Add Control button.
The Control Toolbox window appears.
7. In the Search text box, type the name or part of the name of the control you want to add.
OR
To search by additional options,
a. Click the Expand icon for the advanced search options.
Additional search options appear.
b. As needed, type a control ID or select a control type to search for.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 133
8. Click Search.
A list of all fields matching your criteria appears.
9. Select the field you want to add.
10. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the field you selected appears.
11. If this is the correct field, click Add Control.
The field is added to the panel.
OR
If this is the incorrect field,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 134
a. Click Back.
You are returned to the Search page.
b. Repeat steps 7–11 until the desired field is added.
Adding a QA/QI Question
Adding a QA/QI question as a control to a template is very similar to adding any other control,
although you will be able to select which question you want to insert.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the tab containing the panel you want to update.
The tab appears.
4. If necessary, click the Expand icon to expand the panel you want to add the control to.
The panel opens.
5. Hover your mouse above the empty cell you want to add the control to.
The Add Control option appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 135
6. Click the Add Control button.
The Control Toolbox window appears.
7. Search for QA.
8. If you want to enter a system-level QA/QI question, select the System QA/QI Question for
QA/QI Review control.
OR
If you want to enter a service-level QA/QI question, select the Service QA/QI Question for
QA/QI Review control.
NOTE: You will not be able to add service-level QA/QI questions if you are working
with a template in the Admin section.
9. Click View Selected Control.
A list of the QA/QI questions that are set up appears.
10. Select the question you want to insert.
11. Click Add QA/QI Control.
The selected question is added.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 136
3.16 Updating Controls
You can update controls that are already in your template as needed. This section will explain how to
move controls, adjust their size or label and hide them if there is no data for the report.
Working with Parent Controls
Some controls, often called “parent controls,” have several sub-controls included in them. (A
common example might be the Patient Address control, which contains several individual fields
including the Address, City, State and Zip Code fields.) Parent controls are frequently an easy
way to quickly add multiple fields that are almost always grouped together. However, if you need
to edit an individual sub-control within a parent control, you will need to navigate further into the
control than detailed in the following sections. This section provides details on how to navigate to
a specific sub-control in a parent control.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the tab containing the control you want to update.
The tab appears.
4. If necessary, click the Expand icon to expand the panel containing the control.
The panel opens.
5. Hover your mouse above the parent control.
The Edit button appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 137
6. Click the Edit button.
The Edit Control window for the parent control appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 138
7. From the panel on the lower right, click View/Edit Child Controls.
The Edit Child Controls page appears.
8. Hover your mouse above the child control you want to work with.
The Edit button appears.
9. Click the Edit button.
The Edit Control page appears for the selected control.
HINT: As you move forward through child controls, you can jump back to a previous
page using the breadcrumb menu at the top of the window. For example, here you see
the Control 69 link for the Patient Address parent control, the Child Controls link for the
page where you viewed all the child controls, and now the Control 73 link for the subcontrol displayed here. If you navigate this way, any changes you made to the current
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 139
page will not be saved.
10. Make any needed changes to this child control.
11. When finished, click Save & Back.
You are returned to the previous page.
Editing the Details of a Control
When editing a field, you can make changes to a variety of options including the label, size or
margins of the control. Additional options are available that are specific to either run form
templates or PDF report templates.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. Click the name of the tab containing the control you want to edit.
4. If necessary, to expand the panel containing the field you want to edit, click the Expand
icon.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 140
5. Place your mouse above the field you want to edit.
The Edit button appears in the upper right corner of the field.
6. Click the Edit button for the field.
The Edit Control dialog box appears.
7. To change the field’s positioning, in the Grid Row and Grid Column, select the desired
column and row number.
8. To change the number of columns or rows tall or wide a field covers, in the Row Span
and Column Span sections, select the desired number of columns wide or tall the field
should be.
9. To set a margin around the field, in the Margin text box, type the number of pixels that
should surround the field on each side.
HINT: If you enter one number, that number of pixels will be applied on all sides of the
field. If you enter two numbers, the first number will be applied to the left and right of the
label and the second number will be applied to the top and bottom of the label. If you
enter four numbers, the numbers will be applied in order as top, right, bottom, left.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 141
10. To set a height for the field (in pixels), in the Control Height text box, type the desired
number of pixels tall the field should be.
11. To set a maximum number of pixels wide that a field can be, in the Control Max Width
text box, type the maximum number of pixels wide the field can be.
NOTE: If the field is not this wide, it will take up as much space as it needs, and will
not stretch to fit this number.
12. To change the text labeling the field, in the Label Properties section, in the Label text box,
type the new desired text.
13. To change the amount of space that should be allowed for the label, in the Label Width
text box, type the number of pixels wide the label should appear to be.
14. To change the amount of space surrounding the label, in the Label Margin text box, type
the number of pixels that should be used as a margin.
HINT: If you enter one number, that number of pixels will be applied on all sides of the
field. If you enter two numbers, the first number will be applied to the left and right of the
label and the second number will be applied to the top and bottom of the label. If you
enter four numbers, the numbers will be applied in order as top, right, bottom, left.
15. To change the alignment of the label’s text within the space for the label, from the Label
Text Alignment drop down menu, select the desired alignment.
16. To change the alignment of the space allowed for the label within the space for the field,
from the Label Vertical Alignment and the Label Horizontal Alignment drop down menus,
select the alignment of the label within the grid.
17. To select whether the label should be positioned to the left of the field or on top of the
field, from the Label Position drop down menu, select the desired position.
18. To set this field as active and currently available in the run form, in the Other Properties
section, select the Active Status checkbox.
OR
To set this field as inactive and not visible to users, in the Other Properties section,
deselect the Active Status checkbox.
19. To hide this control if there is no content for it when the report is printed, select the Hide
Control on Empty Value checkbox.
NOTE: This option is available only for PDF report templates.
20. To add content to a field with non-editable content (e.g., the text on a button or a single
checkbox), in the Content text box, type the content.
NOTE: This option is not available in all fields and is most often available for run form
templates.
HINT: Be careful about which field you add content to, as you may accidently add text
over a field and prevent the user from seeing the area in which they should respond.
21. To add a value that should be selected by default,
a. Click Add Default Value.
The Edit Control dialog box appears.
NOTES:
This option is only available for run form templates.
Not all fields will allow you to select a default value. If you do not see the Add
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 142
Default Value button, this option is not available.
b. Select the desired default value.
NOTE: Depending on the type of field you are setting a default value for, you
may see a different page than the one pictured above.
c. Click Back.
22. To enable a spell check feature for this field, in the Other Properties section, select Spell
Check On.
NOTES:
This option is available only for run form templates.
Not all fields will allow you to enable spell check. If you do not see the Spell Check On
checkbox, this option is not available.
23. To change the number of rows or columns within this field, in the Other Properties
section, use the Row Count and Column Count fields to select the desired number of
rows or columns in the field.
NOTE: Not all fields contain multiple columns; this is commonly associated with
parent controls. If you do not see the Row Count and Column Count text boxes within the
Other Properties section, this option is not available.
24. If this field contains another control that you would like to work with,
a. Click View/Edit Child Controls.
The panel is previewed in the Edit Control dialog box.
NOTE: Not all fields have additional fields within them. If you do not see the
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 143
View/Edit Child Controls button, this option is not available.
b. Hover your mouse over the control you want to edit until the Edit button appears.
c. Click the Edit button for that field.
Information for the selected field appears.
d. Repeat steps 7–23 until this field is configured as desired.
e. When finished, click Save & Back.
OR
To move back to the previous pages without saving, click the appropriate page
from the top of the dialog box.
HINT: As you continue to click through the fields without going back, the
pages and controls you see will be displayed in order in a “breadcrumb trail” at
the top of the dialog box. You can click a link here to jump back to a previous
page at any time. When you do this, all links listed after the one you click will be
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 144
cleared.
25. When finished with all editing, click Save & Close.
Moving a Control
There are several ways you can move a control within a panel. When you want to move a control,
there must always be a blank space to move the control to. If there is not a blank space, you will
need to remove an existing control or add row and/or columns to the panel to make room.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. Click the name of the tab containing the panel.
4. If necessary, to expand the panel containing the field you want to move, click the Expand
icon.
5. To move the field by dragging it to the new location,
a. Click and hold the field to move.
b. Drag your mouse over the empty space for the field and release the mouse.
HINT: Fields must be moved to empty spaces. To switch the position of two
fields, you will need to create a new space for the first field to go while moving
the second field, and remove the extra space after the fields are in place.
OR
To move the field by entering the desired position on the grid,
a. Hover your mouse above the desired field.
An Edit button appears at the right of the field.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 145
The Edit Control dialog box appears.
b. To change the field’s positioning, in the Grid Row and Grid Column, select the
rd
desired column and row number for where this field should appear (e.g., 3 row
in the second column).
c. Click Save & Close.
The field is moved
Setting Default Values for a Run Form Template
NOTE: This option is available only for controls on run form templates.
Default values will be automatically selected on run forms using the template that the value was
set up in. You can assign default values individually by editing specific fields, or you can set
defaults from a list of all fields that can contain default values. This section will examine how to
set default values from a list of fields.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 146
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Template Default Values.
The Template Defaults page appears.
4. For the field you want to change default values for, click Edit.
The Default Value dialog box appears.
5. Select the desired default value.
OR
To remove a default value that is currently assigned, click Clear Default Value.
6. When finished, click Save & Back.
The changes are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 147
Hiding a Control with No Data
NOTE: This option is available only for controls on PDF report templates.
You can set controls to be hidden on printed reports if there is no data for them; for example, if
you have a the Cardiac Arrest Time control in your report, you could set it to not print any time the
call you are printing a report for has does not have a cardiac arrest time recorded.
1. Open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. For the template you want to add a tab to, click the View Tabs button.
A list of existing tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the tab containing the control you want to update.
The tab appears.
4. If necessary, click the Expand icon to expand the panel containing the control.
The panel opens.
5. Hover your mouse above the control you want to edit.
The Edit option appears.
6. Click the Edit button for the control.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 148
The Edit Control window appears.
7. To hide this control if there is no appropriate data for the report being printed, select the
Hide Control On Empty Value checkbox.
8. When finished, click Save & Back.
The changes are saved.
Deleting a Control
At times, you may need to delete a control in order to replace it with a different one. Be sure to
pay attention to validation rules related to any fields you delete, as providers will not be able to
complete a run form to 100% if you delete a required field.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
NOTE: If you are updating a PDF report template, open the PDF Layout Editor.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the template appears.
3. Click the name of the tab containing the panel.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 149
4. If necessary, to expand the panel containing the field you want to remove, click the
Expand icon.
5. Place your mouse above the control you want to remove.
The Edit button appears in the upper right corner of the field.
6. Click the Edit button for the control.
The Edit Control dialog box appears.
7. From the lower left, click Delete.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click OK.
The control is removed.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 150
3.17 Additional Run Form Template Setup Options
If you are working with the Layout Editor for run forms, you will have additional options for customizing
your dynamic run forms. These options are not available when you are working with PDF report
templates.
Adding an Event Visibility Rule for a Template
Event visibility rules allow you to show or hide specific parts of the run form template based on
data entered into a run form. This reduces the number of unnecessary fields; for example, you
could set a visibility event up to hide the Pregnancy field if the patient is male. Event visibility
rules can be set up differently for each run form.
When setting up event visibility rules, you’ll want to be aware of any validity rules based around
fields that are being hidden. If you hide a required field, providers will not be able to finish a run
form to 100% completion.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. For the template you want to edit, click the View Tabs button.
A list of tabs for the run form appears.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Edit Visibility Events.
The Event Visibility page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 151
4. Click Add Hide Event.
The fields appear at the bottom of the page.
5. In the Description text box, type a descriptive name for this event.
HINT: Providers will never see this name, but it can be a very helpful way to keep
track of which visibility event is which in case you need to make changes later. Since the
criteria set up with visibility events can become quite complex, it is easiest to create a
descriptive name to help you organize your visibility events.
6. To select whether you are going to show fields when specific criteria are met, or hide
them, click the Show/Hide icon.
HINT: If the Hide option is highlighted, you will be selecting items to hide when criteria
are met. If the Show option is highlighted, you will be selecting items that will only be
displayed if the criteria are met. The text in the rest of the panel will not change based on
whether you have selected to show or hide fields.
7. In the Affected UI section, click the appropriate button for the item you want to show or
hide (e.g., a specific control, options available from a control or an entire panel).
8. For items in a control,
a. From the Find Control for Event dialog box, search for the control containing the
items you want to show or hide.
b. Select the desired control.
c. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the control appears.
d. Click Add Control.
The control appears in the Affected UI section with a list of options.
e. Select all options to show or hide according to this visibility event.
HINT: To select an item, click it once. To deselect the item, click it again.
9. For controls,
a. From the Find Control for Event dialog box, search for the control to show or
hide.
b. Select the desired control.
c. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the field appears.
d. Click Add Control.
The field is added to the Affected UI section.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 152
10. For panels,
a. From the Select a Panel dialog box, select the panel to be hidden or displayed.
b. Click OK.
The panel is added to the Affected UI section.
11. To add the criteria which will determine whether the items are displayed or hidden,
a. In the Event Comparisons section, click Add Cause Comparison.
b. In the Select a control as a cause to the event section, click Select Control.
The Find Control for Event section appears.
c. Use the search criteria to locate the field that will contain the values determining
whether items are displayed or hidden.
EXAMPLE: If you are creating a rule to hide the Pregnancy field when the patient
is male, you will search for the Gender field in this step.
d. Select the desired field.
e. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the field appears.
f. Click Add Control.
Additional fields appear in the Event Comparisons section.
g. From the first drop down menu after the control name, select the desired
operator (e.g., equals)
h. If necessary, to make the criteria negative (e.g., if the sections should be hidden
only if a specific value is NOT selected), in the Modifiers section, click Negate.
i. From the second drop down menu, select the desired value that should trigger
the visibility event to hide or display the selected items.
j. To add additional criteria, repeat steps a–i.
k. OPTIONAL: To relate this criterion to a previous criterion, from the first drop
down menu, select whether both criteria must be met (And) or only one of them
(Or).
NOTE: If both And and Or are used within one set of criteria, you will need to
use the parentheses from the Modifiers section to group criteria together.
l. When finished, click Save Event.
The visibility event is saved.
Setting Up Provider Actions
Provider actions allow you to group together procedure and vitals fields to quickly document
important information for a specific action. You can create multiple provider actions, each of
which will apply to all templates that collect provider actions. If your agency uses Field Bridge
Xpress, keep in mind that all provider actions will be available for the dynamic run form, Field
Bridge and Field Bridge Xpress.
NOTE: In order to use provider actions, you will need to replace the Activities grid on your run
forms with the Provider Actions grid (control ID 1242).
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 153
2. From the Template Actions toolbar at the top of the page, click Manage Provider Actions.
The Manage Provider Actions page appears.
3. Click Add New.
The Add Provider Action dialog box appears.
4. In the Description text box, type a name for this provider action.
HINT: This will be the name that providers see when filling out a run form, so make
sure that it is a descriptive name that will help them know when to document using this
provider action.
5. To mark this provider action as available for use on run forms, select the Active Status
checkbox.
OR
To mark this provider action as not available for use on run forms but available for
reference by administrators, deselect the Active Status checkbox.
6. In the Row Count and Column Count text boxes, type the number of rows and columns
that should be available to place fields in.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 154
7. Click OK.
The grid is generated for the provider action.
8. Add and remove fields to the provider action in the same way that you would add them to
any panel in the dynamic run form.
As you add and change the provider action it is automatically saved.
HINTS:
For more information about adding fields, please refer to the Adding a Field section.
For information about removing any of the fields that are currently in the provider action,
please refer to the Deleting a Field section.
Setting a Default Template for the Field Bridge
If your agency uses the Field Bridge, you can select a dynamic run form to be used as the default
for the Field Bridge. The default template will automatically be used when any user clicks the
Create New Incident button on the Field Bridge and does not select a template from the list.
1. Open the Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. From the Template Actions toolbar at the top of the page, click Set Default Template for
Field Bridge.
The Default Template for Field Bridge dialog box appears.
3. From the Default Template drop down menu, select the desired template.
4. Click OK.
The changes are saved and will be applied when Field Bridge systems are next synced.
3.18 Additional Report Template Setup Options
If you are working with the PDF Layout Editor, you will have additional options for customizing your PDF
reports and QA/QI report templates.
Editing the Header and Footer for your Reports
You can customize the information included in your header and footer for each template through
the PDF Layout Editor.
The header is a section at the top of the page that can be configured to display certain
information. For the PDF Layout Editor, the section referred to as the header will not be the
section of the report that displays your service information, logo and name of the report, but will
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 155
be a separate section.
The footer is a section at the very bottom of each page of the report that can be configured to
display certain information.
When you begin editing the header and footer, you will see all the same options that you would
when editing any control on the run form. Many of these options will not generally be used,
although they could be useful for specific situations. Most of the time when editing the header or
footer, you will need to set up the grid for the data to be displayed and select the controls the be
displayed.
The images in this section will show you the process of editing the header for your PDF template.
You will use the same steps to edit the footer, but if you are editing the footer you may see
different titles (referring to the footer rather than the header) on the windows that appear.
1. Open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. For the report you want to edit the header for, click the View Tabs button.
The Edit (Report Name) page appears.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, to edit the header, click Edit PDF Header.
OR
To edit the footer, click Edit PDF Footer.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 156
4. The Edit PDF (Header/Footer) Control window appears.
5. To change the number of rows or columns in the header or footer, in the Row Count and
Column Count text boxes at the lower left, enter the desired number of rows and
columns.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 157
6. To update the controls contained in the header or footer, click View/Edit Child Controls.
The Edit Child Controls page appears.
7. To edit an existing control in the header or footer,
a. Hover your mouse above the control.
The Edit option appears.
b. Click the Edit button.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 158
The Edit PDF Header Control page appears.
c.
Update the control as needed.
HINT: You can update this control as you would any other control in the
template. For more information, please refer to the Updating Controls section.
d. When finished with the control, click Save & Back.
You are returned to the list of child controls.
8. To add a new control to the header or footer,
a. Hover your mouse above an empty space in the grid.
The Add Control option appears.
b. Click the Add Control button.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 159
The Add Control page appears.
c.
In the Search text box, type the name or part of the name of the control you want
to add.
OR
To search by additional options,
i. Click the Expand icon for the advanced search options.
Additional search options appear.
ii. As needed, type a control ID or select a control type to search for.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 160
d. Click Search.
A list of controls matching your search terms appears.
e. Select the control you want to add.
f. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the control you selected appears.
g. To return to your search results, click Back.
OR
If this is the correct control, to add it to the selected space on the template, click
Add Control.
The control is added.
Updating the Display Options for the Template
You can update specific display options for any PDF report template or QA/QI report template,
including the font size, background color for panels and text style for the labels on controls.
1. Open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. For the report you want to update, click the View Tabs button.
The Edit (Report Name) page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 161
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Edit Theme.
The Edit Template Theme window appears.
4. From the Font Size drop down menu, select the size that you want the text to appear on
the report.
5. From the Panel Background Color drop down menu, select the color that you want to
appear as the background color for each panel header on the report.
EXAMPLE: For this report, the background color was set to red.
6. From the Label Style section, select whether you want the labels for each field to appear
as bold or italics.
7. When finished, click Save & Back.
The changes are applied.
Previewing an Example Report
When you are working with your report template, you can preview the report to see what it will
look like. When previewing a report, sample data will be filled in automatically. This allows you to
view most aspects of the report, but will not allow you to see what the report will look like when
there is no data for a panel or field that is set to be hidden; previewing the report will always enter
data for all fields in the template.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 162
1. Open the PDF Layout Editor.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Opening the Layout Editor section on
page 114.
2. For the report you want to preview, click the View Tabs button.
The Edit (Report Name) page appears.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Preview Layout.
A preview of the report in PDF format appears in a new tab or window in your browser.
NOTE: This may take a few seconds as demonstration data is entered into the report.
Please be patient.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 163
CHAPTER 4
WORKING WITH TRAINING INFORMATION FOR SERVICES
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 164
4.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the options available to service administrators for training, including
information about setting up categories, templates, topics, time calculation options and individual training
records.
Options for setting up categories, templates and topics may not always be available to you at the service
level, depending on the permissions settings for your system. If these options are available, you may see
some options that are already set up at the system level. You will not be able to edit system level items,
but you can add your own items for your service.
4.2 Working with Training Categories
Categories allow administrators to sort templates based on the type of training for better organization.
Administrators can create several levels of categories (e.g., a category for field work courses could be
created under a main category of fire inspector coursework).
System administrators will always be able to work with training categories, and service administrators
may or may not be able to work with them depending on permissions. Once you have navigated to the
appropriate page in the appropriate section, you will add and update training categories in the same way
regardless of whether you are working at a system or a service level.
Accessing Training Categories: for Service Administrators
Options for setting up categories may not be available to you at the service level, depending on
the permissions settings for your system. If these options are available, you may see some
categories that are already set up at the system level. You will not be able to edit system level
items, but you can add your own categories for your service and you can mark system categories
that your service does not use as inactive.
1. From the upper right, click My Service.
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 165
3. Under Activities and Training, click Categories.
The Categories page appears.
Accessing Training Categories: for System Administrators
Categories that are set up at the system level will be available for all services in your system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Activities and Training, click Categories.
The Manage Categories page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 166
Viewing and Editing Categories
When editing a category that has subcategories, the sub-categories must be removed before
editing is possible. Subcategories will appear below and slightly indented from their parent
category. The Manage Categories page will display a list of categories and sub-categories,
information about whether the category is active in the system or not.
Keep in mind that for service administrators working with system categories, you will only be able
to change their status between being active or inactive.
1. Open the Categories page for your service or the system.
The Categories page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Accessing Training Categories: For
Service Administrators section on page 164 or the Accessing Training Categories: For
System Administrators section on page 165.
2. To edit a sub-category,
a. Click the corresponding Edit link.
b. Using the provided fields, make the desired changes.
NOTE:
Changing the parent category will move this sub-category to another main
category.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 167
Changing the text in the Category field will change the name of the category.
Changing the Active status will change whether the category can be used in the
system or not.
c. When finished, to keep the changes, click Update.
To return to the list of categories without editing, click Back.
3. To edit a parent category,
a. Edit all sub-categories and move them to another parent category.
b. For the category, click Edit.
The category details appear.
c.
If this category will remain a parent category, from the Parent Category drop
down menu, select NONE.
If this category will become a sub-category, from the Parent Category drop down
menu, select the desired parent category.
d. In the Category text field, make any changes to the category name.
e. From the Type drop down menu, select whether this category should apply to
activities or training records.
f. In the Active section, select whether this category should be available for use in
the system or unavailable but stored if necessary.
g. When finished, to keep the changes, click Update.
To return to the list of categories without editing, click Back.
Adding Categories
Administrators can create new parent categories and sub-categories.
1. Open the Training Categories page.
The Categories page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Accessing Training Categories: For
Service Administrators section on page 164 or the Accessing Training Categories: For
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 168
System Administrators section on page 165.
2. Click Add Training Category or Add Activities Category, as appropriate.
The Add Category page appears.
3. From the Parent Category drop down menu, select the desired option.
HINT: If the new category will be a parent category, select NONE.
If the new category will be a sub-category, select the category under which it should
stored.
4. In the Category text box, type the name of the category.
5. From the Type drop down menu, select whether the category should be used for
activities or training.
6. In the Active section, select whether this category should be available for use (Yes)or
stored for future use or reference (No).
7. When finished, to save the category, click Add.
To return to the list of categories without saving, click Back.
Setting Access to Categories
You will be able to control which permission groups will have access to categories and to
templates within this category.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 169
1. Open the Training Categories page.
The Categories page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Accessing Training Categories: For
Service Administrators section on page 164 or the Accessing Training Categories: For
System Administrators section on page 165.
2. Click the Permissions icon
for the desired category.
The Permissions page appears.
NOTE: If you are working at a service level, you will only have the ability to update
permissions for service-level categories.
3. To change a specific permission group’s access to this category,
a. Select the checkbox for the desired category.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 170
b. Select the desired level of access.
c. Click OK.
4.3 Working with Templates
Each training record that is added to the system must be based off a template, which will contain most of
the information for that record. This information will be copied to the individual record, although based on
the permissions the administrator sets some information may be editable in each record created from the
template. Administrators can edit existing templates or create new ones.
System administrators will always be able to work with training categories, and service administrators
may or may not be able to work with them depending on permissions. Once you have navigated to the
appropriate page in the appropriate section, you will add and update training categories in the same way
regardless of whether you are working at a system or a service level.
Accessing Training Templates: for Service Administrators
Options for setting up templates may not be available to you at the service level, depending on
the permissions settings for your system. If these options are available, you may see some
templates that are already set up at the system level. You will not be able to edit system level
items, but you can add your own templates for your service and you can mark system templates
that your service does not use as inactive.
1. From the upper right, click My Service.
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Activities and Training, click Templates.
The Templates page appears.
Accessing Training Categories: for System Administrators
Categories that are set up at the system level will be available for all services in your system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 171
3. Under Activities and Training, click Categories.
The Manage Categories page appears.
Adding New Templates
Administrators can set up new templates for training records for your service or (for system
administrators) for all services in your system.
When you create a new training template, you can assign permissions to each section of that
template. If you choose to hide a section, that information will not be displayed for any trainings
created from the template. If you choose View permissions for a section, that section will be readonly and so will be the same for all trainings created from this template. If you choose Add/Edit
permissions for a section, that information can be added or changed for each individual training
created from the template.
1. Open the Training Templates page.
The Templates page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Accessing Training Templates: For
Service Administrators section on page 170 or the Accessing Training Templates: For
System Administrators section on page 165.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 172
2. Click Add Template.
The Add Template page appears.
3. To designate access to each aspect of the template when records are created from it,
select the correct level of permission for each aspect.
NOTE: This will select whether this information will be available to view or edit when
individual records are created.
4. To select which user groups will be able to make changes to the template or records
created from the template, in the Group Permissions section, select the desired
permissions for each group.
NOTE: When permissions differ between group permissions and permissions for
individual elements of the template, the lower level of permission will be applied.
5. From the Category and Sub-Category drop down menus, select the category and subcategory trainings/activities created from this template should be assigned to.
6. In the Name text box, type a name for trainings/activities created from this template.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional details about the trainings/activities.
8. In the Start Date and End Date text boxes, type the dates that trainings/activities created
from this template should start and end.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 173
OR
To select the date(s) from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired
date.
HINT: For most templates, these fields are left blank and the permissions are set to
Add/Edit so that the correct dates can be filled in for each individual training or activity
record.
9. In the Start Time and End Time text boxes, type the times that trainings/activities created
from this template should start and end.
HINT: For most templates, these fields are left blank and the permissions are set to
Add/Edit so that the correct dates can be filled in for each individual training or activity
record.
10. In the Date of Renewal text box, type the date that trainings or activities based on this
template will need to be renewed.
OR
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
To select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired
date.
HINT: For most templates, this field is left blank and the permissions are set to
Add/Edit so that the correct date can be filled in for each individual training or activity
record.
In the Certification Requirements section, select the checkbox(es) for any certifications
that trainings or activities created from this template will meet.
In the Hours Required text box, type the number of hours trainings or activities created
from this template will be held for.
If the number of hours entered as required is the maximum number of hours allowed,
select the Maximum accepted hours checkbox.
In the Code text box, type the code to be associated with any training or activity created
from this template.
In the Trainer text box, type the name of the trainer who will be in charge of trainings or
activities created from this template.
In the Station, Call Sign, Vehicle, ApparatusID and Shift text boxes, type the appropriate
information to be associated with trainings or activities created from this template.
OR
To look the information up from the options that are set up for your service, click the Look
up icon
and select the appropriate option.
17. In the Total Attendees text box, type the number of attendees to be associated with any
training or activity created from this template.
18. In the Attendance Mandatory section, select whether attendance for trainings and
activities created from this template will be mandatory.
19. In the Location text box, type the location that should be assigned to any trainings or
activities created from this template.
20. To add training certifications that trainings or activities created from this template will
count towards,
a. In the Training Certifications section, from the Available scroll list, select the
desired certification(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key
while clicking each desired option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
21. To add training topics that trainings or activities created from this template will address,
a. In the Training Topics section, from the Available scroll list, select the desired
topic(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key
while clicking each desired option.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 174
b. Click the Add icon
.
22. In the ID to Display section, select whether you want the payroll ID or the personnel ID for
attendees of trainings or activities created from this template to be displayed.
23. In the Active section, select whether you want this template to be active and available for
creating individual records from, or inactive and saved for reference only.
24. To set default values that will be applied to attendees who are assigned to trainings or
activities created from this template,
HINT: You may not use all these options, depending on what information your service
tracks for attendees of training and activities and how much of this information you want
to set up manually for each training/activity or even each attendee.
a. In the Approval Status section, select whether attendees should be automatically
marked as approved or pending.
b. In the Hours/Days value, type the maximum number of hours or days that is
allowable for attendees.
c. In the Hours Attended text box, type the number of hours that should be
assigned by default.
d. In the Score text box, type any score that should be assigned by default.
e. In the Time Attended section, select the beginning and ending time that should
be assigned to attendees by default.
f. In the Paid section, select whether attendees of trainings and activities created
from this template should be paid by default.
g. If you chose for attendees to be paid, from the Pay Rate drop down menu, select
the pay rate for attendees.
h. In the Pass/Fail section, select whether attendees should be marked as passing
or failing by default for trainings or activities created from this template.
i. To set positions for this training,
i. In the Positions section, from the Available scroll list, select the desired
position(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the
Ctrl key while clicking each desired option.
ii. Click the Add icon
.
25. To set the level of access that each permission group will have to individual templates
and activities created from this record, for each group, select the appropriate level of
permissions.
Owner
Groups with this permission level will have full control over training and
activity records created from this template.
NOTE: In order for someone to edit attendee records and mark them as
approved or pending, they must have Owner level rights to the template.
Add/Edit
Groups with this permission level will be able to add new trainings or
activities based on this template and will be able to edit those records, but
will not be able to approve or edit attendee records.
View
Groups with this permission level will be able to view training and activity
records created from this template but will not be able to change or add
them.
Hide
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 175
This permission level will hide any training and activity records created from
this template.
26. When finished, to keep the template, click OK.
To return to the list of templates without saving, click Back.
Viewing and Editing Templates
Administrators can view detailed information about a template and make any changes. Changes
can be made to information about the template itself (e.g., the name and category, time and date
or certifications fulfilled) and the permissions access to the template (i.e., what information can be
changed when creating an individual record from the template and who can edit the template).
1. Open the Training Templates page.
The Templates page appears.
HINT: For more information, please refer to the Accessing Training Templates: For
Service Administrators section on page 170 or the Accessing Training Templates: For
System Administrators section on page 165.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 176
2. For the desired template, click Edit (Type) Template.
3. To designate access to each aspect of the template when records are created from it,
select the correct level of permission for each aspect.
NOTE: This will select whether this information will be available to view or edit when
individual records are created.
4. To change information within the template, use the provided fields to make any changes.
5. To select which user groups will be able to make changes to the template or records
created from the template, in the Group Permissions section, select the desired
permissions for each group.
NOTE: When permissions differ between group permissions and permissions for
individual elements of the template, the lower level of permission will be applied.
6. When finished, to keep the changes, click OK.
To return to the list of templates, click Back.
4.4 Setting Up Training Topics
You can create a collection of topics that can be covered during your trainings. Each template and event
can then be associated with the topics covered. Training topics can only be set up at the service level.
Creating a New Topic
You can create a new topic to be available for trainings and activities at any time.
1. From the upper right, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 177
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Activities and Training, click Topics.
The Topics page appears.
4. Click Add Topic.
The Add Topic page appears.
5. In the Topic Name text box, type the name of the topic.
6. To mark this topic as active and available to be used on templates and training/activity
records, select the Active checkbox.
OR
To mark this topic as inactive and available only for reference, deselect the Active
checkbox.
7. Click OK.
The new topic is added.
Editing a Training/Activity Topic
You can make updates to an existing topic that is used for classifying trainings and activities if
needed.
1. From the upper right, click My Service.
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Activities and Training, click Topics.
The Topics page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 178
4. For the topic you want to update, from the Actions column, click Edit.
The topic information appears.
5. In the Topic Name text box, make any desired changes to the name of the topic.
6. To mark this topic as active and available to be used on templates and training/activity
records, select the Active checkbox.
OR
To mark this topic as inactive and available only for reference, deselect the Active
checkbox.
7. Click OK.
The topic is updated.
4.5 Setting Training and Activity Time Calculations
A service administrator can control whether the system provides credits for the exact amount of time
assigned to a training or activity or rounds to the nearest tenth (e.g., with rounding, a 1 hour and 15
minute class will be rounded to 1.3 hours while with exact time, the same class will be recorded as 1.25
hours).
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Activities and Training section, select Time Calculation.
The Training/Activities Time Calculation Setup page appears.
5. To round training and activity hours to the nearest hour, select Round.
OR
To track the exact minutes and hours, select Actual Time.
6. Click OK.
The settings are applied.
4.6 Working with Certification Requirements for the System
If staff members are required to complete a certain number of hours of training in order to maintain a
particular certification, administrators can store that information in the system so that training hours saved
in their profiles apply towards those certifications. System administrators can set the number of hours
required and the number of months for which the certification will be valid.
These settings are applied system-wide and cannot be customized for individual services.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 179
3. Under Activities and Training, click Requirements.
The Manage Requirements page appears.
4. To view or edit the requirements for a certification type, click the desired certification level.
The Requirements page appears.
5. In the Required (hours) text box, type the number of training hours that is required for this
certification.
6. In the Duration (months) text box, type the number of months for which this certification will be
valid after all training hours are completed.
7. When finished, to save the changed, click Update.
To return to the list of certification levels without saving, click Back.
4.7 Setting Up Training Certifications for the System
When trainings are set up, they can be marked as counting towards specific training certifications as well
as the general certification level requirements that are set up under the Requirements section. As a
system administrator, you can create a list of training certifications that trainings can be marked as
applicable to.
These settings are applied system-wide and cannot be customized for individual services.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears underneath Activities and Training.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 180
3. Under Activities and Training, click Training Certifications.
The Training Certifications page appears.
4. Click Add Certification.
The Edit Certification page appears.
5. In the Certification Name text box, type the name of the certification.
6. In the Active section, to indicate that this certification is currently active and can be recorded for
trainings and training templates, select the checkbox.
OR
To mark this certification as inactive and available only for reference in this section, deselect the
Active checkbox.
7. When finished, click Save.
The training certification is added.
4.8 Setting Up Positions
When you set up individual activity records or activity templates, you will be able to assign positions to
attendees under the Attendees tab. As a system administrator, you can set up a list of the positions that
will be available to assign to attendees for activities.
These settings are applied system-wide and cannot be customized for individual services.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears underneath Activities and Training.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 181
3. Under Activities and Training, click Positions.
The Positions page appears.
4. Click Add Position.
The Add Position modal window appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the name of the position.
6. In the Description text box, type any other details you want to save about this position.
7. In the Active section, to indicate that this position is currently active and can be used, select Yes.
OR
To mark this position as inactive and available only for reference in this section, select No.
8. Click Save.
The position is saved and the Add Position modal window closes.
4.9 Working with Training Records
Administrators can view records of training events that are stored in the system, or may create or edit
records. These records can contain information about the course itself, including the information covered,
times and location of the training and certifications towards which it counts, information about attendees
and documents that may be relevant to the course. Training records are based on templates, which
contain information that can be copied into each course record.
Training records are created, saved and accessed within the service that they were created in.
Viewing and Editing Training Records
Administrators can view a list of training records currently in the system or can edit the
information. When editing a training record, administrators can also add information about the
attendees and the information about the course added to their record, or can add documents
related to the course.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Training.
A list of training records appears.
HINT: To see more records, from the Scheduled Date drop down menu, select Show
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 182
all.
3. From the list, click the name of the desired course.
Information about the course appears.
4. To change any information about the course, from the Training Information tab, use the
provided fields to make the desired changes and click OK.
NOTE: The information available to edit will depend on the setup of the template off of
which this record was created.
5. To add an association for this course,
a. Click View/Add Associations.
The Associations window appears.
b. Using the provided fields, enter search terms to locate the desired record.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 183
c.
Click Find.
A list of courses meeting the criteria appears.
d. Select the checkbox(e)s for the course(s) to associate.
e. Click Add Associations.
The association is added.
6. To work with information about attendees, select the Attendees tab.
7. To edit information about the attendees, use the provided fields for each attendee to
make changes and click OK.
NOTE: The information available to edit will depend on the setup of the template off of
which this record was created.
HINT: To set information that will be the same for all attendees, type the information
in the Default Values row. This information will be copied to all attendees unless
individual changes are made.
8. To work with documents that may be attached to the record, select the Documents tab.
9. To add a new document,
a. Click Add New Document.
b. In the Title text box, type a name for the document.
c. In the Description text box, type additional information about the document.
d. Click Browse…
e. Navigate to and select the document to be attached to the record.
f. Click Open.
g. Click Submit.
The document is attached to the record.
10. To edit the name or description of an existing document,
a. Click the corresponding Edit icon
.
b. In the Title text box, make any changes to the document’s name.
c. In the Description text box, make any changes to the additional information about
the document.
d. When finished, click Submit.
11. To return to the list of training records, select the Training Home tab.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 184
Adding Training Records
Administrators can create new training records based on the templates available in the system.
Based on the setup of the template, these records can be configured to apply to the specific
course or training event.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Training.
A list of training records appears.
3. Click Add Training.
A list of training templates from which records can be created appears.
4. For the template from which the record should be created, click Add Training Record.
The Add Record page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 185
5. Using the provided fields, add or change any information to complete the record.
NOTE: The fields available for editing will differ based on the setup of the template on
which this record is based.
6. When finished, click OK.
Additional tabs appear to complete more information about the course.
7. To add an association for this course,
a. Click View/Add Associations.
The Associations window appears.
b. Using the provided fields, enter search terms to locate the desired record.
c. Click Find.
A list of courses meeting the criteria appears.
d. Select the checkbox(e)s for the course(s) to associate.
e. Click Add Associations.
The association is added.
8. To add information about attendees,
a. Select the Attendees tab.
b. From the Attendees drop down menus, select the names of the staff members
who will be attending the course.
NOTE: Users can also type a personnel ID into the Personnel ID fields to
select the correct staff members.
c. OPTIONAL: To enter information that will be the same for all attendees, enter
information into the fields in the Default Values row.
This information will be copied into the fields for all attendees but can be
changed for specific attendees if necessary.
d. To change information for specific attendees, enter the correct information in the
corresponding fields.
e. To add a new attendee, click Add Attendee and enter information into the
resulting new row.
f. When finished, click OK.
9. To attach documents to the record,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 186
a. Select the Documents tab.
a. Click Add New Document.
The Document Upload page appears.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
7/3/2013
In the Title text box, type a name for the document.
In the Description text box, type additional information about the document.
Click Browse…
Navigate to and select the document to be attached to the record.
Click Open.
Click Submit.
The document is attached to the record.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 187
CHAPTER 5
STAFF INFORMATION AND SETUP
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 188
5.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how service administrators can view, change or add information for staff profiles. If
this information remains current in the Service Bridge, data entry for incident reports will be considerably
more efficient and easy.
5.2 Staff Profile Information
Staff profiles contain a variety of information about the staff member. This information can be used to
automatically fill out run forms; keep track of the staff member’s history, certifications and issued
equipment; administer their access to the Service Bridge and store contact and demographic information.
Staff profiles also give staff members a username and password to sign in to the Service Bridge. This
information is organized into tabs in the editable profile. Each staff member of a service who has access
to the Service Bridge or who may be included on a run form should have a profile created in the system.
Basic staff profiles include information about the staff member’s certifications, role and associations within
the service and contact information. The main page listing all user profiles will display basic information
about each record. Icons will appear to indicate whether this user is synchronized to a Field Bridge, as
well as to open any training records for the staff member.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Select the Staff tab.
The View Staff Info page appears, with a list of all staff members in the system.
3. To sort the listed applicants by particular criteria, use the drop down menus to select the desired
criteria.
4. To display a different number of records per page, from the Records drop down menu, select the
desired number of records.
5. To search for a particular staff member, in the Search Last Name text box, type the last name or
part of the last name for the desired staff member and click Go.
6. From the list of staff profiles, click the name of the desired staff member.
7. To return to the list of staff members at any point, click the Back to Staff List button.
8. After filtering, to view all staff members again, click All.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 189
9. To view a particular staff member’s profile, click the hyperlinked name.
10. To return to the list of staff members at any point, click the Back to Staff List button.
11. OPTIONAL: To edit the staff member’s profile,
a) Below the profile information, click Edit.
b) Click a tab to work with the fields in that tab.
c) Using the provided fields, change or add any desired information.
d) To save any changes, click OK.
To return to the staff profile without saving changes, click Cancel.
The Demographics Tab
The Demographics tab determines the name that will appear in this user’s profile and for all other
system functions working with this user, stores contact and personal information and allows users
and administrators to upload photographs of the staff member.
To change or add this information:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, select the Demographics tab.
3. From the Demographics tab, use the provided fields to enter or change any information.
NOTE: The driver’s license number and social security number available on this page
will be available only to that staff member and the service administrator(s).
Signing Up for ImageTrend Email Notifications
ImageTrend periodically sends out email notifications regarding our products, including
information about scheduled downtime due to maintenance or upcoming upgrades to the
Service Bridge. If you want to be included on these notifications or want a specific staff
member to be included, you can add someone to the email list through the Demographics
tab of a staff profile.
1. Open the Demographics tab of the staff profile.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 190
2. In the Email Notifications section, select Yes.
The selected staff member will be added to the email list with the email
addresses record in the staff profile.
The Employment Tab
The Employment tab keeps track of the user’s history with the service, including their position and
status, length of service, ID numbers and any leaves of absence that have been taken. The staff
member can also be assigned to a particular station in this tab, and roles such as primary
contact, medical director or QA/QI reviewer can be assigned to the profile.
To add or change this information:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 191
2. If necessary, select the Employment tab.
3. In the Employment Information section, enter information about the staff member’s status
at the service.
NOTE: To view the user’s employment history, click the Lookup History icons
for
each field.
4. In the Stations section, select all stations with which the profile should be associated.
HINT: The user will be able to access information designated to all stations to which
they are assigned, and will be available in all lists of staff by station for those selected
stations.
5. In the Leave of Absence section, enter all information to be documented for a leave of
absence for this staff member and click Save Leave of Absence Info.
The Certifications Tab
The Certifications tab keeps track of staff members’ certifications and their respective dates. In
order for any staff member to appear on run forms as a possible provider, a state certification ID
must be entered in this section.
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 192
2. If necessary, click the Certifications tab.
3. To edit or add information about a national certification, state certification or agencyspecific certification,
a. In the desired section, click Click Here to Edit (Type) Registry Certification Info.
b. Using the provided fields, enter or change any desired information.
NOTE: State certification ID information must be entered in order for this user
to be available as a provider on run forms.
4. To add an additional EMS certification,
a. In the Additional EMS Certifications section, from the Certification Level drop
down menu, select the certification to record.
b. From the Active drop down menu, select whether this staff member currently has
this certification.
HINT: If you are recording a certification in the past, even if this staff member
has renewed the certification, the past certification will be inactive. When you
create a record for the current certification, that record will be active.
c. In the Certification ID text box, type the certification ID number.
d. In the Certification Date section, type the data that the certification was received.
e. In the Expiration Date section, type the date that the certification will expire.
f. When finished, click Save EMS Certification.
5. Repeat step 4 until all desired certifications are added.
6. When finished, to save the changes, click OK.
The Permissions Tab
The Permissions tab controls the user’s access to the Service Bridge system (and, if used, the
Field Bridge system). This includes the user’s username and password, Service Bridge
permission group and individual access rights, account status and access rights to the Field
Bridge.
To work with this information:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 193
2. If necessary, click the Permissions tab.
3. To change the username or password, in the corresponding text boxes, make the desired
change.
NOTE: If the user’s password is changed by anyone other than the user him- or
herself, the user will be prompted to change the password after logging in.
HINT: To force a user to change their password, select the Reset User Password
checkbox. This option will not be available if users are not required to change their
password periodically as set up in the Administration tab under Account Management an
each permission group. For more information, please refer to the Working with
Permission Groups section.
4. To change the user’s permission group, from the Permission Group drop down menu,
select the correct group.
5. To change specific access rights,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 194
a. Click View Permissions.
The Permissions for (User) window appears.
b. Select and deselect checkboxes to allow and prevent access to particular
functions.
HINT: Selecting a checkbox allows the user to access that function.
Deselecting the checkbox prevents access.
View My EMS Runs Only
Gives the user access to past run reports submitted only from his or
her account.
Runs Forms
Determines the level of access the user will have to run forms that
they are allows to access. If the user is denied access to specific run
forms (e.g., if they are allowed to view run forms only they have
submitted or only within a certain time frame), that will take priority
over the level of access given here.
Ability to Lock Runs
Determines whether this user will have the authority to prevent
changes from being made to run forms after they are submitted.
Ability to Change Run Status
Determines whether this user will have the authority to change the
status assigned to a run form (e.g., in progress, reviewed, billed).
View Patient Identifiable Information
Determines whether this user will be allowed to view patient
identifiable information on run forms.
View PDF Reports for EMS Runs
Determines whether this user will be able to generate PDF reports
for a run form.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 195
View ‘All’ QA/QI Notes
Determines whether the user will be able to work with all QA/QI
notes submitted through the system or only with which he or she was
associated.
View Unified PDF
Determines whether this user will be able to generate the Unified
PDF report.
Ability to switch run form template
Determines whether this user will be able to change run form
templates after a run form is started.
Ability to Lock Trainings
Determines whether this user will be able to lock training records to
prevent them from being edited.
Restrict Based on Date
Allows the user to view run forms submitted in only the specified time
frame.
c. When finished, click Submit.
6. To activate or inactivate the account, in the Current Status section, select the desired
option.
7. If the EMS Field Bridge system is used in addition to the Service Bridge, to determine
whether the user has access to specific Field Bridge features, in the Field Bridge
Permissions section, select and deselect the desired options.
HINT: Selecting a checkbox allows the user to access that function. Deselecting the
checkbox prevents access.
Administer Field Bridge
Determines whether this user can see the Admin Options section of the Field
Bridge.
Post
Determines whether the user can send run reports from the Field Bridge to
the Service Bridge.
8. To copy all information from the user’s Service Bridge profile to the user’s Field Bridge
profile, select the Yes, Synchronize this User to Field Bridge checkbox.
9. If using security questions, to force the user to re-enter the answers for those questions,
select the Reset All Security Answers checkbox.|
NOTE: If editing your own profile, the security questions and answers will appear on
this page for editing.
10. When finished, to save the changes, click OK.
The Emergency Contacts Tab
The Emergency Contacts tab keeps contact information for persons who need to be informed in
the event of an emergency involving the employee.
To work with information for contacts:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 196
2. If necessary, click the Emergency Contacts tab.
3. To edit a contact’s information or view additional notes, click the Edit icon and make any
changes in the updated text boxes below.
The Training Tab
The Training tab keeps records of any continuing education courses that the staff member may
complete to update certifications or further their training. Each course record can contain
information about the type of class, hours required and completed for the course and the dates of
the course and of renewal.
To work with training records:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, click the Training tab.
3. To select a date range for the training you want to view, in the Training Dates text boxes,
type the desired date range.
OR
To select the dates from a calendar, click the Calendar icons
and select the desired
dates.
4. To view more complete information about a particular record, click the corresponding
Training icon
.
The Documents Tab
The Documents tab can track any files that you want to upload and keep with this staff member’s
profile. Documents can be categories based on the categories set up for your service, which will
also determine which people can view each document.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 197
To work with staff documents,
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, click the Documents tab.
The Documents tab appears.
3. To view a document, click the name of the document.
4. To add a document,
a. In the Document section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
b. Navigate to and select the desired document to upload.
c. Click Open.
The file is selected.
d. In the Description text box, type any additional details about the document.
e. From the Category drop down menu, select the type of document you are
adding.
f. Click Upload.
The document is added to the staff member’s profile.
5.3 Adding Staff Profiles
Administrators can add staff profiles to allow new staff members to access the system or simply to keep
their information in the system.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 198
2. Select the Staff tab.
The View Staff Info page appears, with a list of all staff members in the system.
3. Click Add Staff Member.
4. Using the provided fields in each tab, enter all desired profile information.
HINT: The first tab must be completed and saved before any other tabs can be used.
WARNING: Be sure to save each tab before moving on to a new tab to prevent information
from being lost.
5. To save the new profile, click OK.
To return to the list of staff, click Cancel.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 199
CHAPTER 6
DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 200
6.1 Chapter Overview
One primary purpose of the Service Bridge is to collect and analyze data about EMS incidents. This
chapter explains how to create and view incident reports, view the history of incident reports and create
specified reports for analyzing incident data.
6.2 Adding a New Incident Report with Dynamic Run Forms
Users with the correct permission rights can complete run forms using the Service Bridge. Services may
choose to set up templates for common occurrences with a different layout. Dynamic run forms may not
be used in your system, but provide additional features if they are available.
The dynamic run form requires Silverlight, a free download from Microsoft, to function properly.
Incident Report Tips
Dynamic run forms can be customized by system administrators, so keep in mind that your
dynamic run form may have different features, layout or tabs than the run forms pictured here.
The dynamic run form is organized into multiple tabs and panels. Panels are displayed at the top
of the run form and along the right side. A tab can be opened by clicking on it, although we
recommend that you save your run form before opening a new tab to make sure no data is lost.
Each tab contains multiple panels. A panel can be opened or closed by clicking on the header of
that panel.
The tabs on the right side can be opened at the same time as any tab that is listed across the top,
allowing you to refer to information there while working on the rest of your run form. The tabs on
the right side will automatically be hidden when you move your mouse away from them, although
you can click the Pin to Side icon to keep this panel displayed while you work on the rest of the
run form.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 201
There are two toolbars at the top of the dynamic run form to provide additional information and
options. The toolbar immediately above the run form informs you when there is unsaved data in
the run form, allows you to save at any time and allows individuals with the correct permissions to
change the status or lock the run. In addition, as information is completed in the run form, this
toolbar contains a summary of the patient’s information.
Another toolbar is available above the page, which provides options for adding additional
components to the run form (e.g., addendums, attachments or new patients), viewing reports that
can be printed regarding this run report, viewing the history of this run form or changing your
preferences for viewing the run form. The Mark Run As Completed button also appears on the
right side of this toolbar. This allows you to mark this run as completed for audit tracking at any
time. Depending on your service’s setup, this may also lock the run for editing and change its
status to completed.
Run Form Tools
The Service Bridge run form provides you with some tools to make it easier for you to complete
your run forms.
7/3/2013

Lookup buttons allow you to search for and select information from a list.

Set From checkboxes will automatically complete some information based on what you
have already filled in (e.g., completing the city and state information based on a zip
code).

Calendar icons will help you select a date by opening a window with a calendar.

Spell Check will run a spell checker on your narratives or other text fields with the feature,
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 202
Working with Run Validation
The tabs for each form are coded to inform users about their status. Tabs that have required
information missing will display red text and tabs that have all required fields completed or have
no required fields will display dark blue text.
Within red tabs, panels with incomplete fields will display red text and the individual fields will be
highlighted and outlined in red.
A summary of all required fields that are incomplete is available from the Validation tab on the
right. Each field displays the number of validation points that were subtracted as well as a Go link
to jump to that field.
Administrators with the correct permissions can set up validation rules to designate which fields
are important and how much will be taken off of the form’s validity score when they are left
incomplete.
Completing a New Incident Report
The dynamic run form used by your service may differ from those displayed in these instructions.
Tabs in the dynamic run form can be filled out in any order, although it is recommended that you
save each tab before switching to a new tab to ensure that no data is lost.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 203
2. Under the Incidents tab, click Add Run.
The Run Form Template Selection page appears.
3. From the EMS Dynamic Run Templates section, select the appropriate template for the
incident.
The appropriate report appears.
4. Using the provided fields and tabs, enter all information pertaining to the EMS incident.
NOTE: Be sure to click Save before opening a new tab to prevent data from being
lost.
5. To open a specific tab, click the name of the tab.
NOTES:
Be sure to click Save before opening a new tab to prevent data from being lost.
The tabs on the right side will expand to display a panel on the right. When this panel is
first displayed, it will cover up part of the main portion of the run form, and will be hidden
as soon as your mouse moves away from the panel.
6. OPTIONAL: To keep the panel containing the tabs on the right side open and to adjust
the main portion of the run form so it is not hidden behind the right panel,
a. Click one of the tabs on the right side.
b. Click the Pin icon
.
HINT: This can be useful if you need to refer to the information in the right
panel at the same time as the main run form, such as when you are working with
an active protocol or working with validation issues.
c. At any point, to unpin the panel, click the Pin icon again.
7. To expand a panel that is hidden, click the name of the panel.
OR
To hide a specific panel that is displayed, click the name of the panel.
8. To enter text into a field, click the field and type.
9. To enter a response from a list of possible responses, in fields with a Look up icon,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 204
a. Click the Look Up icon
.
A new window appears with possible options to enter.
b. Navigate to and select the desired option.
HINT: Depending on the field, you may be able to use a Search text box or
filters to help locate the desired option.
c. Click OK.
The option is inserted into the field.
10. For address fields, to complete the city, state and county information,
a. In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code for the address.
b. Click Set from Postal Code.
The information is entered. If there are multiple locations for this zip code, the
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 205
Location Lookup window appears.
c. Click the desired location information.
d. Click OK.
The information is entered.
11. For date fields, to select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
.
12. To use the automatic narrative feature,
a. In the Narrative tab, if necessary, click the Narrative panel to open the panel.
The Narrative panel appears.
b. From the drop down menu, select the type of narrative to enter.
HINT: The automatic narrative feature completes the narrative based on
details you have previously entered into the run form. Because of this, it is most
helpful to complete the narrative after filling in the rest of the run form.
c. Click Set Narrative.
WARNING: If you have already typed into the Narrative text box, inserting
an automatic narrative will delete your text and replace it with the automatic
narrative text.
d. Make any desired changes to the narrative.
e. Click Save.
13. To add medication, procedure, vitals, EKG or provider assessment records,
a. In the Vitals/Treatment tab, if necessary, click the Medication/Procedure/Vitals
panel to open it.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 206
NOTE: If your service is using a different template, this section may appear
under a different tab.
b. At the bottom of the panel, click the appropriate button (e.g., to add a medication
record, click Add Med).
The panel expands to display fields for adding the appropriate record.
c. Complete the fields for this record.
d. To view additional fields to input more information, click Show/Hide Extra
Controls.
e. When finished, to save this record and move on, click Update List.
OR
To save this record and begin a new record, click Update List & New.
14. To collect signatures,
a. In the Signatures tab, click the header for the first signature to add.
The signature panel expands.
NOTE: If your service is using a different template, this section may appear
under a different tab or have a different name.
b. Select the appropriate answers to the questions.
c. Using the mouse, sign in or ask the appropriate person sign in the Please Sign
Here section of the panel.
d. In the Printed Name text box, type the name of the signatory.
e. In the Date section, type or select the appropriate date and time that this
signature was collected.
f. When finished collecting signatures, click Save in the upper left to save the run
form.
15. To add additional information to the run form, from the run form’s toolbar, click Form
Options and the selected option.
HINT: For more information, please refer to Additional Run Form Options.
6.3 Additional Dynamic Run Form Options
Once a run form is completed, system users can add additional information, including QA/QI notes,
addendums or attachments. In addition, a new patient can be added to the incident, which will create a
patient care report attached to the initial incident report. If you have previously used these features with
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 207
the standard run form, you will find that the process is nearly identical when working with the dynamic run
form.
NOTE: Be sure to complete the first run form before adding a new patient.
Adding a Patient to a Run Report
When a patient is added to an existing run form, a new patient care report will be created for the
patient and attached to the original incident report. Patient-specific information can be recorded in
this new patient care report. This option should not be completed until the run form is otherwise
finished.
1. From the existing run form to which the patient care report should be attached, from the
run form toolbar, click Actions and Add Patient.
2. In the New Patient Care # text box, type the number for this patient care report.
NOTE: These numbers will differ depending on your service’s requirements.
3. Click Add New Patient To this Incident.
A new patient care report appears.
4. Using the provided fields, complete the patient care report for the new patient as
indicated in Adding a New Incident Report.
Adding QA/QI Notes to a Run Report
Administrators can add notes to completed run reports with comments for the personnel included
in the incident. These notes will be attached to the incident and sent to the inboxes of any
personnel included.
1. From the existing run form to which the note will pertain, from the run form toolbar, click
Actions and Add QA/QI Note.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 208
The QA/QI Notes window appears.
2. Click the New Message icon
A blank message appears.
.
3. From the Message Type drop down menu, select the category for this message.
4. In the Subject text box, type a name for the message.
5. In the Message text box, type the body of the note.
NOTE: Information must be typed in the Message text box before the message can
be sent.
6. In the Notify section, to add additional staff members who should receive this message in
their Service Bridge inbox,
NOTES:
Staff already associated with the incident will be selected in the Staff Associated with this
Incident section.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 209
Other staff for the service will be listed in the Service Staff scroll list. You can use the
fields in the Filters section to narrow down which staff should be displayed in the Service
Staff section.
System administrators will be listed in the Administrative Contacts section.
Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by pressing and holding Ctrl
while clicking each name.
A link to the incident report will also be included in the message.
a. To add staff from the service associated with this run form,
i. From the Available scroll list for the Service Staff section, select the staff
members
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by
pressing and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
b. To add all staff from this service who are in a specific permission group,
i. From the Available scroll list in the Permission Groups section, select the
desired permission group.
c.
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple permission groups can be selected from this section
by pressing and holding Ctrl while clicking each group name.
To include an administrative contact for the system in this message,
i. From the Available scroll list in the Administrative Contacts section,
select the desired name.
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple names can be selected from this section by pressing
and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
7. To send emails with the message to all selected staff at the email address listed in their
profile, select the Send an email in addition to the Inbox, if available checkbox.
8. To post the note, click Submit.
Adding Addendums
Run reports are locked after a specific amount of time to prevent additional changes from being
made. In the case that additional information must be added, however, personnel with
permissions can attach a separate file containing that information. This file could be a Word or
Excel document, or any other document type preferred by the service.
1. From the run report to which the addendum should be added, from the run form toolbar,
click Actions and Add Addendum.
The Incident Addendum window appears.
2. Click Add Addendum.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 210
3. In the Description text box, type any additional important information about the
addendum.
4. OPTIONAL: From the File section, type the path to the file or click Browse to locate and
select the file.
5. When finished, click Submit.
Adding Attachments
Additional files can assist with the complete documentation of incidents, including photographs or
scanned documents. System users can attach files to the run report.
1. From the run report to which the file should be attached, from the run form toolbar, click
Actions and Add Attachment.
The Incident Attachments window appears.
2. Click Add Attachment.
3. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to and select the desired file.
5. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
6. When finished, click Submit.
The file is added as an attachment.
Switching Templates
Run form templates can be switched in the middle of a run report. All information that should be
copied to the new template should be saved, although not all information may carry over,
depending on the new template selection. All information that should not be copied should be
deleted from the run form.
This option may not be available if the user does not have the correct permissions, if only one run
form template is available for the service or if the run has been locked at some point. If the run
form template is switched, this action will be noted in the history for this run.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 211
1. From the existing run form, from the run form toolbar, click Actions and Switch Template.
2. Select the desired new template.
The Attention dialog box appears.
3. In the Reason text box, type the explanation.
4. To change the run form template, click Submit.
6.4 Adding a New Incident Report with Standard Run Forms
Users with the correct permission rights can complete run forms using the Service Bridge. Services may
choose to set up templates for common occurrences with a different layout. Standard run forms use the
traditional Service Bridge layout and features.
Incident Report Tips
The tabs for each form are coded to inform users about their status. Tabs that have required
information missing will be red, the tab currently displayed will be orange, and tabs that have not
been viewed will be blue. Within red tabs, important fields that have not been completed will be
listed at the top of the page. Administrators with the correct permissions can set up validation
rules to designate which fields are important and how much will be taken off of the form’s validity
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 212
score when they are left incomplete. The Incident tab must be submitted before validity
information appears.
WARNING: Before moving to a new tab, be sure to save. Unsaved changes will be lost
when moving between tabs.
After the first tab of the run form is submitted, the run form toolbar will appear at the top of the
page. This toolbar provides options for adding additional components to the run form (e.g.,
addendums or attachments), viewing reports that can be printed regarding this run report, and
opening a Times pop up box that will display the incident times for reference on any tab.
In addition to the run form toolbar, the Mark Run As Completed button will appear on the right
side at the top of the page. This allows you to mark this run as completed for audit tracking at any
time. Depending on your service’s setup, this may also lock the run for editing and change its
status to completed.
Understanding Validity
Validity is a feature that will inform you of when you have left any required fields in the run form
incomplete. Based on the number of incomplete fields and the importance of those fields, your
run form will be assigned a validity score that will be displayed at the top of the page once you
save your run form. As you complete more fields, the score will go up.
There will be multiple visual clues throughout the run form as to where required fields have been
left blank.
7/3/2013

Each tab is color coded to indicate its status for validity. The orange tab is the one you
currently have open; blue tabs have all required fields completed and red tabs have
required fields that still need to be completed.

At the top of each tab you will see a section detailing the current validity of this run form
and a list of the fields that still need to be filled in.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE

P a g e | 213
Within the run form, any incomplete field that is required will be displayed with red text
and a Warning icon.
When the run form is complete, the validity score will be at 100%, all tabs will be blue and there
will be no red fields or Warning icons.
Run Form Tools
The Service Bridge run form provides you with some tools to make it easier for you to complete
your run forms.

Lookup buttons allow you to search for and select information from a list.

Check to Populate checkboxes will automatically complete some information based on
what you have already filled in (e.g., completing the city and state information based on a
zip code).

AutoComplete buttons will cause the system to search for matching records as you type
(e.g., searching for a code matching the word or numbers you begin to type) whenever
the button is selected.

Help icons will provide additional information about the section when you place your
mouse over them without clicking.

Spell Check will run a spell checker on your narratives or other text fields with the feature,
Completing a New Incident Report
Each tab of the run form can be completed in any order after the first tab with basic incident
information is submitted.
1. From the upper left, click My Service.
2. Under the Incidents tab, click Add Run.
The Run Form Template Selection page appears.
3. From the EMS Standard Run Templates section, select the appropriate template for the
incident.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 214
The appropriate report appears, with tabs across the top for each required report.
4. Using the provided fields and tabs, enter all information pertaining to the EMS incident.
HINT: When times are entered that span more than one day (e.g., changing from
23:55 to 00:04), the dates will be changed automatically to reflect that date change.
NOTE: Be sure to click Save/Submit Form before opening a new tab or all new data
will be lost.
5. Click Save/Submit Form.
NOTE: All tabs can now be worked with in any order.
WARNING: Be sure to save tabs before moving to a new tab so no information is
lost.
6. In the Call Info tab, enter information about the destination and response.
7. In the Demographic tab, enter demographic information about the patient.
HINT: To automatically fill in information for a patient who is in the Repeat Patient
database, click Repeat Patient and select the desired patient.
8. In the History section, enter information about the patient’s medical history.
HINT: As medications are typed into the Medication fields, a list will appear of all
medications that match the text. This drop down will also include responses if patients
deny medication or allergies.
9. In the Physical Assessment section, enter information about the physical state of the
patient.
HINTS: Select the body type and click on each portion of the body that requires an
assessment to enter information.
Use the fields below the displayed image to enter additional information.
NOTE: The time will be entered by default as the Arrived at Patient time.
10. When finished, click Save.
11. OPTIONAL: To enter injury information, from the top of the Physical Assessment page,
click Injury Assessment and use the image to enter information.
HINTS:
Click on each portion of the body that requires an assessment to enter information.
Use the fields below the displayed image to enter additional information.
12. When finished, click Save.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 215
13. OPTIONAL: To enter information about burns, from the top of the Physical Assessment
page, click Burn Assessment and use the image to enter information.
HINTS:
Click on each portion of the body that requires an assessment to enter burn information.
Click once for a first degree burn, twice for a second degree burn, and three times for a
third degree burn. Clicking once more after indicating a third degree burn will remove the
assessment from that area.
14. When finished, click Save.
15. From the Vitals/Treatments tab, enter information about medications, procedures, vitals
EKGs and treatment.
HINTS:
Click the buttons across the top of the page to switch what information is being entered.
When finished with a section, before adding the next piece of information, click Save
(Feature).
Times for vitals, medications, EKG and procedures will be assigned to the Arrived at
Patient time.
The medications and procedures available may change based on the user performing the
act.
When medications are added, the dosage will be automatically entered as the default
value.
16. In the Narrative section, complete the required fields to generate a narrative.
HINT: To automatically generate a narrative (if permissions allow), from the Narrative
section, use the drop down menu to select the desired type of narrative and click Set
Narrative.
17. From the Billing tab, enter information about billing.
18. From the Signatures tab, complete the necessary fields for signatures.
19. To add additional information to the run form, from the run form’s toolbar, click Form
Options and the selected option.
HINT: For more information, please refer to Additional Run Form Options.
6.5 Additional Standard Run Form Options
Once a run form is completed, system users can add additional information, including QA/QI notes,
addendums or attachments. In addition, a new patient can be added to the incident, which will create a
patient care report attached to the initial incident report.
NOTE: Be sure to complete the first run form before adding a new patient.
Adding a Patient to a Run Report
When a patient is added to an existing run form, a new patient care report will be created for the
patient and attached to the original incident report. Patient-specific information can be recorded in
this new patient care report. This option should not be completed until the run form is otherwise
finished.
1. From the existing run form to which the patient care report should be attached, from the
run form toolbar, click Form Options and Add Patient.
2. In the New Patient Care # text box, type the number for this patient care report.
NOTE: These numbers will differ depending on your service’s requirements.
3. Click Add New Patient To this Incident.
A new patient care report appears.
4. Using the provided fields, complete the patient care report for the new patient as
indicated in Adding a New Incident Report.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 216
Adding QA/QI Notes to a Run Report
Administrators can add notes to completed run reports with comments for the personnel included
in the incident. These notes will be attached to the incident and sent to the inboxes of any
personnel included.
1. From the existing run form to which the note will pertain, from the run form toolbar, click
Form Options and Add QA/QI Note.
The QA/QI Notes window appears.
2. Click the New Message icon
A blank message appears.
.
3. From the Message Type drop down menu, select the category for this message.
4. In the Subject text box, type a name for the message.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 217
5. In the Message text box, type the body of the note.
NOTE: Information must be typed in the Message text box before the message can
be sent.
6. In the Notify section, to add additional staff members who should receive this message in
their Service Bridge inbox,
NOTES:
Staff already associated with the incident will be selected in the Staff Associated with this
Incident section.
Other staff for the service will be listed in the Service Staff scroll list. You can use the
fields in the Filters section to narrow down which staff should be displayed in the Service
Staff section.
Service administrators will be listed in the Administrative Contacts section.
Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by pressing and holding Ctrl
while clicking each name.
A link to the incident report will also be included in the message.
a. To add staff from the service associated with this run form,
i. From the Available scroll list for the Service Staff section, select the staff
members
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by
pressing and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
b. To add all staff from this service who are in a specific permission group,
i. From the Available scroll list in the Permission Groups section, select the
desired permission group.
c.
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple permission groups can be selected from this section
by pressing and holding Ctrl while clicking each group name.
To include an administrative contact for the system in this message,
i. From the Available scroll list in the Administrative Contacts section,
select the desired name.
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple names can be selected from this section by pressing
and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
7. To send emails with the message to all selected staff at the email address listed in their
profile, select the Send an email in addition to the Inbox, if available checkbox.
8. To post the note, click Submit.
Adding Addendums
Run reports are locked after a specific amount of time to prevent additional changes from being
made. In the case that additional information must be added, however, personnel with
permissions can attach a separate file containing that information. This file could be a Word or
Excel document, or any other document type preferred by the service.
1. From the run report to which the addendum should be added, from the run form toolbar,
click Form Options and Add Addendum.
The Incident Addendum window appears.
2. Click Add Addendum.
3. In the Description text box, type any additional important information about the
addendum.
4. OPTIONAL: From the File section, type the path to the file or click Browse to locate and
select the file.
5. When finished, click Submit.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 218
Adding Attachments
Additional files can assist with the complete documentation of incidents, including photographs or
scanned documents. System users can attach files to the run report.
1. From the run report to which the file should be attached, from the run form toolbar, click
Form Options and Add Attachment.
The Incident Attachments window appears.
2. Click Add Attachment.
3. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to and select the desired file.
5. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
6. When finished, click Submit.
The file is added as an attachment.
Switching Templates
Run form templates can be switched in the middle of a run report. All information that should be
copied to the new template should be saved, although not all information may carry over,
depending on the new template selection. All information that should not be copied should be
deleted from the run form.
This option may not be available if the user does not have the correct permissions, if only one run
form template is available for the service or if the run has been locked at some point. If the run
form template is switched, this action will be noted in the history for this run.
1. From the existing run form, from the run form toolbar, click Form Options and Switch
Template.
2. Select the desired new template.
The Attention dialog box appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 219
3. In the Reason text box, type the explanation.
4. To change the run form template, click Submit.
6.6 Recording Months with No Runs to Report
At times, your service may have no fire calls to report to the state. The Service Bridge allows you to
record this and submit that information.
1. From the upper left, click My Service.
2. Under the Modules tab, click No Runs to Report.
The Document No Runs to Report page appears.
3. Click No EMS Runs.
The No EMS Runs page appears.
4. Click Add No Runs.
The No EMS Runs page appears.
5. From the Month and Year drop down menus, select the time in which these calls occurred.
6. When finished, at the bottom of the page, click OK.
The record of no EMS calls is saved.
6.7 Viewing and Editing Past Run Reports
System users can view and search through any run reports that they have created on or uploaded to the
Service Bridge system. Based on their level of permissions, some system users may be able to view run
reports submitted by other users within their service. Within the time frame set by the user’s service,
these run forms may be altered to contain more complete or correct information, but after this time frame
the user will only be able to view the static report.
You can search for past run reports either from the Incident List or the Run History page, depending on
your preference. The Incident List offers several improved features including the ability to save search
criteria in a view and improved search speed, while the Run History page offers a familiar interface for
those who may have worked with it in past versions of Service Bridge.
Working with the Incident List
The Incident List feature is a new view allowing you to search, view and filter your incident forms
to find the ones you are looking for. The Incident List provides several additional tools for finding
incidents, as well as a faster load time.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 220
Overview of Incident List Options
The Incident List page provides you with a collection of tools you can use to find the
appropriate incident(s) in your system.
Views allow you to create a set of criteria that incidents must meet in order to be
displayed when that view is applied and also to customize which columns you see. You
can save a view and use it again any time that you view the incident list.
The search options allow you to either search for an incident exactly matching
everything you type in the search box (when the Exact Match checkbox is selected) or for
any incidents that contain what you typed in the Search box, even if they also contain
additional information (e.g., if you type “”Lake,” you could see results for Lakeville and
Lake City). The filters options allow you to enter more specific search criteria.
You also have the option to select how often the page will refresh to display new
incidents meeting your view and search criteria.
The Quick Action menu available for each incident allows you to quickly perform an
action for that incident (e.g., to quickly view the history or view the report).
Searching for Incidents from the Incident List
In order to search for incidents, you can use any of the tools available from the Incident
List page.
1. If necessary, in the upper right, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Incident List.
The Incident List page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 221
3. To apply a view to determine which incidents appear, from the View drop down
menu, select the appropriate view.
NOTE: The Default View option will provide the same view options as the
default view of the Run History page did previously.
The page refreshes to display the information set up in that view.
4. To perform a basic search,
a. In the Search text box, type your search terms.
HINT: The Search text box will search different options based on the
columns that are displayed for the view you are using. For more
information about which columns will be searched, click the Help icon to
the right of the Search text box.
b. To set the search up to return only incidents that match your entire entry
in the search text box (e.g., entering Lake City would return only
incidents with Lake City, not incidents with Lakeville or Lake of the
Woods, because it is searching only for values that include the full text of
Lake City), select the Exact Match checkbox.
OR
To set the search up to return incidents that include your search terms
(e.g., entering Lake City would return Lake City, Lakeville and Lake of
the Woods, because it is searching for either Lake OR City), deselect the
Exact Match checkbox.
NOTE: This Exact Search option applies only to the Search text box,
not to the filters or additional search options covered in later steps.
c. Click Go.
The page is narrowed down to display only incidents matching your
search.
5. To search based on date,
a. In the Date Range text boxes, type the first and the last date you want to
view incidents within.
OR
To select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
select the desired date.
OR
To avoid setting a start or end date for the search, leave the
corresponding text box blank.
b. Click Go.
and
NOTE: If you have also entered other search criteria, you will see
only incidents that match both those search criteria and the date criteria
set here.
6. To perform an advanced search,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 222
a. From the right of the Search text box, click the Filters link.
Additional search filters are displayed.
b. Enter any search criteria in the new search fields.
c.
NOTE: Some filters have drop down menus that allow you to select
how you want your search terms to match the criteria you enter; for
example, you could say that you want the incidents with validity scores
less than, greater than or equal to a certain number. If there is not a drop
down menu to select this kind of information, the search will
automatically look for values that contain the full text of your entry. So,
searching for 12345 would bring back 12345, 012345 and 123456, but
not 123 45 or 123645.
When finished, click Go.
NOTE: If you have also entered other search criteria, you will see
only incidents that match both those search criteria and the advanced
search criteria set here.
7. OPTIONAL: At any time, to clear your existing search and return to the default
view, click Clear.
8. To open an incident, click on any of the blue links for that incident.
9. To view a report for an incident,
a. Click the Quick Actions icon for the report.
A drop down menu appears.
b. Click Report.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 223
If prompted, enter a reason for viewing the report and click Submit.
The report appears.
10. To view the audit trail history of this report,
a. Click the Quick Actions icon for the report.
A drop down menu appears.
b. Click History.
The Incident History window appears.
Setting the Refresh Frequency
You can select how often you want the Incident List page to automatically refresh to find
new incidents.
1. If necessary, in the upper right, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 224
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Incident List.
The Incident List page appears.
3. From the upper right, from the Refresh drop down menu, select how often you
want the page to automatically refresh.
Creating a View
Views allow you to create a set of criteria that incidents must meet in order to be
displayed when that view is applied and also to customize which columns you see. You
can create and save your own custom views that you can apply at any time when you’re
working with the incident list.
There are four different types of views: system views, service views, my views and the
default view. Your ability to create and edit views is based on permissions. Users will only
be able to create and edit views if they have the correct level of access to the Incident
List page, and may be able to view only certain types of views based on their
permissions.
System views are set up at the system level and only system administrators will be able
to edit them, although everyone can view them.
Service views are set up for a specific service by service administrators. Only service
administrators will be able to edit these views, although anyone in that service can view
them.
My views are created by you and can be edited by you at any time. Only you will be able
to use and edit your views.
The default view includes all the columns that were included in the default view for the
previous Run History page. You will not be able to edit this view, although you can use it
to view the incident list at any time.
1. If necessary, in the upper right, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 225
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Incident List.
The Incident List page appears.
3. From the right side of the View drop down menu, click Add.
The View Details page appears.
4. In the Name text box, type the name for this view.
NOTE: This name is what you will see and select from the View drop down
menu when you want to use this view again.
5. In the Description text box, type any additional descriptive details you want to
save with this view.
NOTE: This description will only be visible if someone opens this view for
editing.
6. To set up an additional column of information to display on the incident list,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 226
a. Click Add Column.
A new line appears.
b. From the Column drop down menu, select the field that you want to
appear for this column.
c. OPTIONAL: To change the text that will appear in the column header, in
the Header text box, type the desired header.
d. From the Align drop down menu, select the way you want the text in this
column aligned.
e. If you want to change the formatting for the way the information appears,
from the Format drop down menu, select the desired formatting.
f.
HINT: This option will not be available for all columns. It will most
commonly be used for dates; you could choose to display the date as
3/21/2013 or March 21, 2013.
If you have multiple columns, to move this one up or down in the order of
where it will appear on the page, click the Up or Down button, as
needed.
HINT: If you drag the column to a new position, make sure that you
do not click within a field; clicking within a field will open that field for
editing rather than selecting the field to move.
OR
Click within the row for a column and drag it to the desired position in the
list.
7. To add additional filters to the page that you can use for advanced searches,
a. In the Filters section, from the Available scroll list, select the first filter to
add.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired filters are added.
8. To set up criteria that will narrow down the incidents listed on this page, in the
Criteria section,
a. To group multiple pieces of criteria, from the first drop down menu, select
the opening parenthesis.
HINTS:
You generally only need to use parentheses if you will be creating
multiple criteria where some are linked together with And (e.g., criteria A
AND criteria B must be met) and others are linked together with Or (e.g.,
criteria C OR criteria D must be met).
It may be easier for you to add parentheses at the end, once you have
set up all your criteria already.
If you want to enter multiple criteria, think of them like a math equation.
Criteria will be applied in order unless parentheses are applied to group
some of them together.
b. From the Field drop down menu, select which field the criteria will be
examining (e.g., Status).
c. From the Operator drop down menu, select what is required of the
selected value for the criteria to be met (e.g., is, is before, begins with).
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 227
d. From the Value drop down menu, select the option that the field should
be compared against (e.g., In Progress).
The first criteria is complete.
e. To add an additional piece of criteria, click the Add icon .
f. To determine how this piece of criteria relates to the others, from the
And/Or drop down menu, select And (i.e., this all pieces of criteria must
be met for a record to display) or Or (i.e., one of the pieces of criteria
must be met for a record to display).
NOTE: If using parenthesis to group criteria, note that the And and Or
options will only be applied within the parentheses. If the option is
applied to a single piece of criteria outside a group, it will act upon the
individual piece of criteria and the group as a whole.
g. Repeat steps a–f until all desired criteria are set.
h. When finished with a group, from the last drop down menu, select the
closed parenthesis.
9. When finished with all criteria, click Save.
The Create View For window appears.
10. From the drop down menu, select the type of view you are creating.
NOTE: Depending on your permissions, you may not be able to create all
these types of views.
System Views
System views are available for all services in the system and can
only be created or edited by individuals with system administratorlevel permissions. All other users will be able to apply system views
when looking at the incident list but will not be able to make any
changes.
Service Views
Service views are available for the service the view is created in and
can only be created or edited by individuals with service
administrator-level permissions. All other users will be able to apply
service views when looking at the incident list for that service but will
not be able to make any changes.
My View
A view that is saved as a My View will be available only for you. You
can use this kind of view to view the incident and you will be able to
edit it at any time, but no one else will be able to access it.
11. Click Save.
The new view is created.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 228
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Incident List
Keyboard shortcuts allow you to quickly perform an action within the incident list by
pressing certain keys on your keyboard.
Keyboard Shortcut
Action
Enter
Refreshes the page and keeps your current search and filter
options applied
Esc
Refreshes the page and clears any current search and filter
options
 (right arrow)
Opens the next page of results on the incident list
 (left arrow)
Opens the previous page of results on the incident list
Working with Run History
Runs that are locked to prevent further editing will displayed a Locked icon
status set to Completed.
and will have their
To view past run reports:
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Run History.
The Search Run History page appears.
3. Using the provided fields, enter all criteria to narrow down the reports that should be
displayed.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 229
HINT: To display all runs entered by the signed-in user, make sure that the Incident
Date text boxes display appropriate dates and that all other fields are empty of criteria.
4. To search by more specific criteria,
a.
Click Advanced Search.
The Advanced Search Criteria section appears.
b.
In the Advanced Search Criteria section, enter all additional search terms.
5. When finished, to display a list of all run reports created by the signed-in user matching
the set criteria, click Search.
The search results are displayed.
6. To temporarily show only certain results within the list, use the drop down menus at the
top of the window to select the criteria by which to filter.
7. To sort the results by a particular heading, click the desired heading. To reverse the order
that the records are sorted by (e.g., to switch from sorting A–Z to sorting Z–A), click the
heading again.
8. To view a particular record, click the any of the linked text in that record.
9. OPTIONAL: To edit the record,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
a.
b.
c.
d.
P a g e | 230
Using the tabs on the top of the run form, navigate to the page with the
information to be changed.
Using the provided fields, change any desired information.
Before closing that tab, click Save/Submit Form.
Repeat steps a–c until all desired changes have been made.
Editing the Run History Display Options
The columns that display information about the records on the Run History page can be
configured to display the information most relevant to your needs. As each configuration
option is set, a preview will appear at the bottom of the page for the new configuration.
1. From the Run History page, click the Customize Run History Page link.
The User Customizable Run History Page appears.
2. To select a new column to be displayed, from the Add New Column section, from
the first drop down menu, select the desired column.
3. From the second drop down menu, select where the new column should be
added to the page in relation to the existing columns.
4. Click OK.
The Setup Columns table appears.
5. To change the text at the top of the column, in the Column column, type the new
text.
6. To set a column as the first column that records will be sorted by, select the
corresponding Primary Sort option and select the desired sort order.
7. To set a column as the second column that records will be sorted by, select the
corresponding Secondary Sort option and select the desired sort order.
8. When finished, click OK.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 231
Working with Run History Results
The Run History report contains basic information about the displayed run. Clicking on
the color-coded Validity
icon, incident number, call number, or PCR number will
open the corresponding Patient Care Report.
Each run report listed in the search results will show the incident
report’s validity with both a percentage and a color. A validity
index, which defines the validity associated with each color, can
be found at the bottom of the Run History screen. These colors
provide an at-a-glance method to determine the validity of run
reports.
The Actions column contains icons to inform users of all
additional documentation related to the run report. The icon
index at the bottom of the run history page defines the
actions column. If a call has an addendum, QA/QI note,
active protocol, documented validity reason or attachment
associated with it, the appropriate column will be displayed in
the corresponding row for the call record. All calls will have a
Run Report icon and a History icon associated with them.
Clicking the History icon
will bring up the history audit
trail for this run report. This will display a record of all
personnel who accessed the report based on their login information and document any
information that was changed.
Changing the Run Form Template
You can change the template of a run form directly from the Run History page in addition
to from within the run form.
1. From the results of your run history search, locate the desired run.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 232
2. Click the Change Template icon
.
The Change Template window appears.
3. From the Standard Run Forms drop down menu, select the new template.
4. Click Select Standard Run Form.
A confirmation page appears.
5. In the Reason text box, type your reason for switching the template for this
incident.
6. Click Submit.
The template is switched and the run form opens.
6.8 Updating Multiple Runs
Service Bridge allows you to perform several different actions on multiple runs at the same time either
from the results of a run history search or from the Incident List. Your ability to perform each of these
actions is based on your level of permissions.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 233
Printing Multiple Runs
The Batch Print option allows you to generate a PDF file containing a report for multiple runs at
the same time, rather than opening each PDF individually. This PDF file can then be easily
printed based on your printer settings. This option will generate the same report for each selected
run in the PDF file.
1. From the results of your run history search or the Incident List, select the checkbox(es)
for all runs that you want to print.
2. From the Choose Bulk Action drop down menu, select Batch Print.
Another drop down menu appears.
3. Select the PDF report that you want to generate.
4. Click Go.
A new window or tab opens with a PDF file containing the selected report for all selected
runs.
NOTE: Depending on the setup of your system, you may be prompted to enter a
reason for working with multiple runs. If a prompt appears, enter your reason and click
Submit.
Updating the Status of Multiple Runs
Based on your permissions, you may be able to update the status of multiple runs at the same
time from the list of runs available once you search run history.
1. From the results of your run history search or the Incident List, select the checkbox(es)
for all runs that you want to update the status for.
2. From the Choose Bulk Action drop down menu, select Update Status.
Another drop down menu appears.
3. From the second drop down menu, select the new status to apply to the selected run
forms.
4. Click Go.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.
The status of the selected runs is updated.
NOTE: Depending on the setup of your system, you may be prompted to enter a
reason for working with multiple runs. If a prompt appears, enter your reason and click
Submit.
Locking and Unlocking Multiple Runs
You can update multiple runs to be either locked or unlocked from the results of a run history
search.
1. From the results of your run history search or the Incident List, select the checkbox(es)
for all runs that you want to lock or unlock.
2. From the Choose Bulk Action drop down menu, select Lock Runs or Unlock Runs, as
appropriate.
3. Click Go.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
The selected runs are locked or unlocked, as appropriate.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 234
NOTE: Depending on the setup of your system, you may be prompted to enter a
reason for working with multiple runs. If a prompt appears, enter your reason and click
Submit.
6.9 Accessing Pre-Created Service Reports
The Service Bridge has several common reports easily available that all system users can request for
more information about the collected data. These reports have defined the information that will appear in
the report, but take the data from the run reports entered into the Service Bridge by your service.
Additional reports are available from the Report Writer. For more information about the Report Writer,
please refer to the Report Writer chapter.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Under the Modules page, select Reports.
The Service Reports page appears.
3. From the Service Reports page, click the name of the desired report.
If any additional information is needed to specify the data in the report, a new page will appear
with empty fields.
4. To further specify the report data, use the provided fields to enter the correct criteria and click
Continue.
The new report appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 235
CHAPTER 7
COMMUNICATING WITH THE SERVICE BRIDGE
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 236
7.1 Chapter Overview
The Service Bridge provides several ways to communicate with both people within the service and from
the public. This chapter explains how to send and receive messages using the Service Bridge inbox and
how to post messages on the home page of the Service Bridge for system users.
7.2 Working with the Inbox
The Inbox can be used in the same way as an email inbox, to send, receive or store messages from other
system users.
Viewing Messages in the Inbox
The inbox is how users obtain, respond and write messages pertaining to specific incidents or to
communicate with other members of the service, medical direction or other system users.
Message status is maintained within the system to verify when messages are sent, replied to and
read. Messages can be stored in the inbox for later reference. When unread messages are
present in the inbox, a notification will appear in the top right.
1. From the top toolbar, in the upper right, click the number icon.
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: If you have unread messages in your inbox, this number will be displayed in
red and will reflect the number of unread messages.
2. To view read messages, unread messages or both, from the View drop down menu,
select the desired type of messages to display in the inbox.
3. To view a different number of records per page, from the Records drop down list, select
the desired number of records.
4. To go directly to a page of records, from the Go to Page section at the bottom left, click
the desired page number.
5. To view a particular note, click the linked subject text or the corresponding folder icon
.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 237
The appropriate note appears.
6. To view a PDF file of the report to which this note pertains, from the Associated Run
Report Options section, click View PDF
.
7. To view the online form of the report to which this note pertains, from the Associated Run
Report Options section, click View Run Form
8. To return to the list of messages, click List of Message
.
.
Replying to Messages in the Inbox
To share additional information with the sender of a note, users can use the inbox to reply to
notes that they have received.
1. Open the note to which you want to reply.
NOTE: For more information about viewing notes, please refer to the above Viewing
Notes in the Inbox section.
2. From the bottom of the page, click Reply This Message
.
3. In the Message text field, type all desired text for the note.
4. OPTIONAL: To send a copy of this note to additional people,
a. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the list of people displayed in the Service Staff
section, use the Permission Groups drop down menu or the checkbox(es) to
specify criteria that users should meet in order to show up in the Service Staff
section.
HINT: This can make it easier for you to locate the people you want to receive
this message. To view all people again, you can click the Clear Filters button.
b. In the Service Staff section, select the names of all staff to receive the message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking
each name.
c. Click the Add icon
.
d. In the Administrative Contacts section, select the names of all system
administrators to receive this message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking
each name.
e. Click the Add icon
.
5. To send the note, click Submit.
To clear all text in the note, click Reset.
To return to the original note without saving any changes, click <<Back.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 238
Sending New Messages
Users can send new notes to other system users.
1. From the top toolbar, in the upper right, click the number icon.
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: If you have unread messages in your inbox, this number will be displayed in
red and will reflect the number of unread messages.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 239
2. From below the list of messages, click New Message
3.
4.
5.
6.
From the Message Type drop down menu, select the desired category for this message.
In the Subject text box, type a title for the note.
In the Message text field, type the note.
To select people to receive this message,
a. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the list of people displayed in the Service Staff
section, use the Permission Groups drop down menu or the checkbox(es) to
specify criteria that users should meet in order to show up in the Service Staff
section.
HINT: This can make it easier for you to locate the people you want to receive
this message. To view all people again, you can click the Clear Filters button.
b. In the Service Staff section, select the names of all staff to receive the message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking
each name.
c.
7/3/2013
.
Click the Add icon
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 240
d. In the Administrative Contacts section, select the names of all system
administrators to receive this message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking
each name.
e. Click the Add icon
.
7. To send a copy of the message to the email address in each recipient’s profile as well as
to their Service Bridge inbox, select the Send an email in addition to the Inbox, if
available checkbox.
8. When finished, to send the note, click Submit.
To clear all text of the note, click Reset.
To return to the list of received notes without saving or sending, click <<Back.
Flagging Messages for Follow Up
You can flag messages to remind yourself to follow up, if needed. Messages with white flags are
not flagged for follow up; messages with red flags are.
1. From the top toolbar, in the upper right, click the number icon.
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: If you have unread messages in your inbox, this number will be displayed in
red and will reflect the number of unread messages.
2. To flag a single message, in the Follow-Up column, click the Flag icon
for the
message you want to flag.
3. To flag multiple messages,
a. Select the checkbox for each message to flag.
b. From the Select an action for checked messages drop down menu, select Flag
for Follow Up.
4. To clear a flag on a single message, in the Follow-Up column, click a red Flag icon
for the message to be de-flagged.
5. To clear a flag on multiple messages,
a. Select the checkbox for each message for which to clear the flag.
b. From the Select an action for checked messages drop down menu, select Clear
Flag.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 241
Deleting Messages
System users can delete messages that they no longer need from their inbox. You can delete
single or multiple messages.
1. From the top toolbar, in the upper right, click the number icon.
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: If you have unread messages in your inbox, this number will be displayed in
red and will reflect the number of unread messages.
2. To delete a single message,
a. For the appropriate message, click the Delete icon
.
A confirmation page appears.
b. To delete the message, click Yes.
To save the message, click No.
3. To delete multiple messages,
a. For the desired messages, select the checkboxes.
b. From the Select an action for checked messages drop down menu, select Delete
Checked.
7.3 Submitting Feedback to ImageTrend
Based on your permissions, you may have access to User Voice, which will allow you to submit ideas to
ImageTrend and vote on which existing suggestions you think are a good idea.
Guidelines
User Voice is an open user forum and we ask that you follow certain guidelines to help
ImageTrend and others respond to your feedback, as well as to maintain a community of respect
among other users of ImageTrend products.



7/3/2013
Be as clear and specific as possible.
Limit one suggestion per entry.
Only add new and unique ideas. If you see a similar idea but have additional suggestions,
add that as a comment to the original post.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE


P a g e | 242
Vote for suggestions based on your need or interest in the enhancement becoming a part of
the product.
Be respectful and courteous to others. If you disagree with an idea, offer constructive
suggestions or simply do not vote for it.
Submitting a New Idea
You can submit new ideas for ImageTrend products through User Voice.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. In the Enter your idea text box, type a name for your suggestion.
As you type, if any existing ideas use similar words to those you are typing, they appear
below the text box.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 243
NOTE: If no suggested ideas come up, skip to step 4.
3. If any of these suggested ideas are the same as the idea you were going to enter, vote
for them or add comments as needed with additional information.
HINT: For more information about voting or adding comments, please refer to the
Voting for an Idea or Commenting on an Idea sections in this manual.
OR
To add a new idea, click Post a new idea…
Additional fields appear to allow you to enter your idea.
4. OPTIONAL: To assign this idea to a category, from the Category drop down menu,
select the desired category.
NOTE: You do not need to assign a category, but it can make it easier for other users
to find your idea.
5. In the Describe your idea… text box, type any additional detail you want to include about
your idea.
6. OPTIONAL: To attach a file related to your idea,
a. In the Describe your idea… text box, click Attach a File.
b. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
c. Navigate to and select the desired file.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 244
d. Click Open.
The file is selected for attaching to your idea.
7. Click the number of votes you want to give for this idea.
NOTE: You must vote for your own idea at least once.
8. When finished entering your idea, click Post Idea..
The idea is entered onto the User Voice forum.
Voting for an Idea
If you see an idea in the User Voice forum that you like, you can vote for that idea up to 3 times.
Voting for an idea lets ImageTrend see how many people are interested in having a specific idea
or feature developed. While this does not guarantee that a specific feature will be developed at
any specific time, it does provide a way for you to easily give feedback on your Service Bridge
and its features.
Keep in mind that you have a total of 15 votes to use. If an idea is developed and so is removed
from the forum, you will get your votes back. In addition, you can always remove votes from an
idea if you run out of votes and would prefer to vote for a different idea.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. Find the idea that you want to vote for.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 245
3. On the left side, below the number of votes, click Vote.
A pop up appears with buttons to vote.
4. Click the number of votes you want to give to this idea.
Your votes are recorded.
5. To close the pop up, click anywhere on the page outside of it.
Removing Votes for an Idea
You can remove votes for an idea that you have votes for at any time. This may happen
most often if you’ve already used all your votes but want to vote for a new idea. You can
either remove all your votes for a particular idea or just use fewer votes.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 246
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. Locate the idea you want to remove votes from.
3. Click the Votes button.
HINT: Any idea you have votes for will display the number of times you voted
for it on the Vote button.
The voting pop up appears.
4. To enter a different number of votes, click the appropriate number of votes.
OR
To remove all your votes for this idea, click the Remove Votes link on the right
side of the pop up.
Your votes are adjusted.
5. To close the pop up, click anywhere on the page outside of it.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 247
Commenting on an Idea
At times, you may want to add a comment to an idea. This might be to expand on another
person’s idea that you agree with, ask a question or give an example of how your agency might
use this feature. You can add comments on to any existing idea.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. Find the idea that you want to add a comment for.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 248
3. Click the name of the idea or the associated Comments link.
The idea opens.
4. In the Add a comment… text box at the bottom of the page, type your comment.
5. Click Post comment.
The comment is added to the idea and will be visible to everyone looking at this idea in
User Voice.
7.4 Working with Documents
Documents in the Service Bridge allow you to set up links to files and URLs that can then be accessed by
anyone logged into the Service Bridge who can view the Documents section. You can choose to upload a
document or link to any URL.
Viewing Documents
The Service Bridge can contain documents and website links to be accessed and used as
resources.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. To view a particular resource, from the list of documents, click the name of the desired
document.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 249
Editing Document Information
Administrators can change the title of a document and the information that appears when a
system user rests his or her mouse above the title without clicking.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. From the list of documents, click the correct Edit button.
The Edit Upload Document screen appears.
4. To change the title, in the Short Description text box, type the new title.
5. To sync this document to the Documents section in Field Bridge, in the Sync to Field
Bridge section, select Yes.
6. To set this document up to display for easy selection in the Attachments window of a run
form, in the Display in Incident Attachments section, select Yes.
7. To save the information, click OK.
To return to the list of documents without saving the changes, click Back.
Adding New Documents
Administrators can upload new documents to the Service Bridge system for other system users to
access. Documents in this section can include protocols, reference guides or reports that all
system users should be able to access.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 250
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. From the (Service Name) Document Resource Center table, click Add Document.
4. In the Choose Document Type table, select the type of document you will be created.
NOTE: Type-In provides a text editor for administrators to type the document
information into. Upload allows administrators to place a copy of a document (such as a
Word or Excel file) in the system. URL provides a link that users can click to open a Web
page.
5. Click Submit.
6. For a type-in document,
a. In the Short Description text box, type the name of the document.
b. Click OK.
A text box appears.
c. Type your information into the text box.
d. When finished, click Save.
The type-in document is saved.
7. For uploaded documents,
a. In the Short Description text box, type the name of the document.
b. In the Path section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
c. Navigate to and select the file to upload.
d. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
e. To sync this document to the Documents section in Field Bridge, in the Sync to
Field Bridge section, select Yes.
f. To set this document up to display for easy selection in the Attachments window
of a run form, in the Display in Incident Attachments section, select Yes.
g. Click OK.
The document is uploaded.
8. For URLs,
a. In the Short Description text box, type the name of the link as it should appear on
the Documents page.
b. In the URL of website text box, type or paste the URL.
c. Click OK.
The URL is added to the document list.
Deleting Documents
Administrators with the correct permissions can remove documents from the document list.
1. From the top left, click My Service.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 251
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. From the list of documents, click the correct Edit button.
The Edit Upload Document screen appears.
4. Click Delete.
The document is deleted.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 252
CHAPTER 8
WORKING WITH THE QA/QI MODULE
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 253
8.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the QA/QI module, including details about setting up Service Bridge
to use the module and about performing QA/QI review within Service Bridge.
8.2 Overview of the QA/QI Module
The QA/QI module allows administrators to create random batches of incidents and assign them for
QA/QI review.
When you begin using the QA/QI module, you will need to perform some initial setup. Before you can
easily use the QA/QI module, you will want to:





Set appropriate permissions for security groups and system controls (system administrators only),
Create QA/QI groups for easily assigning teams of reviewers,
Flag staff members who can be assigned incidents to review,
Create QA/QI incident templates that show the information that is important for review, and
Create views to control what information you see when you are creating batches.
After you have completed setup, you will assign incidents to individuals by creating a batch, which will
assign certain individuals to review certain incidents. Reviewers will then be able to complete their review
from a queue of incidents assigned to them, and you will be able to monitor the status of each scheduled
review and incident.
8.3 Setting Permissions for the QA/QI Module
In order to get started using the QA/QI module, system administrators will need to set up the appropriate
permissions both for permission groups and for the system controls.
Setting Access to the QA/QI Module for Permission Groups
You will need to update permission levels for each permission group that should have access to
any part of the QA/QI module. Additional permission settings (such as access to patient
identifiable information or whether the user can only view their own runs) will also apply to users’
access to runs through the QA/QI module.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
The Admin tab appears.
2. Under Site Management > Users & Security, click Global Security.
The Global Security page appears.
HINT: If no sub-menu is available under Site Management or Users & Security, click
the appropriate header to expand the menu.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 254
3. For the first group you want to add permissions for, click the Security Objects icon
The Security Objects Permission window appears.
.
4. Scroll to the QA/QI section.
NOTE: This is near the bottom of the page.
5. In each section, select the appropriate level of access this group should have to each
page of the QA/QI module.
QA/QI
This setting controls access to the QA/QI module as a whole. If this is set to
Hidden, the users will not be able to see the link in the Modules tab.
QA/QI Dashboard
This setting controls access to the Dashboard page and link within the QA/QI
module.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 255
QA/QI Reviews
This setting controls access to the Reviews page and link within the QA/QI
module. If this is set to Read, users will be able to view the page and view
the QA/QI form information, but will not be able to fill it out. If this is set to
Change or above, users will be able to fill out the QA/QI form.
QA/QI Batches
This setting controls access to the Batches page and link within the QA/QI
module. If this is set to Change or above, users will be able to edit the
properties of a batch. If this is set to Add or above, users will be able to
create new batches.
QA/QI Review Assignments
This setting controls access to the ability to assign reviewers to incidents
within the QA/QI modules. If this is set to Change or above, users will be able
to assign new reviewers within a batch or from a QA/QI review form (based
on their access to these sections, as controlled in the QA/QI Reviews and
QA/QI Batches sections). If this is set to Read or below, users will not be
able to assign reviewers even if they have full rights to the QA/QI Batches or
QA/QI Reviews section.
Manage Views
This setting controls access to the Manage Views page and link, as well as
the ability to create views from a batch. If this is set to Add or above, users
will be able to add their own views from the Manage Views page or (based
on access to the QA/QI Batches section) from the Properties page within a
batch.
NOTE: The ability to edit and add each type of view is determined further
by other permissions settings. (For more information about view types,
please refer to the Creating Views for QA/QI Batches section of this manual.)
Everyone with the appropriate level of access in the Manage Views section
will be able to add and edit “my views.” In order to add or edit service views,
users must have access to the Setup tab. In order to add or edit system
views, users must have access to the Admin section. No one will be able to
edit the default view.
6. From the bottom of the page, click Save.
The permissions changes are saved.
Setting System Controls for QA/QI Questions
System controls for QA/QI questions determine how much control services have over QA/QI
questions. System administrators can determine whether or not services are able to create their
own QA/QI questions and also whether services can mark system-level questions that they will
not be using as inactive for their service.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
The Admin tab appears.
2. Under Product Settings > System Controls, click QA/QI Question Options.
The QA/QI Question Setting page appears.
HINT: If no sub-menu is available under Product Settings or QA/QI Question Options,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 256
click the appropriate header to expand the menu.
3. Select the appropriate option.
Yes
This option allows services to add and edit QA/QI questions for their own
service, but not to adjust system-level questions in any way.
No
This option does not allow services to create or edit QA/QI questions.
Services will be able to work with only system-level questions, but will not be
able to adjust the system-level questions in any way.
Full Control
This option allows services to add and edit QA/QI questions for their own
service and also to mark system-level questions as inactive for their service.
4. Click Submit.
The settings are saved.
8.4 Creating QA/QI Groups
Only system administrators can create QA/QI groups. Staff members from each service can then be
assigned to these groups, making it easy to assign incident review to the appropriate team. QA/QI groups
are a tool to organize reviewers so you can assign them more quickly, but do not affect the staff
members’ access or permissions in any way.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
The Admin tab appears.
2. Under Product Settings > QA/QI, click QA/QI Groups.
The QA/QI Groups page appears.
HINT: If no sub-menu is available under Product Settings or QA/QI, click the appropriate
header to expand the menu.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 257
3. Click Add Group.
The Edit Group modal window appears.
4. In the Name text box, type the name of the group.
5. Click Save.
The group is added and will be available to assign staff members to.
8.5 Flagging QA/QI Team Members
Before you can assign a staff member to review an incident in the QA/QI module, that staff member must
be flagged as a QA/QI reviewer.
1. If necessary, from the upper left, click My Service.
The Home page for your last selected agency appears.
2. Select the Staff tab.
A list of service staff appears.
3. Click the desired staff member’s name.
4. Click Edit.
The Demographics tab of the staff profile appears.
5. Click the Employment tab of the staff profile.
The Employment tab appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 258
6. In the QA/QI Reviewer section, select Yes.
The QA/QI Groups section appears.
7. From the Available scroll list, select any group(s) to assign this person to.
HINT: To select multiple options, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each desired
option.
8. Click the Add icon
.
9. Repeat steps 7–8 until the staff member is added to all desired QA/QI groups.
10. Click OK.
The changes to the staff member’s profile are saved and he or she is set up as a QA/QI reviewer.
8.6 Creating QA/QI Questions
These are the questions that reviewers will be answering as they review each incident. These questions
can be set up either at the service or the system level, based on the system permissions.
System administrators can set whether services can create their own QA/QI questions, whether only
system QA/QI questions can be used or whether system administrators can create their own QA/QI
questions AND de-activate system-level questions for their service that they do not want to use. Based on
this setting, service administrators may have more or less access to QA/QI questions. (This option was
explained in the Setting System Controls for QA/QI Questions section above.)
Creating QA/QI Questions for your Service
Service level QA/QI questions can only be used for your service’s templates. This option may not
be available to you based on system-level security settings. If this option is not available, you will
see a message on the QA/QI Questions page indicating this.
1. If necessary, from the upper left, click My Service.
The Home page for your last selected agency appears.
2. Select the Setup tab.
The Setup tab appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 259
3. Under Service Settings and Resources > Service, click QA/QI Questions.
A list of existing QA/QI questions appears.
4. Click Add QA/QI Question.
The Add Question modal window appears.
5. In the Question text box, type the question.
6. From the Type drop down menu, select the type of field reviewers will use to answer this
question.
For radio buttons, the Answer Choices field appears.
Radio Button
Radio buttons will provide a list of choices and the reviewer will be able to
select one to answer the question.
Textbox
Text boxes will provide a space where the reviewer can type an answer.
7. If applicable, to set up answers for a radio button question,
a. In the Answer Choices text box, type the first answer.
b. Click Add Choice.
The first answer is added.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired answer choices are applied.
8. In the Comments section, select whether reviewers should be able to add additional
comments when answering this question on a form.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 260
9. In the Active section, select whether this question should currently be active and
available to add to templates, or inactive and saved for reference.
10. When finished, click Save.
The question is added.
Creating QA/QI Questions for the System
System level QA/QI questions will be available for all services. Access to QA/QI questions is
based on system controls, so system administrators can determine whether service admins will
have the ability to create their own QA/QI questions and/or deactivate system questions for their
service.
1. If necessary, from the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings > QA/QI, click QA/QI Questions.
A list of existing QA/QI questions appears.
3. Click Add QA/QI Question.
The Add Question modal window appears.
4. In the Question text box, type the question.
5. From the Type drop down menu, select the type of field reviewers will use to answer this
question.
For radio buttons, the Answer Choices field appears.
Radio Button
Radio buttons will provide a list of choices and the reviewer will be able to
select one to answer the question.
Textbox
Text boxes will provide a space where the reviewer can type an answer.
6. If applicable, to set up answers for a radio button question,
a. In the Answer Choices text box, type the first answer.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 261
b. Click Add Choice.
The first answer is added.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired answer choices are applied.
7. In the Comments section, select whether reviewers should be able to add additional
comments when answering this question on a form.
8. In the Active section, select whether this question should currently be active and
available to add to templates, or inactive and saved for reference.
9. When finished, click Save.
The question is added.
8.7 Overview of QA/QI Templates
There are two types of QA/QI templates: QA/QI form templates and QA/QI report templates. Similar to
run form templates and PDF report templates, the QA/QI form templates can be filled out by reviewers
and the QA/QI report templates are PDF reports that can be generated and printed from QA/QI forms.
A QA/QI form template allows you to create a form that displays both the question that needs to be
answered (e.g., Was the correct date of service entered) and the field that the data is contained within
(e.g., the Incident Date field). When reviewers use this template, they will see the question as a field that
they can fill out, and the associated field from the incident form will display the information that is
recorded for the incident they are working with.
If you have previously worked in the Layout Editor to create run form or PDF templates, you will find that
creating a QA/QI template is very similar and uses many of the same steps. In order to create a QA/QI
template, you will need access to the Layout Editor in either the Setup section for a service or the Admin
section for system administrators.
As a service administrator, if you encounter report templates that you cannot edit, they may have been
set up on a system administrator level. In this case, you can create or request a copy of the template and
edit the copy to your desired specifications.
For more details about working with templates in the Layout Editor, please refer to the Working with the
Layout Editor chapter.
Creating a QA/QI Template: Process Overview
More details about each step are available throughout this guide.
1. Create QA/QI questions to be included in the template.
NOTE: If you are a service administrator, these may already be set up for you by the
system administrator.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 262
2. To create a QA/QI form template, create a template in the Layout Editor with a type of
QA/QI.
OR
To create a QA/QI report template, create a template in the PDF Layout Editor with a
type of PDF QA/QI Report.
NOTES:
You can either create a brand new template or copy an existing one.
As always when working with templates, it is a good idea to mark the new template as
inactive until it is done, so no one tries to work with it accidentally.
3. As needed, add, update and remove tabs and panels until you have the desired number
of pages and sections for your template.
NOTE: For forms, we recommend setting all panels to have a two column layout; one
column for the QA/QI question and one column for the associated run form field that
needs to be reviewed.
4. Add the appropriate QA/QI question controls to the form.
HINT: All QA/QI questions will have a control type of Service QA/QI Questions or
System QA/QI Questions, depending on whether they were set up at the service or the
system level.
5. Add the appropriate run form controls to the form.
NOTE: All run form controls will be read-only on QA/QI forms. These can be added at
the same time as the QA/QI question controls, allowing reviewers to see the appropriate
incident information next to the review questions.
8.8 Creating Views for QA/QI Batches
Batch views allow you to create a set of criteria that incidents must meet in order to be displayed when
that view is applied to a batch, and also to customize which columns you see. You can create and save
your own custom views that you can apply at any time when you’re working with the QA/QI batches.
There are four different types of batch views: system views, service views, my views and the default view.
Your ability to create and edit views is based on permissions. Users will only be able to create and edit
batch views if they have the correct level of access, and may be able to view only certain types of views
based on their permissions.
System views are visible to everyone, although only system administrators will be able to edit them.
Service views are set up for a specific service by service administrators. Only service administrators will
be able to edit these views, although anyone in that service can view them.
My views are created by you and can be edited by you at any time. Only you will be able to use and edit
your views.
The default view is a basic view for batches that will be available as soon as you start using the QA/QI
module, whether or not any custom views are set up for your system or service. You will not be able to
edit this view, although you can use it to view or create batches at any time.
1. If necessary, in the upper left, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select QA/QI.
The Dashboard page for the QA/QI module appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 263
3. Select the Batch Views link.
4. Click Add Batch View.
The View Details modal window appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the name for this view.
NOTE: This name is what you will see and select from the View drop down menu when you
want to use this view in a batch.
6. In the Description text box, type any additional descriptive details you want to save with this view.
NOTE: This description will only be visible if someone opens this view for editing.
7. To set up an additional column of information to display on the list of incidents for batches where
this view is used,
a. Click Add Column.
A new line appears.
b. From the Column drop down menu, select the field that you want to appear for this
column.
c. OPTIONAL: To change the text that will appear in the column header, in the Header text
box, type the desired header.
d. From the Align drop down menu, select the way you want the text in this column aligned.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 264
e. If you want to change the formatting for the way the information appears, from the Format
drop down menu, select the desired formatting.
f.
HINT: This option will not be available for all columns. It will most commonly be used
for dates; you could choose to display the date as 3/21/2013 or March 21, 2013.
If you have multiple columns, to move this one up or down in the order of where it will
appear on the page, click the Up or Down button, as needed.
HINT: If you drag the column to a new position, make sure that you do not click within
a field; clicking within a field will open that field for editing rather than selecting the field to
move.
OR
Click within the row for a column and drag it to the desired position in the list.
8. To add additional filters to the page that you can use for advanced searches,
a. In the Filters section, from the Available scroll list, select the first filter to add.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired filters are added.
9. To set up criteria that will narrow down the incidents listed on the page, in the Criteria section,
a. To group multiple pieces of criteria, from the first drop down menu, select the opening
parenthesis.
HINTS:
You generally only need to use parentheses if you will be creating multiple criteria where
some are linked together with And (e.g., criteria A AND criteria B must be met) and
others are linked together with Or (e.g., criteria C OR criteria D must be met).
It may be easier for you to add parentheses at the end, once you have set up all your
criteria already.
If you want to enter multiple criteria, think of them like a math equation. Criteria will be
applied in order unless parentheses are applied to group some of them together.
b. From the Field drop down menu, select which field the criteria will be examining (e.g.,
Status).
c. From the Operator drop down menu, select what is required of the selected value for the
criteria to be met (e.g., is, is before, begins with).
d. From the Value drop down menu, select the option that the field should be compared
against (e.g., In Progress).
The first criteria is complete.
e. To add an additional piece of criteria, click the Add icon .
f. To determine how this piece of criteria relates to the others, from the And/Or drop down
menu, select And (i.e., this all pieces of criteria must be met for a record to display) or Or
(i.e., one of the pieces of criteria must be met for a record to display).
NOTE: If using parenthesis to group criteria, note that the And and Or options will only
be applied within the parentheses. If the option is applied to a single piece of criteria
outside a group, it will act upon the individual piece of criteria and the group as a whole.
g. Repeat steps a–f until all desired criteria are set.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 265
h. When finished with a group, from the last drop down menu, select the closed parenthesis.
10. When finished with all criteria, click Save.
The Create View For window appears.
11. From the drop down menu, select the type of view you are creating.
NOTE: Depending on your permissions, you may not be able to create all these types of
views.
My View
A view that is saved as a My View will be available only for you. You can use this
kind of view to view the incident and you will be able to edit it at any time, but no one
else will be able to access it.
Service Views
Service views are available for the service the view is created in and can only be
created or edited by individuals with service administrator-level permissions. All other
users will be able to apply service views when looking at the incident list for that
service but will not be able to make any changes.
System Views
System views are available for all services in the system and can only be created or
edited by individuals with system administrator-level permissions. All other users will
be able to apply system views when looking at the incident list but will not be able to
make any changes.
12. Click Save.
The new view is created.
8.9 QA/QI Process Overview
After you have completed setup, you will assign incidents to individuals by creating a batch, which will
assign certain individuals to review certain incidents based on their group.
Reviewers will then be able to complete their review from a queue of incidents assigned to them, and you
will be able to monitor the status of each scheduled review and incident.
8.10 Configuring your Dashboard
The Dashboard is the page you will see when you first open the QA/QI module. It gives you a snapshot of
some of important information in your system. You can add “widgets” to the page to give you quick
access to the information you want to see and access most often.
The Dashboard can be configured differently for every user so that each person can see the information
that is most important to him or her.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 266
1. Under the Modules tab, click QA/QI
The QA/QI module opens with the Dashboard tab displayed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To view a list of all widgets that can be displayed, from the right side, click Display Preferences.
From the list that appears, to display a particular widget, select the corresponding checkbox.
To hide a widget that is currently displayed, deselect the corresponding checkbox.
When you are satisfied with the selected widgets to display on the Dashboard, click Save.
When finished, to hide the list, click Display Preferences again.
To move widgets, hover the mouse directly above the widget’s title until it becomes a four-sided
arrow
.
8. Click and drag the widget to its new place on the page; all other widgets will automatically move
to accommodate the new layout.
8.11 Overview of Batches
A batch is a collection of incidents that have been assigned to people for review within a certain period of
time. Each batch record contains a variety of information about the batch and the incidents to be
reviewed.
The header of the batch includes:




7/3/2013
The name and description that were set up when the batch was created
The dates between which the review should take place
The percentage of incidents meeting the criteria for the batch that have been assigned to
reviewers
The percentage of assigned incidents for which the QA/QI status is set to Complete for this batch.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 267
Each batch has three tabs, each of which contains different information.
The Properties tab contains the settings of the batch including:




The name and description,
The QA/QI template used for review,
The dates that incidents should be reviewed for the batch, and
Criteria for finding incidents to be reviewed in the batch.
The Incidents tab displays a list of all incidents that meet the criteria defined in the Properties tab,
(including criteria that are part of the selected view) and details about which incidents have been
assigned.
NOTE: Incidents that have already been assigned for this batch will have an icon in the Assignments
column for each person who was assigned to review the incident. Hovering over the Assignment icons
will display the names of the people who were assigned.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 268
The Assignments tab displays a list of all assigned incidents for this batch. No incidents meeting your
criteria that were not assigned will appear in this tab.
NOTE: An icon will be displayed in the Assignments column for each person who was assigned to
review the incident. Hovering over the Assignment icons will display the names of the people who were
assigned.
Each incident has a QA/QI status for the batch, which indicates its progress. Reviewers can set the status
of the incident for the batch and it will be displayed in the Review Status column on the Incidents and the
Assignments tabs. Once a reviewer sets the QA/QI status to Complete, the Percent Completed statistic in
the header will be updated.
8.12 Creating a Batch
You can create a batch each time you want to assign reviewers for specific incidents.
1. If necessary, in the upper left, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select QA/QI.
The Dashboard page for the QA/QI module appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 269
3. Click the Batches link.
A list of existing batches appears.
4. Click Add New Batch.
The Properties step of the New Batch page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type a name for the batch.
HINT: If is useful to have a name that you can recognize later if you want to check on the
progress of reviews.
6. From the Template drop down menu, select the QA/QI template that reviewers should use to
review each incident.
7. In the first Review Date text box, type the first date that this batch should be available for QA/QI
review.
OR
To select a date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
OR
To enter the current date, click the Today link.
7/3/2013
and select the desired date.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 270
8. In the second Review Date text box, type the date that QA/QI review should be finished.
OR
To select a date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired date.
OR
To enter the current date, click the Today link.
9. In the Description text box, type any additional details that can be viewed by anyone who views
this batch.
10. From the Batch View drop down menu, select the view that you want to select incidents from to
be included in this batch.
NOTE: If you have the appropriate permissions, you can also click the Add View link to add a
new view to use for this batch.
11. To set up search criteria to locate incidents to include in this batch, enter your search criteria in
the remaining fields on the page.
HINT: These criteria will build the list of incidents from which you can randomly select
incidents; all incidents that meet these criteria will not be automatically included.
12. Click Save And Continue.
The Incidents page appears, with a list of all incidents that met the criteria for the batch and the
selected view.
13. From the Per Page drop down menu at the top or the bottom of the page, select the number of
incidents you want to assign people to review.
The page is refreshed to display that many incidents.
14. To select all the incidents on the page, select the checkbox in the header row.
OR
To select only certain incidents, select those checkboxes.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 271
15. To assign the selected incidents to reviewers, from the bottom of the page, click Assign.
The Assign Reviewers modal window appears.
16. From the Group drop down menu, select the group of reviewers who should be assigned to this
batch.
The names in the Available scroll list are narrowed down to only those included in that group.
17. To add all people currently displayed in the Available scroll list, select the Add All icon
OR
To add only certain people,
a. In the Available scroll list, select the people to add.
.
HINT: To select multiple names at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key while
clicking each desired name.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–c until all desired reviewers are added.
18. When finished adding all reviewers to the batch, click Save.
You are brought to the Assignments page, with a list of each incident included in this batch and
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 272
icons in the Assignments column for each assigned reviewer.
19. OPTIONAL: If you want to assign different people to additional incidents for this batch,
a. Click the 2. Incidents link.
b. Repeat steps 13–18.
8.13 Setting Up Automated Batches
You can set the system up to create batches automatically each day based on settings that you configure
for your agency. If you choose to create batches automatically, the system will create new a new batch
daily, select a random number or percentage of incidents for review and assign reviewers from a list that
you set up.
You can set the system to create multiple batches automatically, each based on a different group of
settings. Each group of settings that you create that will automatically create batches is called an
automation template.
1. If necessary, in the upper left, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select QA/QI.
The Dashboard page for the QA/QI module appears.
3. Click the Automation link.
A list of existing automation templates appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 273
4. Click Add Automation Template.
The Batch Automation Template page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the name for this template and all batches created from the template.
NOTE: Each batch created from this template will also contain the date (and, if applicable,
time) that the batch was created to differentiate between batches created from this template.
6. From the Template drop down menu, select the QA/QI form that should be used when reviewers
review incidents in this batch.
7. OPTIONAL: In the Description text box, type any additional details that can be viewed by anyone
who views this batch.
8. In the Status drop down menu, select whether this template should be active or inactive.
HINT: If you mark this template as active, the system will automatically begin creating daily
batches from it once you have saved it and once the start date and time (set up in the next steps)
are reached. If you mark it as inactive, no batches will be automatically created until you mark it
as active, even if the start date is in the past.
9. In the Start Date text box, type the first date that a batch should be created.
OR
To select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired date.
OR
To enter the current date, click the Today link.
10. From the Automation Start Time drop down menus, select the time that the batches should be
automatically created.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 274
HINTS:
The time should be set using a 24-hour clock.
The first batch will not be created until the selected time on or after the start date that you
specified. If you are setting up a batch to begin immediately (e.g., the batch is active and the start
date is set to today’s date) and you set the time to before the current time (e.g., it is 8 a.m. and
you set the batch to run at 6 a.m.), the batch will not run until the next day.
11. In the Batch Span section, enter the amount of time that you want incidents to be pulled from for
each batch (e.g., if you only want incidents for the previous day in each batch, enter 1 day).
12. To automatically mark the previous day’s batch as inactive as soon as the new one is created,
ensure that the Auto Inactivate Batch checkbox is selected.
13. In the Assignment Goal section, enter either the desired percentage of all incidents matching your
criteria or the desired number of incidents matching your criteria that need to be included in each
batch.
NOTE: You will set up the criteria that incidents must meet in order to be included in the batch
in following steps.
14. In the Reviewer Per Incident text box, type the number of individuals that should be assigned to
review each incident included in the batch.
15. To set the list of individuals who can be assigned to the incidents in the batches created from this
template,
NOTE: The system will randomly assign the selected number of reviewers to each incident in
each batch created from this template; this allows you to select which reviewers should be
assigned for the batches based on this template.
a. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the list of reviewers in the Available list for easier selection,
from the Group Filter drop down menu, select the group of reviewers you want to work
with.
The list of reviewers in the Available list is filtered to show only those in the selected
group.
b. In the Reviewers section, in the Available scroll list, select the reviewer(s) that should be
available for assignment.
HINT: To add multiple names at once, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each
desired name.
c. Click the Add icon
.
d. Repeat steps a–c until all desired reviewers are added.
16. From the Batch View drop down menu, select the view that you want to select incidents from to
be included in this batch.
NOTE: If you have the appropriate permissions, you can also click the Add Batch View link to
add a new view to use for this batch.
17. To set up search criteria to locate incidents to include in this batch, enter your search criteria in
the remaining fields on the page.
HINT: These criteria will build the list of incidents from which you can randomly select
incidents; all incidents that meet these criteria will not be automatically included.
18. Click Save.
The template is created and batches will be automatically created based on the start date and
time.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 275
8.14 Reviewing an Incident
Reviewers can open incidents to review either from a widget on the Dashboard tab of the QA/QI module
or from the Reviews tab. The Reviews tab will contain a full list of reviews that are assigned to this
reviewer, while most Dashboard widgets will display an abbreviated list.
1. From the Dashboard or the Reviews page, click any of the linked text to open the incident you
need to review.
2. If prompted, enter your reason for viewing the incident and click Submit.
The QA/QI form for this incident appears.
HINT: Depending on your service’s audit tracking settings, you may or may not be prompted
to enter a reason for viewing this incident.
3. Using the editable fields, fill out the review form.
NOTE: The forms that you need to fill out will be editable; incident information will be readonly.
4. When you are finished, click Save.
Your changes to the form are saved.
NOTE: After the first time you save the form, the QA/QI status of this incident will be updated
to In Progress if it has not already been updated.
8.15 Sending a QA/QI Note
QA/QI notes can be sent from your QA/QI review forms. QA/QI notes will be sent through the Inbox for
your system.
1. From the Dashboard or the Reviews page, click any of the linked text to open the incident you
need to review.
2. If prompted, enter your reason for viewing the incident and click Submit.
The QA/QI form for this incident appears.
HINT: Depending on your service’s settings, you may or may not be prompted to enter a
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 276
reason for viewing this incident.
3. From the QA/QI form toolbar, click Actions and Add QA/QI Note.
The QA/QI Notes window appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
4. Click the New Message icon
A blank message appears.
P a g e | 277
.
5. From the Message Type drop down menu, select the category for this message.
6. In the Subject text box, type a name for the message.
7. In the Message text box, type the body of the note.
NOTE: Information must be typed in the Message text box before the message can be sent.
8. In the Notify section, to add additional staff members who should receive this message in their
inbox,
NOTE:
Staff for the service will be listed in the Service Staff scroll list. You can use the fields in the Filters
section to narrow down which staff should be displayed in the Service Staff section.
System administrators will be listed in the Administrative Contacts section.
Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by pressing and holding Ctrl while
clicking each name.
A link to the incident report will also be included in the message.
a. To add staff from the service associated with this run form,
i. From the Available scroll list for the Service Staff section, select the staff
members
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by pressing
and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
b. To add all staff from this service who are in a specific permission group,
i. From the Available scroll list in the Permission Groups section, select the desired
permission group.
c.
7/3/2013
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple permission groups can be selected from this section by
pressing and holding Ctrl while clicking each group name.
To include an administrative contact for the system in this message,
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 278
i. From the Available scroll list in the Administrative Contacts section, select the
desired name.
ii. Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple names can be selected from this section by pressing and
holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
9. To send emails with the message to all selected staff at the email address listed in their profile,
select the Send an email in addition to the Inbox, if available checkbox.
10. To post the note, click Submit.
8.16 Updating the QA/QI Status of the Incident
Each incident has a QA/QI status for each batch of reviews that it is included in. This status reflects its
progress in being reviewed by all reviewers who are assigned to review it for a specific batch, so if you
update the status it will be updated for all reviewers and for the administrators tracking the progress of
reviews.
NOTE: The status of the QA/QI status will automatically be updated to In Progress when you enter an
answer to one or more questions and save the form.
1. From the Dashboard or the Reviews page, click any of the linked text to open the incident you
need to review.
2. If prompted, enter your reason for viewing the incident and click Submit.
The QA/QI form for this incident appears.
HINT: Depending on your service’s settings, you may or may not be prompted to enter a
reason for viewing this incident.
3. From the QA/QI Batch Review drop down menu, select the status that should be applied to this
incident for this batch.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 279
The status is updated.
NOTE: The overall QA/QI status of the incident for ALL batches it is included in will be
indicated by a flag in the upper right. Hovering over this flag will display the incident’s status for
each batch of reviews it is included in.
8.17 Assigning Review to Another Staff Member
If you have the ability to assign reviewers, you can assign a new reviewer to an incident for the batch you
are working with.
1. From the Dashboard or the Reviews page, click any of the linked text to open the incident you
need to review.
2. If prompted, enter your reason for viewing the incident and click Submit.
The QA/QI form for this incident appears.
HINT: Depending on your service’s audit tracking settings, you may or may not be prompted
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 280
to enter a reason for viewing this incident.
3. From the QA/QI form toolbar, click Actions > Assign for QA/QI.
The Assign Reviewers modal window appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 281
4. OPTIONAL: From the Group drop down menu, select the group containing the reviewer(s) you
want to add to this batch.
The names in the Available scroll list are narrowed down to only those included in that group.
5. To add all people currently displayed in the Available scroll list, select the Add All icon
OR
To add only certain people,
a. In the Available scroll list, select the people to add.
.
HINT: To select multiple names at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key while
clicking each desired name.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–c until all desired reviewers are added.
6. Click Save.
The new reviewers are added.
8.18 Un-Assigning Reviewers for an Incident
Administrators can un-assign any reviewers from a specific incident by editing the batch.
1. If necessary, in the upper left, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select QA/QI.
The Dashboard page for the QA/QI module appears.
3. Click the Batches link.
A list of existing batches appears.
4. Click the name of the batch for which you want to un-assign reviewers.
The batch opens with the Assignments page displayed by default.
5. Select the checkbox for the incident you want to un-assign reviewers for.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 282
6. Click Unassign.
The Unassign Reviewers modal window appears.
7. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the users currently displayed in the Users list by group, from the
Group drop down menu, select the desired group.
8. Select the user(s) you want to un-assign.
HINT: To select multiple names, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each name.
9. Click Unassign.
The selected reviewers are unassigned and the Unassign Reviewers modal window closes.
8.19 Changing the Status of Multiple Batches
You can quickly activate or deactivate multiple batches at the same time.
1. If necessary, in the upper left, click My Service.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select QA/QI.
The Dashboard page for the QA/QI module appears.
3. Click the Batches link.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 283
A list of existing batches appears.
4. Select the checkbox(es) for each batch you want to change the status for.
HINT: All the batches you select will be set to the same status. To set other batches to a
different status, you will need to repeat these steps.
5. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu in the lower left, select Activate Batches or Inactivate
Batches, as appropriate.
The status of the selected batches is updated.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 284
CHAPTER 9
USING THE DATA EXCHANGE
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 285
9.1 Chapter Overview
Data exchange is customized individually for each of ImageTrend’s clients. This chapter explains the
basic capabilities of the Data Exchange feature.
9.2 Introduction to Data Exchange
The Service Bridge allows data exchange based on the client’s needs, which lets information be sent
between programs for various purposes. This can include sending information to a state or national
database, sending information to a billing company or importing a list of staff and their contact
information. Since the needed types of data exchange are customized for each client, clients should
contact ImageTrend for instructions on their particular settings or to set up additional exchanges.
ImageTrend’s EMS Service Bridge provides a data exchanges to multiple formats and for multiple
integrations, including:
Agencies:
 GAPCR 2000
 NEMSIS
 NHTSA
 NISE
Billing Integration:
 Accordis
 Ortivus Amazon Sweet Soft
 Quadax
 Zoll RescueNet (also known as Sanitaas)
CAD Integration:
 TriTech
 Motorola PrinTrack
 Digitech
 FirstWatch Logistics
Trauma Integration:
 Collector
Vendors:
 CodeRed
 Firehouse Import Export
 Zoll Data Systems
 Sansio (Scanhealth)
Other Formats:
 ODBC
 Microsoft Access
 CSV
 Flat file formats
 XML
9.3 Creating a NEMSIS Export XML
You can generate an XML file to export to NEMSIS using the NEMSIS export tool in the Service Bridge.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 286
1. From the upper left, click Data Exchange.
The Data Exchange page appears.
2. From the left menu, click NEMSIS Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Click Generate Events XML.
The NEMSIS Export page appears.
4. From the Exported drop down menu, select whether you want to include runs that have been
previously exported.
HINT: To include only runs that have not previously been exported, select No.
5. From the Strictly NEMSIS Compliant drop down menu, select whether this file should be strictly
NEMSIS compliant.
6. Use the remaining fields to enter any additional criteria that runs must meet in order to be
included in this export.
7. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Search.
A list of all runs meeting your criteria appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 287
8. If there are several pages of incidents, to view them all, select All from the Display drop down
menu.
9. To select all incidents to be included in the export, select the checkbox in the header row.
NOTE: If there are multiple pages of incidents, only the incidents on this page will be selected.
OR
To select individual runs, select the checkbox for each one to include.
10. Click Export.
A confirmation page appears with information about the pending export.
NOTE: For more information about a specific configuration option, hover over the question
mark icon.
11. To automatically lock calls to prevent further editing once they are posted, in the Lock Calls Upon
Export section, select Yes.
12. To automatically update the status of the run to reflect this posting and to list it in the audit
tracking report, in the Update Status Upon Export section, select Yes.
13. When ready, click Continue.
The Search Results page appears with the XML file you have generated.
14. To download the file, click the Download icon
and use the dialog box to save or open the file.
15. To view the incidents included in this file, click the Report icon
.
9.4 Posting from a Service Bridge to the State Bridge
You can post information from your Service Bridge to the State Bridge as needed. Before you can
complete this process, some additional administrative setup is needed. Please contact your site
administrator or ImageTrend for assistance with this initial setup.
1. From the upper left, click Data Exchange.
The Data Exchange page appears.
2. From the left menu, click Data Posting.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 288
3. Click Search.
The Data Posting Search page appears, displaying details about your service and the data
posting to the state system.
NOTE: If there is no information in the Post To drop down menu, the initial setup steps have
not been completed. Please contact your site administrator or ImageTrend for assistance.
4. Ensure that the information about the posting service (Service drop down menu) and the system
being posted to (Post To drop down menu) is correct.
5. Use the remaining fields to set up any criteria to locate the runs to post to the State Bridge.
HINTS:
You may want to use these fields to ensure that you are posting runs that have not previously
been posted, have a validity score of 100% or are marked as completed.
Be sure to leave the Incident State field blank to ensure you can see all runs. If this field is filled
in, any runs that do not have an incident address (such as cancelled calls) will not be displayed.
6. Click Search.
A list of all runs matching your criteria appears.
NOTE: The total number of runs displayed here that can be posted to the State Bridge is
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 289
listed in the top right.
7. To view all runs on one page, click the Display All button.
8. To select all runs on the page, click the Check All button.
OR
To only select certain runs to post, select the checkbox for each run.
9. To send the selected runs to the State Bridge, click Post.
A summary page appears.
10. Click Continue.
When the data posting process is complete, a notification appears, informing you if all runs were
successfully posted.
NOTE: The number of incidents that can be posted at a single time depends on your Internet
connection speed, server activity and time of day. If the export times out, you may want to try it
again with a smaller number of incidents.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 290
CHAPTER 10
WORKING WITH THE REPORT WRITER
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 291
10.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains the capabilities of the Report Writer, the types of reports that can be created and
how to create and customize reports.
10.2 Summary of Report Writer
The Report Writer allows users to dynamically create, display, and save transactional (ad hoc) report
templates. This gives the user the power to find and display the data required without relying on static
reports that may not include current data needs. The Report Writer encompasses a single reporting tool
that gives the user complete control of data output and display.
You can choose from multiple ways to display your report, from familiar text-based reports to pie charts
and mapping. You can report on multiple fields within several categories and data sets, allowing you to
create exactly the report you want. Database search criteria can be selected based on each field allowing
users to define exactly what they need. User defined headers, sorting, and grouping give users the ability
to display search results using a number of options. Reports can be saved for later review or editing and
also as a PDF document and CSV file (which can be opened and manipulated in a spreadsheet program
such as Microsoft Excel).
In addition, standard reports and charts are available for quick report creation. All reports are listed in the
left menu of Report Writer, organized by category.
10.3 Types of Reports
Report Writer provides several different types of reports for differing needs. Each report listed in the left
menu will display an icon to indicate which type of report it is.
Transactional Reports
While some transactional reports have a default setup of fields to display in a particular order,
transactional reports can be entirely configured. Users can change which fields display,
define additional criteria for each of those fields (e.g., display only records within a certain
postal code) and change the order in which records appear. In addition, users can create
transactional reports completely on their own with no pre-defined fields or setup.
Standard Reports
Standard reports are pre-created with all fields and display options defined for the user.
Within the fields, users can define additional criteria (e.g., requesting information about a
particular unit or type of service). These reports provide fewer configuration options and allow
a ready-made report for common data requests.
10.4 Requesting Standard Reports and Charts
While several standard reports are available from the All Reports section, many additional reports can be
found in Report Writer. These reports have pre-defined fields, although users can further define the
criteria for each of those fields. For example, if the staff field is set to display, users can display data only
for a particular staff member.
1. From the top left, click Report Writer 2.0.
HINT: If your system has many modules, the Report Writer 2.0 link may be under the More
link in the upper left.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 292
The Report Writer page appears.
2. If necessary, to expand a category of reports, in the All Reports section, click the category.
HINT: Categories have a folder icon to their left. Reports have an icon indicating the type of
report.
NOTE: Clicking the category once will expand it to show all reports. Clicking it again will hide
the reports under the category.
3. To begin a report creation, click the name of the desired report.
4. Using the provided fields, select any further defining criteria for each field.
NOTE: Depending on the permissions set for this report, you may be able to set more or
fewer options to further define the information in the report. These options will be available from
each of the links at the top of the page (e.g., Columns, Grouping) and will work in the same way
that these options work when creating a transactional report.
5. Click Generate Report.
If filters have been selected, the Filter your results page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 293
NOTE: These filters are based on the fields selected in the Filters options.
6. From each of the filters, select the criteria that the results displayed should or should not match.
7. Click Generate.
The report appears.
10.5 Additional Standard Report Options
Standard reports allow users to print the report, export the report to a PDF or spreadsheet (.csv) file, or
add the report to a My Reports category for quick access.
Adding Favorite Reports
Report Writer provides a My Reports category that can be configured for each user. Users may
add reports to this category for easy access. Reports added to My Reports will also remain in
their original categories.
1. Open and view the desired standard report.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 294
2. Click the Actions tab and select Add to My Reports.
The Details page appears.
3. OPTIONAL: In the Name text box, type a new name for this saved report.
HINT: The new name will only appear on the report in your My Reports section, and
will not affect the standard report for any other user.
4. OPTIONAL: In the Description text box, type any additional information about this report.
HINT: The new description will only appear on the report in your My Reports section,
and will not affect the standard report for any other user.
5. To add the report to the My Reports category, click Save.
The report appears in the My Reports section.
Exporting Reports
You can export a copy of this report to multiple types of files. This allows you to save a copy of
this report with the current data or to print the report in one of these formats. For a professional
looking report, it is recommended to export the report to PDF before printing.
1. Open and view the desired standard report.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 295
2. Click Export.
The Export Options page appears.
3. To export the report to any format, click the desired format.
The file opens a new window.
HINT: Some file types have some limitations on the abilities to export. For example,
you cannot export to PDF if there are more than 1000 records in a report. Also, Microsoft
Word (Doc) files and HTML pages will only export the first page of the report.
10.6 Working with Transactional Reports
Creating a transactional report can be a simple or a detailed procedure, depending on the complexity of
the report you want to create. Before beginning a transactional report, you should begin by considering
each of the elements you will need to work with to create the report.
Data Set
Each report must belong to a data set, which is a category of fields. This will help with
organization and will determine the type of information contained within the report. Selecting
a data set will determine what fields are available for your use in this report.
Columns
Within a category, you can select pieces of information to be included in each column of the
report. These pieces of information are based on the fields filled out throughout the
application (e.g., the fields within a run report or a staff record). Each piece of information that
should be examined or used as a criterion should be included for the report.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 296
Display
On this page, users can set the display order of fields, select numeric fields to display
averages, totals (previously called sums), the minimum value, maximum value and total
number of records, determine the alignment of the field display and pre-define a date range
for date fields.
HINT: To change the order of a field, only change the field you want moved; Report Writer
will automatically update the order of the rest of the fields.
Grouping
If the records should be clustered according to a certain type of information (e.g., all run
reports by service), you will need to set up grouping rules. You have the option to group
multiple times (e.g., within each service, you could group all run reports by the chief
complaint) for further organization. Each group can be sorted in ascending or descending
order (e.g., if all run reports are organized by service, the services can be sorted
alphabetically).
Sorting
If the records should be sorted alphabetically or numerically, you can choose to sort the
records based on the results in each column (e.g., sorting staff alphabetically by last name).
When used with grouping, you can only sort fields that have not been grouped. If grouping is
also used, sorting will be applied after grouping. In this case, after all grouping has been
performed and each group has been sorted according to their criteria, the records within each
group will be sorted according to the criteria selected here.
Criteria and Filtering
Both criteria and filtering options are included in the Criteria tab. Criteria will allow you to
determine limits on the data that will be displayed every time this report is displayed. For
example, in a report that displayed all incidents for a certain service, criteria would be used to
dictate that only records where the Service field contained the desired service name should
be included.
Filters allow you to specify a new value for a criterion each time the report is run. For
example, you could use filters to specify the dates that the report examines, so that each time
the report is run, users can specify which dates they want to look at.
Criteria and filters are important for narrowing the number of results displayed. If your
organization has hundreds or thousands of records in the system, this is very important to
limit the length of the report and prevent the system from timing out when trying to retrieve a
large number of records.
Preferences and Formatting
If you want to create a report with a custom look, you can change the headers and footers, as
well as the colors for the text, each row, and the rows beginning each group of data. These
options are available from the Actions tab, as well as many other report options.
Report Access
You can manage access to a report you create if desired. This can include saving the report,
setting who can view or edit it, scheduling the report to run at a specific interval or exporting
the report. These options are available from the Actions tab, as well as many other report
options.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 297
Step One: Selecting a Data Set
1. From the left menu, click Create a Report.
The Create a Report page appears.
2. In the Create a Transactional Report section, click the desired data set.
The Columns page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 298
Step Two: Selecting Columns
Each column represents a piece of information that will be displayed on the report. For most
transactional reports, these pieces of information will be displayed in a column in a text-based
report.
1. OPTIONAL: To locate a specific field, in the Search text box, begin typing the name of
the field.
As you type, the fields displayed in the Available scroll box will be narrowed down to
display only options matching your entry.
2. From the Available scroll box, select the fields to be displayed on the report.
HINTS:
To select multiple fields, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the name of each field.
To search for specific columns, type in the Search text box. After you have typed at least
three characters, fields matching your entry will appear in the Available scroll list.
3. Click Add
.
4. To change the order in which the columns appear, highlight each field to move and use
the Up and Down buttons.
5. When finished, click Continue.
Changing the Column View (Optional)
If desired, you can select the pieces of information to be displayed from a different list of
fields, sorted by the type of field. This view may be more familiar to you if you used the
Report Writer in previous versions of Service Bridge.
1. From the right side of the screen, click Change View.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 299
An alternate Columns view appears.
2. Select the checkbox(es) for each piece of information to display.
3. When finished, click Continue.
The Display tab appears.
Step Three: Setting Display Options (Optional)
If you would like to change the order of the fields or the labels, alignment or format of the
information, you will need to set up display options.
1. To change the order of the fields, in the Order text boxes, type the numbers
corresponding to the order in which the fields should appear.
HINT: You need to change only the numbers for the fields you want moved; all other
fields will be updated automatically.
2. To change the header that will appear for this information on the report, in the Label text
boxes, type the text to appear.
3. To change the way that the data will be displayed (if possible), from the Format drop
down menus, select the desired format.
4. To change the alignment of the information within its column on the report, from the
Alignment drop down menus, select the desired alignment.
5. For certain numeric values, to display mathematical information (e.g., the total number of
records or the average value), select the desired checkbox(es).
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 300
Min.
This will display the minimum numeric value within the grouped results.
Max.
This will display the maximum numeric value within the grouped results.
Average
This will display the mean value of the numbers in all rows within the
grouping.
Count
This will count the total number of rows listed within the grouping.
Total
This is the Sum field that was in the previous Report Writer and will display
the sum of the numbers in all rows within the grouping.
6. When all changes are made, click Continue.
The Grouping page appears.
Step Four: Setting Grouping Rules (Optional)
If you would like to place all records with similar values in a specific column together (e.g., all runs
from each service listed together), you will need to set grouping rules. In addition, all calculations
will be performed on groups. For instance, if you choose to display a minimum value or an
average from a column, the report will display a minimum value and average for each group.
1. OPTIONAL: To locate a specific field, in the Search text box, begin typing the name of
the field.
As you type, the fields displayed in the Available scroll box will be narrowed down to
display only options matching your entry.
2. To indicate which field to group by (e.g., if grouping all runs from each service, the
Service Name field), from the Available scroll box, select the field.
3. Click Add
7/3/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 301
4. If you would like to group by multiple fields, repeat steps 1–2 until all desired fields are
added.
5. OPTIONAL: If multiple fields are selected for grouping, select the fields and use the Up
and Down buttons to indicate which grouping should be done first.
HINT: Fields that are listed first will be the primary grouping rules. Each field following
will be grouped within the first field.
EXAMPLE: If the first field groups runs by zip code, the second field could group runs by
the service. Run reports would be clustered into a zip code group, inside of which they
would be listed by service.
6. To select whether the groups will be listed in ascending (e.g., 1–10 or a–z) order or
descending (e.g., 10–1 or z–a) order, select each group and click the Asc or Desc
buttons.
7. When finished, click Continue.
The Sorting page appears.
Step Five: Setting Sorting Rules (Optional)
If you would like to place records in a particular order (e.g., a–z, 10–1) by the values in a certain
column, you may do so using sorting. When combined with grouping, sorting will be performed
after all data is grouped. In this case, after being placed in each of the assigned groups, data in
those groups will be sorted according to the rules set here.
1. OPTIONAL: To locate a specific field, in the Search text box, begin typing the name of
the field.
As you type, the fields displayed in the Available scroll box will be narrowed down to
display only options matching your entry.
2. To indicate the field with the values to sort by, select the desired field (e.g., to display
incidents in order based on incident number, select Incident Number).
3. Click Add
.
4. If you would like to sort by multiple fields, repeat steps 1–2 until all desired fields are
added.
5. OPTIONAL: If multiple fields are selected for sorting, select the fields and use the Up and
Down buttons to indicate which sorting should be done first.
HINT: Fields that are listed first will be the primary sorting rules. Each field following
will be sorted within the first field.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 302
EXAMPLE: If the first field sorts by date, the second field could sort them by incident
number. In this case, all runs would be put in order based on the incident date. In cases
where multiple runs took place on a single date, they would then be placed in order
based on their incident number.
6. To select whether the sorting will be ascending (e.g., 1–10 or a–z) or descending (e.g.,
10–1 or z–a), select each field and click the Asc or Desc buttons.
7. When finished, click Continue.
The Criteria tab appears.
Step Six: Setting Criteria and Filters (Optional)
Criteria will allow you to determine limits on the data that will be displayed every time this report is
displayed. For example, in a report that displayed only runs in Minnesota, criteria would be used
to dictate that only records where the State field contains Minnesota should be included.
Filters allow you to specify a new value for a criterion each time the report is run. For example,
you could use filters to specify a date range, so that each time the report is run, users can select
a date range for the runs.
Criteria and filters are important for narrowing the number of results displayed. If your
organization has hundreds or thousands of records in the system, this is very important to limit
the length of the report and prevent the system from timing out when trying to retrieve a large
number of records.
1. OPTIONAL: To group criteria together, use the parentheses in the second drop down
menu and the last drop down menu.
EXAMPLE: To indicate that the records included in the report should only be for runs
within Minnesota with a destination of a hospital or medical clinic, you will need to group
the criteria for the destination types together. This indicates to the system that the run
must be from Minnesota and have a destination type of either hospital or medical clinic,
rather than saying that the run must either be from Minnesota and have a destination
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 303
type of a hospital, or have a destination type of a medical clinic.
2. From the Field drop down menu, select the column for which you are restricting the
values.
3. From the Operator drop down menu, select the way in which the field value must relate to
the value you are specifying (e.g., if the value should be equal to the one you are about
to specify, should not be blank, or should contain the value).
4. From the Value drop down menu, type or select the value for the criteria.
5. If necessary, close any parentheses by selecting a closed parenthesis from the drop
down menu.
WARNING: Make sure that there are no parentheses left open when you continue;
if there is an extra opening or closing parenthesis, the report will generate an error and
your criteria selections will be lost.
6. To add a new criterion, click Add
.
A new row appears.
7. OPTIONAL: To relate this criterion to a previous criterion, from the first drop down menu,
select whether both criteria must be met (And) or only one of them (Or).
NOTE: If both And and Or are used within one set of criteria, you will need to use the
parentheses in the second drop down menu to group criteria together.
8. To add any more criteria, repeat steps 2–7.
9. To add a filter (i.e., a field for which values can be specified before running the report
each time), from the Available scroll list in the Filters section, select the desired field(s).
HINTS:
To select multiple fields, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each desired option.
To search for a specific field to filter by, type in the Search text box. After you have typed
at least three characters, fields matching your entry will be displayed.
10. Click Add
.
11. To change the order that the filters will be listed, select the filter to move and use the Up
and Down buttons.
12. When finished, click Generate Report.
The Filter Your Results page appears.
Step Seven: Changing the Appearance of the Report (Optional)
If you want to create a report with a custom look, you can change the headers and footers, as
well as the colors for the text, each row, and the rows beginning each group of data.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 304
1. From the Actions menu, select Preferences.
The Preferences page appears.
2. From the Select Header or Select Footer drop down menus, select the footer you would
like to display on the report.
OR
To create a new header or footer,
a. Click Add or Modify a Header or Add or Modify a Footer, as appropriate.
A Headers and Footers page appears.
b. In the Header Title text box, type a name for this header.
c. In the text box, enter any text or pictures to be included in the header or footer.
HINT: To enter any information that will automatically change when the report
is generated, click the desired option from the Merge Fields section on the right.
d. When finished, click Save.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 305
3. In the Style Options section, select the colors that you would like to apply to the text, rows
or groups.
4. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Save.
Step Eight: Viewing the Report
If any filters have been added, you will need to specify the values for the filters before proceeding.
1. If necessary, from the upper right, click Generate Report.
2. If any filters are available, to select additional restrictions on the data to be displayed,
select the desired criteria.
HINT: Be sure to select how many records you would like to display on each page of
this report. The default value will be 50 rows on each page.
3. When finished, click Generate.
The report appears.
Step Nine: Saving the Report (Optional)
Users can save reports within the Report Writer, with the options to Save or Save As. Save will
save over any report with the same title with new changes, while Save As allows you to save the
report under a different name, preserving both versions of a report. If you are creating a new
report from scratch, you should use the Save option so that you can specify a name for the
report.
1. Within the report you wish to save, click the Actions tab at the top of the screen.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 306
2. Click Save to save the report with the current title.
OR
Click Save As to save the report under a different title.
3. If you select Save As, enter a new title for the report in the Name field.
HINT: If you are re-saving a report, the title will automatically be set to Copy of
(Report Name).
4. If desired, enter a new description.
5. Use the Category drop down menu to select where the report should be placed.
6. Use the radio buttons to select if the report is visible.
NOTE: If you select No, only you will be able to view the report.
7. In the Add to My Reports For section, from the Available text box, select any people who
should be able to view the report.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 307
HINT: To locate specific people, type in the Search text box. After at least three
characters have been typed, names matching your entry will appear in the Available
scroll list.
8. Click Add.
9. When finished, click Save.
The report is saved.
Step Ten: Deleting the Report (Optional)
While the report cannot be deleted completely from the system, you can mark it so no one,
including you, can access the report.
1. From the Reports toolbar at the top of the pane, select Properties.
2. In the Visible section, select No.
3. Make sure no users are in the Selected scroll list.
4. Click Save.
The report is no longer accessible.
Step Eleven: Assigning Permissions (Optional)
You can assign permissions to the report after saving it. This allows you to set which security
groups see which part of the report. Viewing permission can be restricted for parts or all of the
report, depending on your preferences.
1. From the Actions menu, select Permissions.
The Permissions page appears.
2. Use the checkboxes to select the appropriate permissions for each security group.
3. When finished, click Save.
The permissions are updated.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 308
Step Twelve: Scheduling Reports (Optional)
You can schedule reports to automatically run for individuals at a certain time interval. The report
will then be emailed to a person as an attachment.
1. From the Actions menu, select Schedule Report.
The Scheduling page appears.
2. Click Schedule Report.
The Scheduling page appears.
3. In the Recurring section, select how often this report will run.
4. In the Time section, select when the report will run.
HINT: If this is a large report, you will want to run it at a time when few people will be
using the system, so it will not slow down people who are working on other reports.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 309
5. In the From section, type any dates that should restrict when this report will run (e.g., if
the report should only be run for a month or a year).
6. In the Subject section, type a subject line for the email that will be sent with the report.
7. In the Message text box, type the message that will appear in the body of the email with
the report.
8. In the Format section, select the format in which the report should be saved (e.g., PDF).
9. In the Recipients section, from the Available text box, select any people who should
receive this report on this time schedule.
10. Click Add.
11. In the Allow Unsubscribe section, select whether these recipients should be able to set
themselves to no longer receive this report.
12. When finished, click Save.
Step Thirteen: Exporting and Printing Reports (Optional)
You can export a copy of this report to multiple types of files. This allows you to save a copy of
this report with the current data or to print the report in one of these formats. For a professional
looking report, it is recommended to export the report to PDF before printing.
1. From the top right corner of the report, click Export.
The Export Options page appears.
2. To export the report to any format, click the desired format.
HINT: Some file types have some limitations on the abilities to export. For example,
you cannot export to PDF if there are more than 1000 records in a report. Also, Microsoft
Word (Doc) files and HTML pages will only export the first page of the report.
3. For file exports, select whether you would like to open or save the resulting file.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 310
CHAPTER 11
WORKING WITH THE CERTIFICATION DASHBOARD
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 311
11.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how to use the Certification Dashboard module to monitor upcoming license and
certification renewals, as well as approve or disapprove training records for staff members.
11.2 Certification Dashboard Overview
The Certification Dashboard allows administrators to track certifications, licenses and coursework for staff
members. When staff profiles include dates for certifications and licenses, the Certification Dashboard will
automatically display when renewals are needed. As training records are entered in the Training section
for a service, they can be associated with individuals attending those classes. The system will
automatically update the number of hours completed and needed for the renewal, and allow the
administrator to approve or disapprove renewals if needed.
11.3 Viewing Upcoming Certifications
Staff have can have their certification and license information stored in the system, which also keeps
track of certification and license renewals that are approaching and certifications or licenses that are still
waiting on final approval. If the training information for each staff member is kept complete and up-todate, all required updates to certification and licenses will appear automatically on the Certification
Dashboard.
1. From the top left, click Cert Dashboard.
The Dashboard page appears.
NOTE: Depending on the number of modules available to you in your system, this link may be
contained under the More link in the upper left.
2. To view renewals for a different time period, from the License Renewals or Certification Renewals
section, select a time or date range and click Refresh.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 312
3. If more information is available about a record, to view the additional information, click the desired
record.
11.4 Approving or Disapproving Records
Administrators can approve or disapprove certain training records.
1. From the top left, click Cert Dashboard.
The Dashboard page appears.
NOTE: Depending on the number of modules available to you in your system, this link may be
contained under the More link in the upper left.
2. From the Approvals Pending list, select the checkboxes for all records to approve and click
Approve.
Staff totals for hours needed and completed update, although the window needs to be refreshed
before those totals will appear in the staff member’s record.
3. From the Approvals Pending list, select the checkboxes for all records to disapprove and click
Disapprove.
Staff totals for hours needed and completed update, although the window needs to be refreshed
before those totals will appear in the staff member’s record.
11.5 Viewing Training Information
You can jump to a specific training record or view a report summarizing the training completed by staff
member with an upcoming renewal from the Certification Dashboard.
1. From the top left, click Cert Dashboard.
The Dashboard page appears.
NOTE: Depending on the number of modules available to you in your system, this link may be
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 313
contained under the More link in the upper left.
2. To view a training record, click any of the text for the record.
You are brought to the training record for the appropriate service.
NOTE: This will bring you to the My Service or EMS Services section of the system rather
than the Certification Dashboard.
3. To view a report summarizing any training hours that have been completed for a staff member
with an upcoming renewal, click the associate Report icon
The report appears in a new window in PDF format.
7/3/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 314
CHAPTER 12
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 315
12.1 Chapter Overview
The Admin section allows system administrators to manage and configure the Service Bridge system to
best fit the needs of their service. This section explains the purpose and use of the features available in
the Admin section.
12.2 Working with System Users
System administrators can add, edit, view or delete users’ profiles. This includes the ability to set up a
user’s level of access to the system and to the pages for individual hospitals or facilities.
1. To work with system users, from the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Users & Security, click Users.
The Add/Edit Users page appears.
Adding New User Profiles
User profiles that are created in the Admin section will not be available from any service for use in
run forms or as a staff member. Staff profiles created here are generally for system
administrators, medical directors or others who need access to the information of specific
services, but are not involved in the day-to-day operations of that service.
HINT: To create a staff profile that will be available from a service as a staff member and be
available on run forms, add that staff member through the service..
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 316
1. From the Add/Edit Users page, click Add User.
2. In the Name and Contact Information sections, enter the basic information about this
system user.
3. To set this person to receive email notifications from ImageTrend (e.g., notifications
about scheduled maintenance or downtime), in the E-mail Notifications section, select
Yes.
4. To upload a picture of the user to the system, in the Picture section,
a. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
b. Navigate to and select the desired picture.
c. Click Open.
5. Click OK.
The Certifications tab is opened.
6. To edit or add information about a national certification, state certification or agencyspecific certification,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 317
a. In the desired section, click Click Here to Edit (Type) Registry Certification Info.
b. Using the provided fields, enter or change any desired information.
NOTE: This section must be completed in order for users to appear as
providers on the run form. This information is not required for non-responders
(e.g., ambulance directors or billing officers).
7. OPTIONAL: To add an additional EMS certification,
a. In the Additional EMS Certifications section, from the Certification Level drop
down menu, select the certification to record.
b. From the Active drop down menu, select whether this staff member currently has
this certification.
HINT: If you are recording a certification in the past, even if this staff member
has renewed the certification, the past certification will be inactive. When you
create a record for the current certification, that record will be active.
c. In the Certification ID text box, type the certification ID number.
d. In the Certification Date section, type the data that the certification was received.
e. In the Expiration Date section, type the date that the certification will expire.
f. When finished, click Save EMS Certification.
8. Repeat step 7 until all desired certifications are added.
9. When finished, click OK.
The Permissions tab is opened.
10. In the Login Information section, enter a username and password for the system user.
NOTE: Be sure to send this information to the user. Users will be prompted to change
their password upon their first login for security.
11. From the Login Information section, in the Permission Group drop down menu, select the
group with the level of access that this user should have.
HINT: To view the permission groups, from the left menu, click Account Management
and Global Security Settings. This will display a list of permission groups for which
administrators can view the individual rights and permissions assigned.
12. To view additional security settings related to the user’s ability to view run forms, click
View Permissions.
View My EMS Runs Only
Gives the user access to past run reports submitted only from his or her
account.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 318
Runs Forms
Determines the level of access the user will have to run forms that they are
allows to access. If the user is denied access to specific run forms (e.g., if
they are allowed to view run forms only they have submitted or only within a
certain time frame), that will take priority over the level of access given here.
Ability to Lock Runs
Determines whether this user will have the authority to prevent changes from
being made to run forms after they are submitted.
Ability to Change Run Status
Determines whether this user will have the authority to change the status
assigned to a run form (e.g., in progress, reviewed, billed).
View Patient Identifiable Information
Determines whether this user will be allowed to view patient identifiable
information on run forms.
View PDF Reports for EMS Runs
Determines whether this user will be able to generate PDF reports for run
forms.
View ‘All’ QA/QI Notes
Determines whether the user will be able to work with all QA/QI notes
submitted through the system or only with which he or she was associated.
View Unified PDF
Determined whether this user will be able to view the Unified PDF report
available from the Run History page for a specific incident.
Ability to switch run form template
Determines whether this user will be able to change run form templates after
a run form is started.
Ability to Lock Trainings
Determines whether this user will be able to lock training records and prevent
them from being edited.
Restrict Based on Date
Allows the user to view run forms submitted in only the specified time frame.
13. To force the user to reset his or her password, select the Reset User Password
checkbox.
NOTE: If users are not required to change their passwords periodically in the Account
Access Control section, this option will not work. For more information, please refer to the
Working with Permission Groups section.
14. In the Current Status section, select whether this profile should currently be active (i.e.,
useable) within the system.
15. In the Lock Status section, select whether this profile should currently be locked to
prevent this person from logging in.
16. To view individual system elements to which the user has access, click View Content
Rights.
17. To view exports that have been set up for this user, in the Scheduled Exports or User
Defined Exports section, click View Settings.
18. To select information which should be restricted for exports or to restrict this user to a
particular city for runs and reports,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 319
a. In the User Defined Exports section, click View Settings.
The Data Export page appears.
19.
20.
21.
22.
7/3/2013
b. To allow this user access to patient specific data for exports, in the Patient
Specific information section, select Yes.
c. To select location information to which this user has access for exports, in the
State, Region, Service, County and City scroll lists, select the locations to which
this user should have access.
d. To prevent this user from working with runs and reports from cities other than
those selected, in the Restrict Runs and Reports Access Based on City section,
select Yes.
e. When finished, click Save.
To allow a user to initiate data exports of his or her collected data without the
administrator’s assistance, in the Allows User Defined Exports section, select the Allow
User Defined Exports checkbox.
HINT: If this option is not selected, the user’s information will only be exported
through data transfers scheduled by the administrator.
To view any user associations (i.e., if two accounts for separate facilities are maintained
with a single set of login information for one user), click View Associations.
If security questions are enabled in this system, to force this user to reset the answers to
those questions, select the Reset All Security Answers checkbox.
NOTE: When editing your own profile, a list of your questions and answers will appear
in this section for editing.
To keep this record in the system, click OK.
To close the record without saving, click Back to Staff List.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 320
Viewing and Editing Existing Profiles
System administrators can view and edit profiles for existing users. A user’s profile contains a
basic profile with contact information as well as sections defining their rights and permission
levels for the system and access to hospitals.
1. From the Add/Edit Users page, navigate to name of the user whose profile you would like
to view.
HINTS: To view a list of profiles from a particular permission group, in the Filter by
Permission Group drop down menu, select the desired group.
To search for a particular user by their last name, type the name in the Last Name text
box and click Find.
To view another page of records, click the Next or Previous buttons to navigate to a new
page.
2. To view the user’s basic profile, click their name.
3. To edit the profile, click Edit.
4. Click a tab to work with the fields in that tab.
NOTE: The tabs displayed in this profile are the same as the tabs displayed in the
user profile accessed from the My Service tab, although additional tabs are available
through the user profile accessed from the My Service tab.
5. Using the provided fields, change or add any desired information.
6. To save any changes, click OK.
To return to the staff profile without saving changes, click Back to Staff List.
Removing User Profiles
The system administrator can remove user profiles from the system.
WARNING: This option should be used with caution, as removing a user profile with from
the system will remove the user’s information from all other records with which he or she is
associated. For instance, if the user has completed run forms, the system will no longer recognize
the user who created the run form and so the run report will be incomplete. In order to prevent a
user from accessing the system without removing the profile and its information, the profile can
be marked inactive in the Account Status section.
To remove a user profile:
1. From the Add/Edit Users page, navigate to and click the name of the user profile to
delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
The record is removed from the system.
Assigning Service Rights
Before a user can use Service Bridge, he or she will need to be assigned to at least one service.
This will allow the user to access information about that service, but the user will still not be
included as a staff member for the service.
1. From the Add/Edit Users page, locate the user for whom access should be set.
2. From the Actions column on the right side of the page, click the corresponding View
Rights button
7/3/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 321
The View Rights window appears, with the access rights the user currently has displayed.
3. From the drop down menu, select the appropriate option to assign rights and click
Submit.
4. If Give Additional Rights is selected, from the Regions drop down menu, select the region
containing the desired service(s).
The Service scroll list appears.
5. From the Service scroll list, select the desired service(s).
HINT: To select multiple services, press and hold Ctrl while selecting each service.
6. Click Add.
7. To remove any rights, from the list of current rights, click the corresponding Remove icon
.
8. When finished, click Close.
Assigning Additional Permissions
Administrators can set up the amount of access that users will have to run form data.
1. For the user whose permissions you want to update, click the corresponding Permissions
icon.
The Permissions window appears.
2. Using the provided fields, select the desired access options.
3. When finished, to save the changes, click Submit.
View My EMS Runs Only
Gives the user access to past run reports submitted only from his or her
account.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 322
Runs Forms
Determines the level of access the user will have to run forms that they are
allows to access. If the user is denied access to specific run forms (e.g., if
they are allowed to view run forms only they have submitted or only within a
certain time frame), that will take priority over the level of access given here.
Ability to Lock Runs
Determines whether this user will have the authority to prevent changes from
being made to run forms after they are submitted.
Ability to Change Run Status
Determines whether this user will have the authority to change the status
assigned to a run form (e.g., in progress, reviewed, billed).
View Patient Identifiable Information
Determines whether this user will be allowed to view patient identifiable
information on run forms.
View PDF Reports for EMS Runs
Determines whether this user will be able to generate PDF reports for run
forms.
View ‘All’ QA/QI Notes
Determines whether the user will be able to work with all QA/QI notes
submitted through the system or only with which he or she was associated.
View Unified PDF
Determined whether this user will be able to view the Unified PDF report
available from the Run History page for a specific incident.
Ability to switch run form template
Determines whether this user will be able to change run form templates after
a run form is started.
Ability to Lock Trainings
Determines whether this user will be able to lock training records and prevent
them from being edited.
Restrict Based on Date
Allows the user to view run forms submitted in only the specified time frame.
4. Click Close.
Creating User Associations
As an administrator, you have the ability to set up user profiles for any staff members who will
need to log in to the system and fill out run forms. If some of your users are involved in several
different services or teams that keep their records separate on the Service Bridge (e.g., a staff
member who is a part of an EMS team and the local fire department), that staff member will have
separate user profiles for each service or team. Due to this, that user will often have several
usernames and passwords to coordinate.
Setting up an association allows you to link multiple user profiles that a single user might have so
that user only needs to remember one username and password. Then, when that user logs in, he
or she can select which service or team he or she is currently working with. This allows
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 323
information to be kept separate for the user between each service (including information like rank,
pay grade, or training) while the user only needs to remember one set of login information.
When you set up an association, you will need to link two user profiles for a single staff member.
When doing this, you will need to decide which service or team should be that staff member’s
primary service. When that staff member logs in, he or she will be brought into that service in the
Service Bridge by default.
1. Through the Staff section of each service, add a staff record for each service this staff
member will be working with.
HINTS:
Each profile can have different permission groups, which will allow that user to have
different levels of access to each service.
Make sure that both profiles have a personnel ID assigned to this user in the Employment
tab of the profile.
2. To work with system users, from the upper right, click Admin.
3. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Users & Security, click Users.
The Add/Edit Users page appears.
5. Using the search fields, locate one of the user profiles for the staff member you are
creating a user association for.
6. Click the linked first name for the user profile.
The Demographics page of the user profile appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 324
7. Select the Permissions tab.
The Permissions page appears.
8. In the Account Status section, in the User Associations section, click View Associations.
The Associations for (User’s Name) window appears.
9. Using the Service Name, Last Name and First Name fields, enter information about the
additional user profile(s).
10. Click Find.
A list of all user profiles matching your criteria appears at the bottom of the page..
11. Locate the profile you want to associate.
12. Select the checkbox for the desired profile.
13. From the bottom of the page, click Add Associations.
The association is added and the second profile is listed at the top of the window.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 325
14. OPTIONAL: To set a specific account as the primary account (the service that this user
will be logged into by default when he or she logs in to the system), select the Primary
Account option for that account.
HINT: If you do not set up a primary account, this user will be prompted to select the
primary account the next time he or she logs in.
15. When finished, click OK.
The association is saved.
16. Close the Associations for (User Name) window.
17. In the Permissions tab of the user profile, click OK.
12.3 Working with Permission Groups
Permission groups control user access to the Service Bridge system. System administrators can
configure existing permission groups to allow their users the optimal level of access, allowing them to
perform necessary tasks while not providing them with extra features that may confuse them. System
administrators can also create new permission groups.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Users & Security, click Global Security.
The Add/Edit Groups page appears.
Viewing Permission Group Settings
Each permission group has settings for the individual access rights and levels of access that its
users have.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 326
1. To view a summary of the group and any description that has been created about it, from
the Add/Edit Groups page, click the group’s name.
2. To return to the list of security groups, click Cancel.
3. To view the group’s access to each feature of the system, click the corresponding View
Permissions icon
7/3/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 327
4. To view the group’s access to particular key information from run forms, click the
corresponding View Rights icon
.
Creating New Permission Groups
System administrators can create additional permission groups to better manage access to the
Service Bridge system.
1. From the Add/Edit Groups page, click Add Group.
The Permission Groups page appears.
2. In the Group Name and Group Description text boxes, type an identifying name and
description for the group.
3. In the Reset Password Every text box, type the maximum number of days before
members of this group will be required to change their passwords.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
4.
5.
6.
7.
P a g e | 328
NOTE: Typing a number other than zero here also allows administrators to reset a
user’s password from their profile.
OPTIONAL: To set this permission group as the one that is selected by default for new
users, select the Default Permission Group checkbox.
HINT: Only one permission group can be the default permission group.
To define which other permission groups users in this permission group can add new
staff members and users to, in the Permission Group – Add Rights section, select all
groups that people in this group should be able to add users to.
To associate a Report Writer permission group with this group, from the Report Writer
Group drop down menu, select the desired permission group.
When finished, to save the new group in the system, click OK.
The new group is created and given the default level of access to the system.
8. From the Add/Edit Groups page, click the View Permissions icon
the new group.
corresponding to
9. In the Group Permission window, select the desired levels of access to all features for
this group.
NOTES:
To apply a permission level across all levels of the Administration tab, select a level in the
Administration row.
When different permission levels are applied in the Administration for and the subsequent
rows, the lower level of permission will always be applied.


7/3/2013
Invisible: The group will not be allowed to view the page.
Read: The page will be viewable but in a read-only format. No changes will
be allowed to be made when this option is checked.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE



P a g e | 329
Change: This option gives the group the ability to change the layout as well
the content of the page.
Add: The group will have the ability to add pages under the current page.
Delete: The Delete option allows the group to delete the current page.

Owner: The Owner contains all the same rights as the above plus some
additional ones based on the feature.
10. Click Save.
11. From the Add/Edit Groups page, click the View Rights icon
corresponding to the new
group.
The Default Group Permissions window appears.
12. Using the provided fields, select the level of access to run form data that users in this
group will possess.
View My EMS Runs Only
Gives the user access to past run reports with which he or she is associated.
Runs Forms
Determines the level of access the user will have to run forms. If the user is
denied access to specific run forms (e.g., if they are allowed to view run
forms only they have submitted or only within a certain time frame), that will
take priority over the level of access given here.
Ability to Lock Runs
Determines whether this user will have the authority to prevent changes from
being made to run forms after they are submitted.
Ability to Change Run Status
Determines whether this user will have the authority to change the status
assigned to a run form (e.g., in progress, reviewed, billed).
View Patient Identifiable Information
This option determines whether this user will be allowed to view patient
identifiable information on run forms.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 330
View PDF Reports for EMS Runs
Determines whether this user will be able to generate PDF reports for run
forms.
View “All” QA/QI Notes
Determines whether this used has the ability to view all QA/QI notes in the
system or only the ones pertaining to runs he or she is listed as a staff
member on.
View Unified PDF
Determined whether this user will be able to view the Unified PDF report
available from the Run History page for a specific incident.
Ability to Switch Run Form Template
This option determines whether the user can change the template used for a
run form that has already been started.
Ability to Lock Trainings
Determines whether this user has the ability to lock trainings to prevent
editing.
Restrict Based on Date
Allows the user to view run forms submitted only in the specified time frame.
Restrict
The Restrict checkbox for each option allows you to prevent this user from
giving any other user a higher level of permissions than he or she has. For
instance, a service administrator without Delete rights would be unable to
grant any providers in his or her service with Delete rights.
Reset Users Rights
The Reset Users Rights setting allows you to reset the group permissions for
everyone within this security group to the settings included here. This will
apply any changes that you made to everyone in this security group, but will
also override any changes you made to individuals’ group permission rights.
13. Click Submit.
Editing Permission Setup
The system administrator can adjust the name and description of the levels of access that a
particular permission group has.
1. To edit the name, description or password reset requirements for a group,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 331
a. From the Add/Edit Groups page, click the name of the desired group.
The Permission Groups page appears.
b. In the Permission Groups table, change the name, description, default status or
frequency that users within the group will be required to change their passwords,
as desired.
NOTE: Typing a number other than zero here will also allow administrators to
reset a user’s password from their profile.
c. To allow people in this permission group to add users to additional permission
groups, select, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking all additional permission
groups.
d. To remove a permission group that people in this permission group were
previously able to add users to, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking all
permission groups that people should no longer be able to add users to.
e. When finished, to keep the changes, click OK.
2. To edit the access this permission group has to each feature of the system,
a. From the Add/Edit Groups page, click the corresponding View Permissions icon
.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 332
The Security Objects Permissions window appears.
b. Using the provided permissions grid, change the levels of access to all desired
features for this group.
NOTES:
To apply a permission level across all levels of the Administration tab, select a
level in the Administration row.
When different permission levels are applied in the Administration for and the
subsequent rows, the lower level of permission will always be applied.

Invisible: The group will not be allowed to view the page.

Read: The page will be viewable but in a read-only format. No
changes will be allowed to be made when this option is checked.

Change: This option gives the group the ability to change the layout
as well the content of the page.

Add: The group will have the ability to add pages under the current
page.

Delete: The Delete option allows the group to delete the current
page.

Owner: The Owner contains all the same rights as the above plus
some additional ones based on the feature.
c. When finished, to keep the changes, click Save.
3. To edit the amount of access users have to run form data,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 333
a. From the Add/Edit Groups page, click the corresponding View Rights icon
The Default Group Permissions window appears.
.
b. Using the provided fields, change the amount of access that users in this group
will have to run form data.
View My EMS Runs Only
Gives the user access to past run reports with which he or she is associated.
Runs Forms
Determines the level of access the user will have to run forms. If the user is
denied access to specific run forms (e.g., if they are allowed to view run
forms only they have submitted or only within a certain time frame), that will
take priority over the level of access given here.
Ability to Lock Runs
Determines whether this user will have the authority to prevent changes from
being made to run forms after they are submitted.
Ability to Change Run Status
Determines whether this user will have the authority to change the status
assigned to a run form (e.g., in progress, reviewed, billed).
View Patient Identifiable Information
This option determines whether this user will be allowed to view patient
identifiable information on run forms.
View PDF Reports for EMS Runs
Determines whether this user will be able to generate PDF reports for run
forms.
View “All” QA/QI Notes
Determines whether this used has the ability to view all QA/QI notes in the
system or only the ones pertaining to runs he or she is listed as a staff
member on.
View Unified PDF
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 334
Determined whether this user will be able to view the Unified PDF report
available from the Run History page for a specific incident.
Ability to Switch Run Form Template
This option determines whether the user can change the template used for a
run form that has already been started.
Ability to Lock Trainings
Determines whether this user has the ability to lock trainings to prevent
editing.
Restrict Based on Date
Allows the user to view run forms submitted only in the specified time frame.
Restrict
The Restrict checkbox for each option allows you to prevent this user from
giving any other user a higher level of permissions than he or she has. For
instance, a service administrator without Delete rights would be unable to
grant any providers in his or her service with Delete rights.
Reset Users Rights
The Reset Users Rights setting allows you to reset the group permissions for
everyone within this security group to the settings included here. This will
apply any changes that you made to everyone in this security group, but will
also override any changes you made to individuals’ group permission rights.
c.
When finished, to keep the changes, click Submit.
12.4 Working with Report Writer 2.0 Permission Groups
Permissions to Report Writer 2.0 are governed both in the permissions settings for each report and by the
permission groups for Report Writer. Permission groups determine whether people have access to the
Report Writer 2.0 link on the toolbar and the permission settings in each report determine what people
can access for each report within Report Writer. For more information about setting up access to
individual reports, please refer to the Report Writer chapter. Report Writer permission groups are
associated with people through the system’s permission groups.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Users & Security, click Report Writer Security.
The Report Writer Groups page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 335
4. Click Add Group.
The Report Writer Groups Info page appears.
5. In the Group Name text box, type a name for the group.
6. Click OK.
The group is added.
7. For the new group, click the Permissions icon
The Permission Setup window appears.
.
8. Select the desired level of access to the Report Writer link.
HINT: In this case, the level of access to the system will be same if you select Read, Edit, Add
or Delete rights. This level of permission sets whether the Report Writer 2.0 link will appear on the
toolbar for people in this group. If this link should not appear, assign Hidden permissions.
9. When finished, click Save.
12.5 Working with Login Information
The system administrator can set up password and login requirements for all system users. This includes
the ability to set how often passwords need to be changed and when they are prompted, what characters
must be included and ways that accounts may be automatically suspended.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 336
3. Under Users & Security, click Logins and Passwords.
The Application Access Control menu appears.
4. To select how many times a user can incorrectly enter a password before their account is
temporarily suspended, in the Password Attempts text box, type the number.
5. To require at least one numeric character in passwords, from the Numeric Characters drop down
menu, select Yes.
6. To require at least one uppercase character in passwords, from the Uppercase Characters drop
down menu, select Yes.
7. To require at least one special character (e.g., @, #, !, *) in passwords, from the Special
Characters drop down menu, select Yes.
8. To select the number of old passwords against which a new password will be compared to
prevent passwords from being reused, in the Password Compare text box, type the number.
9. In the Password Length text box, type the minimum number of characters that should be included
in the password.
10. To set a number of days that must pass without a user logging in before that user’s profile is
locked, in the Lock User for Inactivity text box, type the number of days that should pass before a
user account is locked.
11. To set the number of days before a password expires that the user will be notified to change their
password, in the Change Password Prompt text box, type the number of days.
12. To set a notification that will appear if a user’s account is suspended or marked inactive, in the
Inactive Account Message text box, type the message.
13. To require users to answer security questions every time they log in, in the Security Questions
Prompt on Login section, select Yes.
14. To require users to answer security questions to retrieve a forgotten password, in the Security
Questions Prompt on Password Retrieval section, select Yes.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 337
15. In the Encrypt Security Question Answer section, select whether answers to security questions
should be displayed as bullet points when the user is typing (similar to the way passwords appear
when typed).
16. In the Allow Identical Username/Password section, select whether users should be able to set
their password to be the same value as their username.
17. To set the number of security questions that a user should answer, from the Security Answers
Required drop down menu, select the desired number.
18. If security questions are used, to write additional information for the users, in the Security
Question Support text box, type the desired message.
HINT: This could include information about who to call if the user forgets the answers to the
security questions.
19. To view any existing security questions, from the Current Questions section, click Show Current
Questions.
A list of questions appears.
20. OPTIONAL: To make a question active (i.e., users will need to create an answer for the question
and the question may appear to be answered), select the corresponding Active checkbox.
21. OPTIONAL: To make a question inactive (i.e., users will not need to answer this question),
deselect the corresponding checkbox.
22. To add a new question,
a. In the New Questions section, click the Add Question icon
until blanks appear for
each question.
b. Type the text for each question in the corresponding text box.
WARNING: Questions cannot be edited or deleted after submission, although they
can be made inactive. Be sure that spelling and grammar are correct.
NOTE: These questions will be saved when the entire page is submitted.
c. If necessary, to remove a text box, click the Remove Question icon
.
The last text box will be removed.
NOTE: One blank text box will always appear.
23. When finished, click Submit.
12.6 Controlling Content for the Public Site
While the majority of the content of any public facing site will be controlled by editing the page itself,
system administrators can control whether links should be available to pages with information about the
service, staff or reports. This can allow you to either easily show or hide information from the public
according to your service or state’s policies.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 338
3. Under Settings, click Public Content.
The Public Content page appears.
4. To display a link to a page with specific information, for the desired link, select Yes.
OR
To hide a link to a page with specific information, for the desired link, click No.
5. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Submit.
12.7 Setting QA/QI Note Settings for the System
You can set up an email confidentiality statement to be included on all QA/QI notes created within your
system, as well as selecting how QA/QI notes created in the system should be displayed when sent to
email addresses rather than Service Bridge inboxes.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Settings, click Application Settings.
The Application Settings page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 339
4. In the Email Confidentiality Statement text box, type any statement that should appear about
email confidentiality on all QA/QI notes.
5. To send only the text in the Email Confidentiality Statement text box in any copies of QA/QI notes
that are sent to external email addresses (instead of the Service Bridge inbox), in the Restrict
External Notes section, select Yes.
NOTE: If you select Yes here, users will still be able to see the entire QA/QI note within their
inbox when they log in to the Service Bridge.
6. When finished, click Save.
The settings are saved.
12.8 Setting a System Email Address
At times, Service Bridge will send emails to users directly from the system (for example, when a message
is sent from the inbox and set to send an email or if a user forgets his or her password). You can enter an
email address that these messages should appear to come from, which can prevent these emails from
getting bounced back or caught in spam filters.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Settings, click Application Settings.
The Application Settings page appears.
4. In the System Email Address text box, type the email that these messages should come from.
5. Click Save.
The setting is applied.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 340
12.9 Requiring User Approval for Account Creation
The User Approval feature is an optional feature that allows system administrators to set up their Service
Bridge so that new users need to request access and be approved in order to get a user account for EMS
Service Bridge. As a system administrator, you have the ability both to enable this option and to approve
or deny requests for access.
Enabling the User Approval Feature
Before users will be able to request access to the system, you will need to enable the User
Approval feature. This will allow you to set up Service Bridge to require approval for new
accounts, to configure who will receive notifications when new accounts are requested or
approved and to set a default permission setting for approved users.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
The Admin section appears.
2. Under Site Management > Settings, click Application Settings.
The Application Settings page appears.
HINT: If you do not see the sub-menus under Site Management or Application
Settings, click the Expand icon for the appropriate header to expand the sub-menu.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 341
3. Scroll to the User Approval section.
4. To enable the User Approval feature, in the Require approval for new accounts section,
select Yes.
5. To select permission groups whose users should receive a notification whenever a user
requests access,
NOTE: Notifications will be sent by default through the Inbox messaging system in
Service Bridge. In order for people to receive notifications to their external email, each
individual must sign up for notifications. For more information, please refer to the Signing
Up for Email Notifications section in this guide.
a. In the New Account Notification section, from the Available scroll list, select the
first permission group whose users should receive a notification when a user
requests access.
b. Click the Add icon
.
The selected group is moved to the Selected scroll list.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all groups whose users should receive notification are
listed in the Selected scroll list.
6. To select permission groups whose users should receive a notification whenever a user
for their agency has their access approved,
NOTE: Notifications will be sent by default through the Inbox messaging system in
Service Bridge. In order for people to receive notifications to their external email, each
individual must sign up for notifications. For more information, please refer to the Signing
Up for Email Notifications section in this guide.
a. In the Service Administrator Notification section, from the Available scroll list,
select the first permission group whose users should receive a notification when
a user’s request for access to their agency is approved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 342
b. Click the Add icon
.
The selected group is moved to the Selected scroll list.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all groups whose users should receive notifications are
listed in the Selected scroll list.
d. From the Default New User Permission Group drop down menu, select the
permission group that new users whose request for access is approved should
be assigned to.
NOTE: Service administrators will be able to change this setting for the user’s
profile in their service, but this is the setting that will be applied if the service
administrator does not make any changes to the permissions.
e. Click Save.
The settings are applied.
Responding to Requests for Access
As a system administrator, you will be able to respond to users’ requests for access to Service
Bridge. Depending on the setup of the User Approval feature and your own notification settings in
your staff profile, you may receive an Inbox message or an email when a user requests access,
after which you can either approve or deny the user his or her request for access to each agency.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
The Admin page appears.
2. Under Site Management > Users & Security, click Pending Users.
The Pending Users page appears.
HINT: If you do not see the sub-menus under Site Management or Users & Security,
click the Expand icon for the appropriate header to expand the sub-menu.
3. To view which service(s) a user requested access to, click the Expand icon to the left of
his or her name.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 343
A list of service(s) that this user requested access to appears.
4. As appropriate, select whether this user should be approved or denied for each service.
OR
To approve or deny this user for all services, select the appropriate option in the row with
their name.
5. When you have chosen to approve or deny each user, click Submit.
Approved users are set up with a user profile for all approved agencies and service
administrators are notified based on the configuration settings for the User Approval
feature. Users for whom all requests have been addressed are removed from the
Pending Users page.
Signing Up for Email Notifications
By default, any notifications in the system are sent via the Inbox messaging system. You have the
option to receive all inbox messages at the email address you have recorded in your staff profile.
1. From the upper right, click your name.
The User Information page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 344
2. Click Edit.
The Demographics tab of your own user profile appears.
3. To receive email notifications of any message you get in your Service Bridge Inbox, in the
E-mail Notifications section, select Yes.
4. Click OK.
Your email notification settings are saved.
12.10 Setting the Limit on Future Incident Dates
You can determine how many days in advance an incident report can be created. If someone tries to
create a run report with a date that is further in the future than you specify, they will receive a pop up error
message and the date will be changed back to the current date.
NOTE: This works only on the date entered in the Incident Date field, not the date and time fields
entered in the Response Times panel.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
The Admin section appears.
2. Under Site Management > Settings, click Application Settings.
The Application Settings page appears.
HINT: If you do not see the sub-menus under Site Management or Application Settings, click
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 345
the Expand icon for the appropriate header to expand the sub-menu.
3. At the bottom of the page, in the Days Allowed for Future Incident Date section, type the number
of days in the future users should be allowed to create run report for.
4. Click Save.
The settings are saved.
12.11 Setting Up Field Bridge Automatic Updates
As the system administrator, you can choose whether Field Bridge updates should be available to all
Field Bridge systems as soon as they are released to your Service Bridge, or whether you want to control
when individual updates are available.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 346
3. Under Settings, click Field Bridge Auto Update Setup.
The Field Bridge Auto Update Setup page appears.
4. To make updates automatically available, select Automatically Apply Auto-Updates.
OR
To manually control when Field Bridge updates are available, select Manually Manage AutoUpdates.
The Turn off all auto updates section appears.
5. Click Submit.
The changes are applied.
Manually Applying Field Bridge Updates
If you have chosen to control Field Bridge updates manually, you will need to select when
releases should be available.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 347
3. Under Settings, click Field Bridge Auto Update Setup.
The Field Bridge Auto Update Setup page appears.
4. To release the update for Field Bridge systems to download, click Turn on updates.
The update is now available for Field Bridge systems to download and install.
12.12 Adding Words to the EMS Run Form Spellcheck
Dictionary
You can either add individual words to the spellcheck dictionary for your Field Bridge run forms and
dynamic run forms, or you can upload a file with multiple words. Note that the spellcheck dictionary is
case sensitive, so if you were to enter a word with all lowercase letters and a provider types that word into
a run form with a capital letter, the word would still be marked as misspelled.
Individual services will also be able to add and update the Spellcheck dictionary for their service. When
you add words to the Spellcheck dictionary through the Admin section, they will be available for all
services in the system.
Adding an Individual Word to the Spellcheck Dictionary
You can add individual words as needed to prevent the Check Spelling tool from marking them as
misspelled in run forms.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 348
3. Under Settings, click Spellcheck Dictionary.
The Spellcheck Dictionary page appears.
4. Click Add Word.
The Add New Custom Word window appears.
5. In the New Word text box, type the word.
6.
NOTE: Remember that the spellcheck dictionary is case sensitive.
Click Save.
The word is added.
Uploading a Dictionary to the Spellcheck Dictionary
You can upload a collection of words to the spellcheck dictionary to quickly add multiple words.
To create this collection, add each of the words to a spreadsheet file (e.g., a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet), with each word in its own row in the first column.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Settings.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Settings, click Spellcheck Dictionary.
The Spellcheck Dictionary page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 349
4. Click Upload Dictionary.
The Upload Dictionary window appears.
5. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
6. Navigate to and select the dictionary file.
7. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
8. Click Upload.
The file is uploaded and all included words are added to the dictionary.
12.13 Working with Services and Regions
System administrators can set up regions and the services contained within those regions to assist with
organization and locating services or incidents.
Viewing and Editing Regions
Administrators can view or edit the regions that are set up in the Service Bridge.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Site Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Site Resources, click Add/Edit Region.
A list of existing regions appears.
4. To view or edit the region information, click the region’s name.
The Edit Region page appears.
5. To change the name, in the Short Description text box, change the name.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 350
6. To change the information that will appear when a user’s mouse rests over the region
name, in the Hover Help text box, type the new information.
7. To assign a region ID code to this region, in the Region ID text box, type the desired
code.
8. To display this region in the list of regions when searching for a service, select the Show
in Menu checkbox.
9. To display this region on the public website for the service, select the Show on Public
View checkbox.
10. When finished, to save the changes, click OK.
Adding New Regions
System administrators can create new regions.
NOTE: Regions must be created before services can be added.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Site Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Site Resources, click Add/Edit Region.
A list of existing regions appears.
4. Click New.
The Add Region Name page appears.
5. In the Short Description text box, type a name for the region.
6. To create the information that will appear when a user’s mouse rests over the region
name, in the Hover Help text box, type the new information.
7. To assign a region ID code to this region, in the Region ID text box, type the desired
code.
8. To display this region in the list of regions when searching for a service, select the Show
in Menu checkbox.
9. To display this region on the public website for the service, select the Show on Public
View checkbox.
10. When finished, to save the changes, click OK.
Viewing and Editing Services
Administrators can view services by region and view or change the information about each
service. A region must be created before a service can be added.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Site Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 351
3. Under Site Resources, click Add/Edit Service.
A list of existing regions appears.
4. From the list, click the name of the region in which the desired service is contained.
A list of all services contained within the region appears.
5. Click the name of the desired service.
The service’s information appears.
6. Using the provided fields, change any desired information about the service.
7. When finished, to keep the changes, click Save.
Adding New Services
System administrators can add new services to a region.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Site Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Site Resources, click Add/Edit Service.
A list of regions appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 352
4. From the list of regions, click the region to contain the new service.
The Add/Edit Service Name page appears.
5. Click Add.
The Edit Service page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 353
6. In the Account Name text box, type the name of the agency.
7. In the Agency ID text box, type a unique number for this agency’s ID.
8. OPTIONAL: In the Destination Type scroll list, select the type of destination that this
service transfers patients to most often.
9. If this service is a fire department, in the FDID text box, type the state fire department ID.
10. To make this service currently active and available for use in the system, in the Status
section, select Active.
OR
To keep this service in the system for reference but not make it available for use, in the
Status section, select Inactive.
11. In the Run Form Permissions section, select which types of incidents this service should
be able to submit.
HINT: In addition to assigning permissions here, you will need to assign run form
permissions in the Run Form Management section on the Run Form Permission page.
Services must have access to a specific type of run form on both pages in order to be
able to enter a specific type of incident.
12. In the CAD Integration section, select whether this service has the optional CAD
integration module.
13. If this service is for demonstration or testing purposes only, select the Demo Service
checkbox.
14. In the Address text box(es), type the address of this service.
15. In the Postal Code text box, type the postal code of the service.
16. Click Update Now.
The most common city, county and state information is filled in based on the postal code.
17. OPTIONAL: If the wrong city information was filled in, to look for a specific city,
a. Click Lookup.
The Statue, County, City, Postal Code Lookup window appears.
b. Using the provided fields, enter any information to help you locate the correct
location.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
c.
P a g e | 354
Click Search.
A list of all locations that match your search criteria appears.
d. Click the desired location.
The location is entered.
18. When finished, to save the new service record, click Add.
12.13 Viewing Current Imports and Exports
System administrators can view information about all scheduled imports or exports, either single or
recurring. In addition, they can view a variety of reports summarizing the performance of imports and
exports in the system.
Viewing Current Exports
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 355
3. Under Data Import & Export, click View All Export Tasks.
A list of exports appears.
Viewing Current Imports
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click View All Import Tasks.
4. From the Service Name drop down menu, select the service for which to view the import
tasks.
5. OPTIONAL: To retrieve one particular record, in the Upload ID text box, type the ID
number assigned to the import when it was first created.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 356
A list of imports appears.
Viewing All Completed Imports
Service Bridge provides a report listing all imports that have been completed.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click Completed Import Report.
The initial report appears.
4. To adjust the dates displayed, in the From text boxes, select the correct dates and click
Go.
5. To print the report,
a. Click the Print Report icon
.
b. In the Print dialog box, select any custom printing options and click Print.
Viewing Imports in Progress
Service Bridge will provide a report listing all imports that have been scheduled to begin but have
not yet finished importing information. If an import was set up but found no data to retrieve, it may
appear in this list even though it is not currently working on the import process.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 357
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click In Progress Import Report.
The initial report appears.
4. To adjust the dates from which records are retrieved, in the From text boxes, type the
appropriate dates and click Go.
5. To print the report,
a. Click the Print Report icon
.
b. In the Print dialog box, select any custom printing options and click Print.
Viewing Import Performance
Service Bridge provides a report summarizing the data imports done using Service Bridge,
including information about the total number of each type of import, the time taken to complete it
and the validation score of the import.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click Import Performance Report.
The initial report appears.
4. To adjust the dates from which records are retrieved, in the From text boxes, type the
appropriate dates and click Go.
5. To print the report,
a. Click the Print Report icon
.
b. In the Print dialog box, select any custom printing options and click Print.
12.14 Scheduling New Exports
System administrators can schedule exports singly or to recur at a specific time interval.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 358
Scheduling Individual Exports
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click View All Export Tasks.
4. Click Add Single Export.
The Data Export for (Username) page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type a title to identify this export.
6. In the Option 1, Option 2, Option 3 or Option 4 text boxes, type the dates for the records
that should be exported.
HINT:
Use Option 1 to export all records that were entered between specific dates and have
been changed since a particular date.
Use Option 2 to export all records that were entered between specific dates or that have
been modified since a particular date.
Use Option 3 to export all records that were entered between specific dates.
Use Option 4 to export all records that were changed since a specific date.
7. To schedule the export, click Save.
Scheduling Recurring Exports
Scheduling recurring exports is handled differently for different types of exports. For information
about setting up recurring exports for your service, please contact ImageTrend.
12.15 Viewing Mapped Data Exchange Destinations
System administrators can view the data ports that have been set up for importing and exporting data in
the system. Setting up new data ports requires extensive knowledge of the databases being used in the
Service Bridge and in the other system being used for the import or export. To set up a new data port,
please contact ImageTrend.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 359
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click Map Destinations.
A list of currently mapped destinations appears.
12.16 Data Export Setup
System administrators can view a list of all data exports that are currently set up. To set up a new type of
data export, please contact ImageTrend.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click Data Export Setup.
A list of data exports appears.
12.17 Setting Up a Site for the Patient Tracking Integration
If your Service Bridge integrates with Patient Tracking for associating patients with Patient Tracking
incidents, you will need to set up the appropriate Patient Tracking site in order to connect the two
systems.
You should be provided with the posting URL, username and password from the administrator for the
Patient Tracking system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Data Import & Export.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Data Import & Export, click Patient Tracking Site Setup.
The Patient Tracking Sites page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 360
4. Click Add Patient Tracking Site.
The Patient Tracking Setup page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type a name for the site you are syncing to.
6. In the Posting URL text box, type the URL for the Patient Tracking Site.
7. In the User ID text box, type the username that you were provided for posting to the Patient
Tracking site.
8. In the Password and Re-enter Password text boxes, type the password you were provided for
posting to the Patient Tracking site.
9. OPTIONAL: To make sure this is a valid URL, click Verify URL.
If the URL is not valid, an error message appears.
10. Click Submit.
The information is saved.
12.18 Working with Validation Options
Service Bridge offers an engine in which validation rules can be customized to check for the input of data
for EMS incident forms based on configured conditions. Configuration of the rules provides the ability to
score or weight the value of particular data being collected.
When the conditions of a rule are met, then points will be subtracted from the validity score of the incident
report (which is used as a measure of the completeness of the incident form). A score of 100 on an
incident report suggests that no conditions were met. A score less than 100 on an incident report means
that a validation rule condition was met, subtracting the associated number of validity points.
When setting up rules, the weight of the points on the specific rule can be used as an indicator of the
significance of the data being validated. As conditions of validation rules are satisfied, the system adjusts
the score of an incident report.
Depending on the rules and points assigned, the minimum validity score will vary, and should be kept in
mind when viewing the validity of run reports.
Validity Rule Terms
There are several sections of a validity rule that you can set up. Understanding the terms for each
of these sections and items can make it easier to update and create your own validity rules.
Validity Rule
A validity rule is a setting created by the system administrator, which determines when a field
is required and how many point should be deducted from the validity score if the field is not
completed appropriately.
Validity Rule Setup
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 361
The Validity Rule Setup section of the rule determines details such as the number of points
that will be deducted from the validity score, the error message that will appear for users if
the field is not completed appropriately, the field that the rule applies to, whether the rule is
currently active and whether the rule conditions must be satisfied for Field Bridge runs before
a call can be posted.
Comparison
A comparison is a criterion that will be used to determine whether the selected number of
points will be subtracted from the validity score. If the criteria set up in the comparison are
met, the selected number of points will be subtracted. When the criteria are not met, the
validity rule will be “satisfied” and the validity score will go up.
Editing Existing Validation Rules
You can make changes to any existing validity rule. If you make changes to a validity rule, the
new rule will be applied only to new run forms, or any past run form that you open and re-save.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Validation.
A list of currently existing validation rules appears.
4. Click the validation rule to be edited.
The Validity Rule Setup page appears.
HINTS:
If you would prefer to go directly to the Edit Rule page, click the Edit Rule icon
.
If you would prefer to go directly to the Manage Comparisons page, click the Manage
Comparisons icon
.
If you would like to view where this validity rule is applied to specific standard run forms,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
click the View Associations icon
P a g e | 362
.
5. To change the name, number of points, message, status, position or the field to which the
rule is applied,
a. Click Edit.
The Validity Rule page appears.
b. Using the provided fields, enter the new desired information.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 363
c. Click Submit.
d. OPTIONAL: To return to the Validity Rule Setup page, if necessary, click Back.
6. To change the values against which the run form will be compared to determine whether
the response is valid by adding a new comparison criteria,
a. From the Validity Rule Setup page, click Manage Comparisons.
The Validity Rule Comparisons page appears.
b. To edit the details of an existing comparison, click the View and Edit icon
Editable fields for the comparison appear below the list of validity rule
comparisons.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
7/3/2013
.
If necessary, from the Previous Comparison Operator drop down menu, select
how this comparison
From the Field Type drop down menu, update whether you are building this
criteria based on a system data section or a system defined question.
From the Field drop down menu, update the field that the validation rule is
examining.
From the Modifier drop down menu, select any modifier for this criterion (e.g.,
length of, count of).
NOTE: Modifiers are not required for a criterion. If you want to skip this
section, select No Modifier. If you select a modifier, the criterion will look at that
type of information (e.g., the length of the field or the count) for the selected field.
From the Previous Comparison Operator drop down menu, select whether the
rule should be applied when this criteria is met in addition to the other criteria
(i.e., and) or when only one of the criteria is met (i.e., or).
In the Panel and Control drop down menus, select the section and sub-section of
the run form that this rule should be applied to.
In the Comparison Operator drop down menu, select how the value in the run
form should relate to the selected criteria.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
j.
k.
l.
P a g e | 364
In the remaining fields, select the values to which the run form values should be
compared.
NOTE: These fields will differ depending on the comparison being created.
You can choose to compare to a value (e.g., 5), a different data section (e.g., the
information in the Last Name field) or a system defined question (e.g., the
answer to the custom Alternative Transport Types question set up for your
system).
When finished, click Add Comparison.
OPTIONAL: If multiple comparisons are being used, to make sure they work
together and all parentheses were closed, click Validate Parentheses.
Adding New Validation Rules
System administrators can add new validation rules for their run forms.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Validation.
A list of currently existing validation rules appears.
4. Click Add Validation Rule.
The Validity Rule Edit page appears.
5. In the Rule Name text box, type a title for the rule.
6. In the Rule Points text box, type the number of points that can be taken away if the
criteria for this rule are not met.
HINT: This number must be negative.
7. In the Rule Error Message text box, type any information that should appear at the top of
the run form tab to explain why validity points were lost when the rule is not met.
8. In the Rule Notes text box, type any additional notes or information to be available to
administrators in the setup for this rule.
NOTE: This information will not be visible to anyone filling out run forms, but can be
an easy way to add extra information for administrators to refer to.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 365
9. From the Field Type drop down menu, select whether this rule should be applied to a
data section in the system or a specific system defined question.
10. From the Field drop down menu, select the data section or system defined question that
this rule should be applied to.
OR
To search for the desired option,
a. Click the Lookup link.
The Data Section Lookup or System Defined Question Lookup modal window
appears.
b. In the Search text box, type the name or part of the name of the field.
c. Click Search.
A list of all options matching your search criteria appears.
d. Select the desired option.
The section is selected in the drop down menu.
11. From the Rule Level drop down menu, select the level at which this requirement was
made.
12. In the Active Status section, select whether this rule should be active or inactive in the
system.
13. OPTIONAL: To make this rule active only for services that are marked as demo services
in their setup, select the Only apply rule on Demo Services checkbox.
HINT: This can be a good way to test your validity rules before implementing them for
the entire service.
14. OPTIONAL: To mark this rule as something that must be met for calls on the Field Bridge
before the run form can be submitted, select the Field Bridge Closed Call checkbox.
15. Click Submit.
A summary of the validity rule appears.
16. Click Manage Comparisons.
The Validity Rule Comparisons page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 366
17. Click Add Comparison.
The Add Validity Rule Comparison section appears.
18. If necessary, update the field type or field that this comparison should examine.
19. From the Modifier drop down menu, select any modifier for this criterion (e.g., length of,
count of).
NOTE: Modifiers are not required for a criterion. If you want to skip this section, select
No Modifier. If you select a modifier, the criterion will look at that type of information (e.g.,
the length of the field or the count) for the selected field.
20. To set a comparison where the desired value is not in a specific set, select the Negation
checkbox.
21. In the remaining fields, select the values to which the run form values should be
compared.
NOTES:
These fields will differ depending on the comparison being created. You can choose to
compare to a value (e.g., 5), a different data section (e.g., the information in the Last
Name field) or a system defined question (e.g., the answer to the custom Alternative
Transport Types question set up for your system).
You can include wildcards within comparison rules to find a broader range of values if
your Field Bridge systems are upgraded to version 4 or above.
22. When finished, click Submit.
23. Repeat steps 17–22 until all comparison criteria have been added.
24. OPTIONAL: If you have added multiple comparisons and grouped them together with
parentheses, to ensure that you have all needed opening and closing parenthesis, click
Validate Parentheses.
Applying Validation Rules to Run Forms
In order for validation rules to be effective, they must be associated with the run form tab
containing the field that collects the information being evaluated. Each rule should only be
associated with a single run form tab in each run form.
NOTE: You will only need to associate validity rules to standard run forms that you are using.
The rules will be automatically applied to all dynamic run forms.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Validation.
A list of currently existing validation rules appears.
4. From the bottom of the page, click Associate Validity Rules.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 367
5. In the Select a run form drop down menu in the upper right corner of the page, select the
run form to which to apply this rule.
The Associate Validity Rules to ImageTrend EMS Service Bridge Run Form Tabs page
appears.
6. From the drop down menu in the upper right, select the first run form to apply validation
rules to.
A table of validation rules and tabs appears.
7. From the list of validation rules, select the checkboxes for all rules that should be applied
to the tab.
8. Click Submit.
Setting Up Validation based on Disposition
You can choose to set the validity score to 100% on any run reports that are documented with a
disposition of:







Cancelled
Cancelled — Out of Primary Service Area
Cancelled — Prior to Dispatch
Cancelled — Request Transferred to Another Provider
Not Patient Found
Standby Only — No Patient Contacts
Unable to Locate Patient/Scene
If you do not choose to enable this feature, the validity rules you have set up for all run forms will
be applied to runs with these dispositions.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 368
3. Under Resources, click Validation.
A list of currently existing validation rules appears.
4. From the bottom of the page, click Disposition Validation.
The Disposition Validation Setup page appears.
5. To set the validity score for all run forms with one of the named dispositions to 100%,
select On.
OR
To apply the existing validity rules to run forms regardless of disposition, select Off.
6. Click OK.
The setting is saved.
12.19 Working with Resource Setup
System administrators can modify the setup of run form elements. If the service also utilizes the EMS
Field Bridge, these changes will be passed down to the Field Bridge application. This section explains
how to work with preset options for run forms including the destinations, mutual aid departments and
patient medications. In addition, this section explains how to work with consent text for forms requiring
signatures, validation options, mapping, the data elements included in each run form, and setting up data
exports and run form statuses.
Working with Destinations
Run forms contain a field for destination. When system administrators set up destinations, staff
members can select the correct destination and all address information will be automatically
completed. Destinations can be within the United States or in Canada or Mexico, and can be a
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 369
specific location (e.g., St. Mary’s Hospital) or a general location that will allow the address to be
completed on the run form (e.g., other hospital). Administrators can create or edit these
destinations and their information.
Destinations can also be grouped into regions, which you can set up and edit from the
Destinations page.
Viewing and Editing Destination Regions
Individual destinations can be organized into regions; you can view and make changes to
these regions if needed.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Destinations.
A list of existing destinations appears.
4. From the bottom of the page, click Destination Region Setup.
The Destination Region page appears.
5. Click the name of the region to work with.
The Edit Destination Region page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click OK.
The changes are saved.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 370
Adding a New Destination Region
You can set up new regions for your destinations if needed.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Destinations.
A list of existing destinations appears.
4. From the bottom of the page, click Destination Region Setup.
The Destination Region page appears.
5. Click Add Destination Region.
The Add Destination Region page appears.
6. In the Region Name text box, type the name of the region.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional descriptive information to keep
track of for this region.
8. In the Active section, select whether this region should currently be active and
available to add destinations to, or inactive and saved in the system for
reference.
9. Click OK.
The region is added.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 371
Viewing and Editing Destinations
Administrators can view a list of all existing destinations and edit their information, if
necessary.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Destinations.
A list of existing destinations appears.
4. To find the correct destination, if necessary, use the Previous and Next buttons
or the alphabet links at the top of the page.
5. To change the sort order of the destinations,
a. Type the number(s) corresponding to the desired list position for each
destination.
b. From the bottom of the page, click Update Sort Order.
6. To view the entire profile or edit a destination, click the destination’s name.
7. To edit the destination information, enter the new information into the correct
fields and click OK.
Creating New Destinations
System administrators can create new destinations to be included in the list on run forms.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 372
3. Under Resources, click Destinations.
A list of existing destinations appears.
4. From the bottom of the page, click Add Destination.
The Add Destination screen appears.
5. In the Destination Name text box, type a title for the destination that will appear in
the drop down menu on the run form.
6. In the Code text box, enter the unique code for the destination provided by
ImageTrend.
NOTE: Be sure to contact ImageTrend for a code to ensure that this
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
7.
8.
9.
10.
P a g e | 373
destination is entered in the database as a unique record. All destinations within
the database must have a unique code in order to work properly.
From the Region drop down menu, select the region in which this destination is
located.
For hospitals, in the Hospital Level text box, type the hospital level.
In the Designation scroll list, select all designations associated with this
destination.
HINT: To select multiple options, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired option.
Using the provided location text boxes, type the destination’s address.
HINT: To automatically enter the city, county and state information from the
postal code of the destination, enter the postal code and select the Check to
populate City, County, State from Postal Code checkbox.
HINT: To look up address information, click the Lookup button, enter as much
information as is known and click Search.
11. In the Phone and Fax text boxes, enter the appropriate contact numbers.
12. To select whether this destination will be active on the run forms or inactive, in
the Active section, select the appropriate option.
13. If creating a generic destination (e.g., nursing home), to allow users to enter a
new address whenever this option is used, select the User can enter a custom
address for this destination checkbox.
14. To save this new record, click OK.
Working with Transferring Agencies
Run forms allow users to select an agency for a patient to be transferred to or from. When an
agency is set up for use, it can be selected from a drop down for easy form completion.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 374
Viewing and Editing Transferring Agencies
System administrators can view or edit the information for transferring agencies. Records
on this list can be selected from a run form.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Agency Transferred To/From.
A list of existing agency records appears.
4. To view the entire record or to open it for editing, click the name of the record.
The Edit Agency Transport/Transport page appears.
5. To edit the record, use the provided fields to make changes and click OK.
Adding New Transferring Agencies
System administrators can create new records for agencies not currently in the system.
These records will then be available from run forms.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 375
3. Under Resources, click Agency Transferred To/From.
A list of existing agency records appears.
4. Click Add Agency Transferred To/From.
The Add Agency Transferred To/From page appears.
5. Use the provided fields to enter information about the agency.
6. When finished, to save the record to the system, click OK.
Working with Patient Medication Records
EMS run reports allow staff members to keep record medications that patients are given. These
medications can be selected from a list, which is set in this section by the system administrator.
All medications that can be recorded should be included in this list.
Viewing and Editing Medication Records
System administrators can view or edit a list of existing medication records. Records in
this list can be selected from a run form.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 376
3. Under Resources, click Patient Medication List.
A list of existing medication records appears.
4. To find the correct medication, if necessary, use the Previous and Next buttons
or the alphabet links at the top of the page.
5. To view the entire profile or edit a medication, click the medication’s name.
6. To edit the medication information, enter the new information into the correct
fields and click OK.
Adding Medication Records
System administrators can add new records for medications that are not yet in the
system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Patient Medication List.
4. Click Add Medication.
The Add Medication screen appears.
In the Generic Name text box, type the medication’s generic name.
In the Trade Name text box, type the medication’s trade name.
In the Description text box, type more information about the medication.
In the Dosage test box, type the amount of this medication that should be taken.
NOTE: This dosage will be entered into run forms as the default value.
9. To place this medication at a certain position in the list, in the Sort Order test box,
type the number of the position in which this medication should appear.
10. When finished, to add this record to the system, click Save.
5.
6.
7.
8.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 377
Working with Run Form Statuses
Run forms can be marked with particular statuses to indicate any additional work that needs to be
done or to help sort records. System administrators can view, edit and set up these statuses.
Once statuses have been changed, system administrators can also choose to apply those
changes to all affected past records.
Viewing and Editing Run Form Statuses
System administrators can view a list of all possible run form statuses and edit individual
statuses if necessary.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Run Status.
A list of existing run form statuses appears.
4. To find the correct status, if necessary, use the Previous and Next buttons or the
alphabet links at the top of the page.
5. To view the entire profile or edit a status, click its name.
6. To edit the status information, enter the new information into the correct fields
and click OK.
Creating New Statuses
System administrators can create new statuses by which to classify their run forms.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Run Status.
A list of existing run form statuses appears.
4. Click Add Status.
The Add Status page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 378
5. In the Status text box, type the status.
6. In the Sort Order text box, type the number of the position in the list of statuses
that this status should appear.
7. To select whether this status should be active in the system or inactive, in the
Active section, select the appropriate option.
8. When finished, to save the new status, click OK.
The new status will not be available for new run forms.
Updating Statuses for Past Run Reports
Once a status has been edited or if a new status is added, past run reports can be
altered to reflect these changes. Any status can be selected to be replaced by a different
status, and all past run reports with the selected original status will be updated to the new
status.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Run Status.
4. Edit or add the desired status.
5. Click Mass Update Status.
6. From the From drop down menu, select the original status that should be
replaced.
7. From the To drop down menu, select the new status that should replace the
original status.
8. Click Submit.
The changes are applied.
Setting Up the CMS Billing Calculator
The CMS Billing Calculator setup allows administrators to indicate what services they can bill for
under each CMS service level. This information will be used in the CMS Billing Calculator, if
enabled.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 379
3. Under Resources, click CMS Billing Calculations.
The CMS Billing Service Level Setup page appears.
4. To change the sort order of the service levels, in the text boxes, type the desired sort
order for each level.
NOTE: This order is based on national conventions. ImageTrend recommends not
changing this order without consulting an expert on this billing system to avoid errors in
billing.
5. When finished, click Save.
6. To indicate what services can be billed for,
a. Click the level for which to set up billed services.
The (Service Level) page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 380
b. To indicate that a service should be billed, select the checkbox.
To indicate that a service should not be billed, deselect the checkbox.
c. When finished, click Save.
d. To select additional services under this level, click the desired tab.
e. Repeat steps b–d for each tab.
7. Use the left menu to navigate back to the list of CMS service levels.
8. Repeat steps 6–7 for all desired service levels.
Working with Message Types
Message types allow you to categorize messages sent with the Service Bridge inbox for easier
organization. System administrators can add or edit message types for use with the inbox. Once
a type has been edited or if a new type is added, past messages can be altered to reflect these
changes. Any type can be selected to be replaced by a different type, and all past messages with
the selected original status will be updated to the new status.
Adding a New Message Type
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Message Types.
The Message Types Setup page appears.
4. Click Add Message Type.
The Add Message Type page appears.
5. In the Message Type text box, type the name for the message type.
6. In the Sort Order text box, type the order that this type should have in the list of
orders.
7. In the Default section, select whether this type should be selected by default for
new messages.
HINT: Only one message type can be selected as the default.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 381
8. In the Active section, select whether this type should be currently active and
available for use.
9. When finished, click OK.
Viewing and Editing Existing Message Types
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Message Types.
The Message Types Setup page appears.
4. Click the name of the desired message type.
The Edit Message Type page appears.
5. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
6. When finished, to save any changes, click OK.
Mass Updating Message Types
Administrators can choose to update all messages of a certain type to be categorized as
a different type, if desired.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 382
3. Under Resources, click Message Types.
The Message Types Setup page appears.
4. Click Mass Update Message Types.
The Mass Update Message Types page appears.
5. From the From drop down menu, select the type from which messages should be
updated.
6. From the To drop down menu, select the type to which messages should be
updated.
7. Click Submit.
The message types are updated.
Viewing Data Element Details
Each type of information that is collected in the Service Bridge has its own data element. System
administrators can view a variety of information about these elements.
NOTE: Users must be extremely familiar with the database that the application is built upon
and the NHTSA and NEMSIS codes in order to change any of this information, so please contact
ImageTrend if changes are needed.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 383
3. Under Resources, click Data Elements.
A list of current data element tables appears.
4. To find a specific table or data element, in the Search Data Elements text box, type a
keyword and click Go.
5. To view the data elements within a particular table, click the corresponding View (Table
Name) Data Elements icon .
A list of the data elements within that table appears.
6. To view more information about the data element, click the correct icon.
View Tag Details
Allows administrators access to tag properties, such as the element’s name,
the date it was modified, its properties (e.g., its location and name in the
database or the name of the file collecting the data) and the code used to
generate the tag.
View Element Details
Enables administrators to view details for the corresponding data element,
such as the table containing the data element, its description and the field
name. Administrators can change the label that will appear for the element.
View Mapping Details
If connections are set up to import or export data for this element,
administrators can view the paths mapped for those data exchanges.
View Resource Values
Administrators have access to a list of all fields that will appear on the run
form for this data element, and can choose to mark the field active (to display
them on the run form) or inactive (to hide them on the run form), or change
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 384
the sort order. Staff members cannot add data elements.
NOTES:
Administrators can designate whether each option within each field
are active or inactive within the system.
Administrators can set an option to be selected by default within each field.
In section D4.6, administrators can set a default dosage, unit and route for
each medication that will appear automatically in run forms.
Mapping Codes for Exports and Posting
In some cases, the names and codes that your agency uses may be different than those that are
used by someone you submit your data to, such as the state or a billing company. In this case,
you can “map” the codes so that the system knows to substitute the name and code used by the
organization you are exporting to when you perform an export or post your data.
This can be especially useful for items such as destinations. In this case, if the state records a
destination by its initials and your service spells out the name, mapping codes can allow you to
use the full name within your system but export the initials for the state.
Mapping a Code or Name
Before you can map any names or codes, you must know both the name and code that
your agency uses and the one that you need to export. If necessary, be sure to map both
the name and the code for a particular option. The Data Element Manager keeps track of
all the codes and names used by your agency, to which you will add the mapping
information.
Mappings are created for both a particular data element (e.g., the destination transferred
to code) and a particular export set. This allows you to create different mappings for
different exports; for example, if you create exports for both a billing company and the
state, and they use different codes, you should have an export set for each and map
those different codes.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 385
3. Under Resources, click Data Elements.
The Data Element Manager page appears.
4. To locate the code or name that your agency uses that needs to have a mapping,
click the View Information icons until you locate the desired code.
OR
a. In the Search Data Elements text box, type a name, code or portion of
either.
b. Click Go.
HINT: If you need to map destinations for transferring, the element
IDs you will need are E20.1 and E20.2.
5. For the appropriate element, click the View Mapping Details icon
The Mapping window appears.
7/3/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 386
6. Click the name of the export set you want to add this mapping to.
The Data Sections page appears.
7. For each value that needs to be replaced by a code that the receiving system
recognizes, in the corresponding Mapped Code text box, type the new value.
8. Repeat step 7 for all values within this data element and export set.
9. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Save.
Working Reports and Narratives
Administrators have the option to deactivate certain reports or narratives if they are not used, or
for advanced users, to edit or upload customized reports or narratives.
The Service Bridge controls the reports and narratives that are available for both the Service
Bridge system and the Field Bridge system. The reports and narratives available for the Service
Bridge are by default applied to the Field Bridge list, although that list can be changed in the
Manage Field Bridge Options section so that different reports and narratives are available from
the Field Bridge or the Service Bridge.
Deactivating Specific Reports or Narratives
If there are certain reports or narratives that your service does not use or that you would
like to be unavailable, you can deactivate them.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 387
3. Under Resources, click Reports and Narratives.
The Upload Reports and Narratives page appears.
4. For the report(s) or narrative(s) to deactivate, deselect the Active checkbox.
The report(s) or narrative(s) are deactivated and will not be available for use from
the Field Bridge.
Uploading New Reports and Narratives
People who have knowledge of XML, XSL, XSLT and ImageTrend’s reports and
narratives can create custom reports, narratives and narrative questions. ImageTrend
recommends not creating new reports and narratives unless you are extremely familiar
with the data structure and reports and narratives used for the Service Bridge and Field
Bridge. Once these files have been created, you can upload them to the Service Bridge
to be distributed to the Field Bridge. After uploading a new report, narrative or narrative
question, be sure to select whether this file should be active or inactive.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 388
3. Under Resources, click Reports and Narratives.
The Upload Reports and Narratives page appears.
4. In the section of the page for the type of report or narrative you are uploading, in
the New file section, click Choose File…
The Choose File dialog box appears.
5. Navigate to and select the desired file.
6. Click Open.
The Choose File dialog box closes.
7. Click Upload.
The file is added to the list of reports, narratives or narrative questions.
Setting Field Bridge Report and Narrative Permissions
Administrators have the option of allowing each service under the Service Bridge the
opportunity to select which reports and narratives are available to their service and Field
Bridge, or to upload additional reports and narratives.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 389
3. Under Resources, click Reports and Narratives.
The Upload Reports and Narratives page appears.
4. In the Give ability to services to upload their own customized reports, narratives
or narrative questions to synchronize to their EMS Field Bridge Units section of
the page, select whether individual services included under this Service Bridge
should be able to set up their own reports and narratives.
5. Click Submit.
Uploading a Logo for System Reports
You can add a custom logo that should appear on all system reports. This logo should be
in JPEG, GIF, PNG or BMP format.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 390
3. Under Resources, click Reports and Narratives.
The Upload Reports and Narratives page appears.
4. From the This section allows you to upload and preview the logo that will appear
on all system reports section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
5. Navigate to and select the desired image file.
6. Click Open.
The file is selected.
7. In the Resize Logo section, to resize the image file to the required size or 180
pixels, select Yes.
OR
To keep the size of the image as it is in the file, select No.
8. Click Upload.
The image is added.
Adding a Custom Postal Code
If a service needs to record calls for a postal code, city or county that is not currently in the
system, you can add it as a custom postal code. That will make this postal code information
available to all services in your Service Bridge
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 391
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Postal Codes.
The Custom Postal Code Administration page appears.
4. Click Add a Custom Postal Code.
The Settings page appears.
5. In the Postal Code text box, type the desired postal code.
6. OPTIONAL: To search for a record that may be in the system but not in use,
a. Click Update Now.
The Search Criteria page appears.
b. For the desired place, click the Add icon
.
The information is entered.
7. From the State drop down menu, select the state for this postal code.
8. From the County drop down menu, select the county for this postal code.
9. In the City text box, type the name of the city for this postal code.
10. In the City FIPS text box, type the FIPS code for the desired city.
OR
To search for the FIPS code,
a. Click Lookup.
The Search page appears.
b. Use the provided criteria to enter search criteria.
c. Click Search.
A list of search results appears.
d. For the desired place, click the Add icon
.
The information is entered.
11. When finished, click Save.
The new postal code is added and is available for service use.
Setting Up AMA Questions for the System
You can choose to set up extra questions to be displayed in the Against Medical Advice signature
panel of dynamic run forms for patients. These questions can help you collect more detailed
information than is collected by default. When you set up questions, make sure they are worded
so that they can be answered with the default answers of either “I agree/I disagree/ N/A,” or
“Yes/No.”
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 392
After you set up AMA questions you must also edit the dynamic run form to enable the questions
to appear.
AMA questions can also be set up by individual services, if you have set permissions to allow
them to do so. (For more information about controlling whether services can set up their own
custom AMA questions or must use the system-created ones that you set up here, please refer to
the Setting Up System Controls section in this manual.) If services are allowed to edit their own
AMA questions, they will be able to add and edit their own questions, but not make changes to
the ones that you set up for the system.
Adding an AMA Question
You can set up as many AMA questions as you would like.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click Custom AMA Questions.
The Manage AMA Questions page appears.
4. Click Add Question.
The Edit AMA Questions page appears.
5. From the Language drop down menu, select the language that this question will
be in.
6. In the Question Text text box, type the question.
HINT: The question should be answerable by either “I agree/I disagree/ N/A,”
or “Yes/No,” as these are the options that will be available.
7. In the Active section, select whether this question should be active and available
for run forms, or inactive and stored in the system for reference.
8. In the Include Response Textbox section, select the checkbox to include a text
box with this question that can collect additional information.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 393
9. From the Question Type drop down menu, select which answers should be
available to patients answering this question.
10. When finished, click Save.
The question is added and will be displayed if the appropriate section is available
on the run form.
Editing the Run Form for AMA Questions
If you want to include AMA questions on your run form, you will need to add a new
control to the run form. You can add this control to any system templates you have set
up.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Templates & Permissions.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Templates & Permissions, click Layout Editor.
The Layout Editor appears.
4. Locate the template you want to edit.
HINT: It might be beneficial to begin with a copy of the template that you want
to edit, if you are editing a template that is in use. This will ensure that providers
are still working with an appropriate run form while you are working on it, as well
as giving you a backup if the run form does not turn out the way you want.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 394
5. For the appropriate run form, click View Tabs.
A list of the run forms tabs appears, with the first tab’s information displayed.
6. Click the tab that contains your signature panels.
HINT: This is usually the Signatures tab, but your service may have assigned
a different name to the tab in your template.
7. Locate the AMA parent control.
OR
If the AMA control is not yet set up on the run form you are working with,
a. Locate or add a new panel for the AMA section.
b. Click Add Control.
The Add Control dialog box appears.
c. Search for the AMA Parent control.
d. Select the AMA Parent Control option.
e. Click View Selected Control.
f. Click Add Control.
The field is added and you are returned to the run form template.
8. For the parent AMA control, click Edit.
The Edit Control dialog box appears.
9. Click View/Edit Child Controls button.
A preview of the control appears.
10. For the control including the current AMA question, click Edit.
NOTE: There are several different controls contained within the AMA parent
control. When you click the correct one, the header in the dialog box should
refresh to say Control ID: 593.
11. Click View/Edit Child Controls.
The dialog box is refreshed to display the Edit Child Controls page.
12. On the empty space where you would like to include the AMA questions, click
Add Control.
The dialog box refreshes to display the Edit Control options.
13. Use the advanced search options to search for control ID 1266.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 395
14. Select the control with ID 1266.
15. Click View Selected Control.
A preview of the control appears.
16. Click Add Control.
The control is added and you are returned to the Edit Child Controls page.
17. OPTIONAL: To change the number of rows or columns that this control spans,
a. For the new control, click Edit.
The Control ID: 1266 dialog box appears.
b. Use the Row Span and/or Column Span options to select the size of the
control.
c. When finished, click Save & Back.
The changes are made.
18. Click Back.
The Control ID: 593 page is displayed.
19. Click Save & Back.
20. From the upper right corner of the dialog box, click the Close icon.
12.20 Setting Up System Defined Questions
Administrators can create new questions to be available for addition to EMS run forms for all services.
This allows you to gather data that is relevant for your system but may not be already included in the
form. Only administrators will be able to edit them or add new questions in the Admin section.
System Defined Questions on Standard EMS Run Forms
System defined questions are collected in a single section on the standard run form, which the
administrator can give an appropriate title. When creating and editing system defined questions,
administrators can use the Question # text box to define the order of each question.
To change the title of the section for system defined questions:
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 396
3. Under Resources, click System Defined Questions.
The System Defined Questions page appears.
4. In the Header text box, type a name for the section.
5. Click Save.
Viewing and Editing System Defined Questions
Administrators can view and edit system defined questions from the same place. When you view
a system defined question, you will also be able to view any validity rules that this question is
associated with.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click System Defined Questions.
The System Defined Questions page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 397
4. To view or edit a particular question, click within the row for that question.
The System Defined Question modal window appears.
5. OPTIONAL: To change the question, available answers, or question setup,
a. Use the provided fields to enter all information about the question.
NOTE: For this option to appear on a run form, be sure the Active checkbox is
selected.
b. When finished, to save the changes, click Submit.
Adding a New System Defined Question
Only administrators can add a new system defined question to the system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Resources, click System Defined Questions.
The System Defined Questions page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 398
4. From the top right, click Add Question
The Service Defined Question page appears..
5. In the Question text box, type the desired question.
6. From the Question Type drop down menu, select the type of answer that should be given
for this question (e.g., selected from a drop down menu or a text box for free typing).
7. If Drop Down is selected, to enter the possible answers, in the Answer Choices text box,
type each possible answer separated by a comma (,).
8. To enable this question to currently be in use, select the Active checkbox.
OR
To keep this question in the system but prevent it from currently appearing on run forms,
deselect the Active checkbox.
9. To select how wide the field will appear for this question (in pixels), in the Answer Width
text box, type the number of pixels wide that the field should appear.
10. In the Export to NEMSIS Research Survey Fields, select whether this question and its
answers should be included in NEMSIS exports.
11. If you chose to include this question in NEMSIS exports, in the Export Field section,
select whether the export should include the question number or the text of the question.
12. When finished, to save the new question in the system, click Save.
To return to the list of questions without saving the new question, click Cancel.
12.21 Overview of Signatures Options
System administrators can view and change the consent text for forms requiring signatures. This can
include information for the standard consent forms as well as managing forms in other languages.
ImageTrend does not provide translations for signature text. When signature consent form text is
changed, the original text will still appear on forms that were submitted before the change.
Working with Translated Form Labels
All fields that need to be completed on a form will have labels to show users where to respond.
These labels can be translated into any of the languages in the system. ImageTrend does not
provide translation services.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 399
2. Under Run Forms, click Signatures.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Signatures, click Translated Signature Text.
4. Fields appear for all labels that can be translated for each language.
5. In the provided fields for the correct language, provide the correct translation for the label.
6. When finished, click Save.
Working with Consent Form Text
System administrators can view or edit consent text for each form for each language that is
currently set up in the system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Signatures.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Signatures, click Signature Text.
4. From the Signature Edit Setup table, in the Signature Section drop down menu, select
the category of signature.
5. From the Editable Signature Text drop down menu, select the form with the consent text
to work with.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 400
The editable text appears.
6. To edit the text, click Edit.
7. In the text boxes for the text for each language, make the desired changes.
8. When finished, click Submit.
Working with Consent Text Languages
Each form can be translated into other languages once that language has been set up in the
system as a category. System administrators can set up languages, which allow forms to be
classified as a language-specific form. ImageTrend does not provide translation services.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Signatures.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Signatures, click Signature Languages.
4. A list of currently set up languages appears.
5. To change the order in the list in which a language appears,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 401
a. Click the corresponding Edit button.
b. In the Sort Order text box, type the number of the new position.
c. Click Submit.
6. To add a new language,
a. Click Add New Language.
b. In the Language text box, type the name of the language.
c. In the Sort Order text box, type number of the language’s position in the list.
d. Click Add.
12.22 Adding and Editing Standard Run Forms
System administrators can edit run forms that have already been created or can create new custom run
forms. These forms can be altered to show different tabs, different summary information or the positioning
of the fields already included in the form.
Adding New Run Forms
After the basic information for a new run is added, it must be edited to configure the tabs and
fields that will appear.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Templates & Permissions.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Templates & Permissions, click Run Form Templates.
The Run Forms page appears.
4. Click Add New Form.
5. In the Title text box, type a name for the form.
6. In the Date Start text box, type the first date that this form should be available for use.
OR
To select the date from a calendar, click the correct Calendar icon
and click the date.
7. In the Date End text box, type the last date that this form should be available for use.
OR
To select the date from a calendar, click the correct Calendar icon
and click the date.
8. In the Version Code text box, type the version of the run form.
9. From the Category drop down menu, select the type of run form.
10. In the Please enter the Form description text box, type a description or any clarifying
details about the form.
11. When finished, click Save.
The run form opens for editing.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 402
12. Using the options from the I want to drop down menu, format the new run form as
desired.
HINT: For more information, please refer to Editing Existing Run Forms and
Formatting Run Form Options.
Editing Existing Run Forms
System administrators can edit the information available on run forms.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Templates & Permissions.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Templates & Permissions, click Run Form Templates.
4. From the list of run forms, click the form to edit.
5. To work with tabs, from the I want to drop down menu, select Tab View.
HINT: For more information about working with tabs, please refer to Formatting Run
Form Options.
6. To change the summary information about the form, from the I want to drop down menu,
select Edit Form Information.
HINT: For more information about working with summary information, please refer to
Formatting Run Form Options.
7. To edit the fields available in each tab or their placement in the run form, from the I want
to drop down menu, select Edit Layout/Sections.
HINT: For more information about editing fields in the run form, please refer to
Working with Formatting Run Form Options.
8. To preview the run form as it will appear to system users, from the I want to drop down
menu, select Preview Layout.
Formatting Run Form Options
Run forms can be edited by changing the available tabs and fields or the summary information.
Working with Run Form Tabs
All information in run forms is organized into tabs. System administrators can edit the tabs that
are available or the order in which those tabs appear.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 403
1. Once the run form has been opened for editing, from the I want to drop down menu, click
Tab View.
2. To rename a tab, in the correct Tab Name text box, type the new name.
3. To rearrange the order in which the tabs appear on a run form, in the Order text boxes,
type the numbers corresponding to each item’s desired placement.
4. To add a new tab,
a. From the last row, In the Tab Name text box, type a name for the tab.
b. In the Order text box, type the number corresponding to the new tab’s desired
position in the list of tabs.
c. Click Save.
5. Edit the fields available in the tab.
HINT: For more information, please refer to Working with Run Form Fields.
6. When finished, to keep any changes, click Save.
Working with Form Summary Information
Summary information includes the title and description of the run form, the category in
which it belongs, the dates during which it should be available for use and the form’s
version. System administrators can alter this to make run forms conform to their needs.
1. Once the run form has been opened for editing, from the I want to drop down
menu, click Edit Form Information.
2. To change the name of the run form, in the Title text box, type the new title.
3. To change the dates during which this run form will be available for use, in the
Date Start and Date End text boxes, enter the appropriate dates.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
4.
5.
6.
7.
P a g e | 404
HINT: To select the dates from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and
select the correct date.
To change the version of the run form, in the Version Code text box, type the
correct version.
To change the category of form, from the Category drop down menu, select the
correct category.
To change the description of the form, in the Please enter the Form description
text box, type the new description.
When finished, to save the information, click Update.
Working with Run Form Fields
System administrators can add, move or change the fields available in each tab of a run
form. This provides a layout editor that allows system users to move or change
information within the run form.
1. Once the run form has been opened for editing, from the I want to drop down
menu, select Edit Layout/Sections.
2. To select the tab on which to work, below the Current Section heading, select the
correct tab.
3. To add any text to the run form, click and type where the text should appear.
4. To move a field,
a. Click and drag to select the text for the field to move.
b. Click the Cut button
from the page’s toolbar or press Ctrl and C
simultaneously on the keyboard.
c. Click to place the cursor where the field should appear.
d. Click the Paste button
from the page’s toolbar or press Ctrl and V
simultaneously on the keyboard.
5. To add a field, type the tag name in the location where the field should appear.
HINT: To learn a tag name, view the field’s properties in the tag library.
6. To change a field, delete the old tag name and type the new tag name.
7. When finished, click Save.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 405
12.23 Working with Fields and Tags for Standard Run Forms
All fields that can be included in a run form are listed in the tag library. This section allows system
administrators to view the tag name for use in run forms, to change the name of the field and to preview
the field’s appearance as it will display in a run form.
To open the tag library:
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Templates & Permissions.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Templates & Permissions, click Tag Library.
The Tag Library page appears.
4. To find a specific field, in the Search Tag Name text box, type the tag name and click Go.
5. To sort by first letter or number, click the correct letter or number at the top of the page.
Working with Field Properties
System administrators can view the tag name for a field or change the name of the field. The
Properties window displays the name, tag name and description of the field, as well as the name
of the file in which data from this field will be stored and the data element number of the field.
Much of this information is related solely to the database and is not relevant to most users.
1. In the tag library, navigate to the desired field.
2. Click the field’s hyperlinked name
OR
Click the corresponding Properties icon
.
3. To change the name of the field, in the Name text field, type the new name.
4. When finished, click Save.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 406
Previewing Fields
System administrators can preview fields as they will appear when displayed on a run form.
1. In the tag library, navigate to the desired field.
2. Click the corresponding Preview icon
The preview appears.
.
12.24 Setting Service Access to System Run Forms
For several system run forms that are included with the Service Bridge, you can define which services
have access to them in one central location.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click Templates & Permissions.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Templates & Permissions, click Run Form Permissions.
The Run Form Permission page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 407
4. For each run form to be available for a service, select the corresponding checkbox.
HINTS:
Selecting the EMS option will give the selected services access to all active EMS standard run
form templates.
Selecting the EMS Billing option will give the selected services access to all active EMS billing
view standard run form templates.
Selecting the DRF option will give the selected services access to all active dynamic run form
templates within the system.
5. From the bottom of the page, click Save.
12.25 Working with Report Writer 2.0 Settings
You can set up permissions and display options in the Admin section to control which permission groups
can work with specific datasets and canned reports, as well as the names and settings for specific
columns in those data sets.
Setting Up Access to Data Sets
You can control which permission groups will have access to which data sets for creating
transactional reports.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Report Writer 2.0.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Report Writer 2.0, click Dataset Permissions.
The Manage Dataset Permissions page appears.
4. For the desired dataset, click the View and Edit icon
The Permissions: (Dataset Name) page appears.
7/3/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 408
5. For each permission group, select the checkbox(es) for all steps of the reporting process
that should be available when working with this dataset.
6. When finished, click Save.
Managing Display Options
Administrators can control the display options for individual fields within a dataset. This allows
you to change the name of the field that will appear to Report Writer 2.0 users as well as allowing
you to hide specific fields if you do not want them to be included in any reports.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Report Writer 2.0.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Report Writer 2.0, click Dataset Display.
The Manage Dataset Display page appears.
4. To make changes within a specific data set, click the View and Edit icon
set.
The Data Set page appears.
for that data
5. To change the name of a field as it will appear to Report Writer 2.0 users, in the Display
Name text box for the field, make the desired changes.
6. To hide a field so it cannot be reported upon, deselect the corresponding Available
checkbox.
7. From the bottom of the page, click Save.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 409
Updating Report Layout Options
You can customize the information included in the EMS CAD Reconciliation standard report
through the Admin section. When running this report, you will still have the options to show or
hide specific information each time the report is run; however, you can use the options in the
Admin section to hide sections that are never used or change the label of any column to
something more easily recognizable for your state.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Report Writer 2.0.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Report Writer 2.0, click Report Layout.
The Report Layout page appears.
4. Click the name of the report to customize.
The Report Columns page appears.
NOTE: Currently, only the EMS CAD Reconciliation report is available for
customization.
5. To change the details for a specific column,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 410
a. Click the name of the column.
The Modify Column page appears.
b. To change the label that appears by default, in the Label Name text box, type the
desired text.
c. OPTIONAL: To hide this column every time the report is run, in the Active
section, select No.
d. To change the order that this column will appear in this section, select the
number for the desired position (e.g., select 1 for the first column).
e. When finished, click Save.
6. To quickly change the order of columns within their respective section,
a. From the top right, click Edit Sort Order.
The Sort Order text boxes for each column become editable.
b. Using the provided fields, enter numbers to set the desired order.
c. When finished, click Save Reorder.
Managing Access to Standard Reports
You can control which Report Writer 2.0 permission groups will have access to change
information when running standard reports for each report that is saved in the system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Report Writer 2.0.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 411
3. Under Report Writer 2.0, click Report Permissions.
The Manage Report Permissions page appears.
4. For the desired report, click the View and Edit icon
.
The Report Permissions: (Report Name) page appears.
NOTE: If you opened an ad hoc report instead of a standard report here, you may see
additional options for controlling which sections of the report each group will have access
to.
5. For each permission group, select the checkbox(es) for all steps of the reporting process
that should be available when working with this report.
6. When finished, click Save.
Scheduling a Standard Report
You can now schedule specific standard reports in the same way as you could previously
schedule transactional reports in the Report Writer.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Report Writer 2.0.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Report Writer 2.0, click Report Scheduler.
The Report Scheduler page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 412
4. Click Add Scheduled Report.
The Scheduled Report Edit page appears.
5. From the Report drop down menu, select the report you want to schedule.
Additional information is populated in the Report Criteria section at the bottom of the
page.
6. In the Report Title text box, type the name of the report as you want it to appear when it
is sent.
7. In the Run Time text box, type the time that the report should be run.
HINT: It can be beneficial to run this report at a time when not many people will be
using the system, since if it is a large report it may take a lot of system resources to
generate.
8. From the Interval drop down menu, select how often this report should be sent.
9. From the Date Span drop down menu, select how many runs you want to include in the
report.
HINT: Selecting Year to Date will include all runs so far for the generated by this
schedule.
10. To ensure that this scheduled report will be generated and sent, in the Active section,
select Yes.
OR
To save the settings for this schedule in the system without generating the report, in the
Active section, select No.
HINT: You may want to select No if you do not want people to receive this report yet.
You can change the status to Yes later when you want people to begin receiving the
report.
11. In the Send To section, select whether you want to select individual users to receive this
report, or entire permission groups.
Additional fields appear for you to select users or permission groups to receive the report.
12. If you chose to send to users,
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 413
a. Click the To button.
The Search User(s) page appears.
b. Using the provided fields, enter any criteria to locate the users you want to
receive this report.
c. Click Search.
A list of people meeting your criteria appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 414
d. From the Available scroll list, select all users to receive this report.
HINT: To select multiple people, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired name.
e. Click the Add icon
.
f. When all desired users based on these criteria are selected, click Add Selected.
The Search Users dialog box closes and the users are selected to receive this
report.
g. Repeat steps a–f until all desired users are added.
13. If you chose to add permission groups, in the Permission Groups scroll list, select the
permission groups that should receive this report.
NOTE: Everyone included in the selected permission groups will receive this report.
14. In the Report Criteria section, select any criteria to narrow down what information is
included in the report.
15. When finished, click Save.
The report is scheduled and will be emailed to the email addresses included in all
selected users’ profiles.
12.26 Setting Up System Controls
System controls allow the system administrator to configure certain settings for all services, including
active protocols, run locking and audit tracking, or to allow services to configure their own settings. If you
set up any of these controls at the system level, service administrators will not be able to make any
changes or additions to those settings for their own services.
Setting Up Audit Tracking
Each service administrator can set up which events will require be tracked for auditing and which
will request or require a reason for users performing the event.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click System Controls.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under System Controls, click Audit Tracking.
The Audit Tracking page appears.
The EMS Audit Events Setup page appears.
4. To allow individual services to set up audit tracking, in the Service Control section, select
Yes.
OR
To set up run locking for all services,
a. In the Service Control section, select No.
The audit tracking options appear.
b. To require users who generate a PDF report to enter a reason for doing so,
i. In the Generate PDF Reports section, in the Is Reason Required column,
select Yes.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 415
ii. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should
appear to prompt users to add a reason.
c. To track users who view existing reports online, in the View Existing Online
Report section, click Active.
d. To require users who view existing reports online to enter a reason for doing so,
i. In the View Existing Online Report section, in the Is Reason Required
column, select Yes.
ii. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should
appear to prompt users to add a reason.
e. To keep track of all changes to a run form after it has been marked as
completed, in the Track All Changes After Completed section, select Active.
The Additional Audit Workflow Configurations section appears at the bottom of
the page.
f. To require users who make changes to a report that was marked as completed to
enter a reason for doing so,
i. In the Track All Changes After Completed section, in the Is Reason
Required column, select Yes.
ii. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should
appear to prompt users to add a reason.
g. To keep track of any user who generates a batch print, in the Generate Batch
Prints section, select Active.
h. To require users who generate a batch print to record a reason for doing so,
i. In the Generate Batch Prints section, in the Is Reason Required column,
select Yes.
ii. In the Reason Required Message text box, type the message that should
appear to prompt users to add a reason.
i. To automatically mark run reports as completed for auditing when they are
locked, in the Mark Runs as Completed Upon Locking Them section, click Yes.
NOTE: This field will not be displayed unless you choose to track all changes
after run reports are completed.
j. To automatically update the run report’s status when it is marked for completion
for auditing,
i. In the Update Status Upon Marking Run as Completed section, select
Yes.
ii. From the Select Status to Update To drop down menu, select the new
desired status.
NOTE: These fields will not be displayed unless you choose to track
all changes after run reports are completed.
5. When finished, click Submit.
Setting Up Active Protocols
Administrators can create and edit active protocols if necessary. An active protocol can be
defined for any provider impression, and will help to guide staff members through performing and
documenting any standard procedure. Each active protocol will provide a list of standard steps,
will open any commonly provided power tools and will fill in any standard information. If a
situation differs from the norm, staff members can still skip steps and provide an explanation or
can change the standard values.
Administrators can set up new active protocols for use on the EMS Field Bridge and with dynamic
run forms. There are two different lists of active protocols that can be set up; you can set up
protocols from both lists and they will be available for use.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 416
2. Under Run Forms, click System Controls.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under System Controls, click Active Protocol.
The Active Protocol Settings page appears.
4. To allow individual services to set up active protocols, in the Service Control section,
select Yes.
OR
To set up active protocols for all services,
a. In the Service Control section, select No.
The active protocol options appear.
b. From the Undefined Provider Impression Protocols scroll list or the Undefined
Protocols Used scroll list, select the impression to which the protocol will apply.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
c.
P a g e | 417
Click Add Protocol.
The Protocol Setup window appears.
d. To create an item on the protocol checklist,
i. In the Checkbox section, select Yes.
ii. In the Question Text text box, type the text for the item.
iii. To determine where in the checklist the item will appear, in the Sort
Order text box, type the number of the item’s position.
iv. When the item is ready, click Add Question.
The item appears in the Protocol Setup for “(Impression)” section.
v. To create a custom action, click the Edit Custom Actions icon
.
vi. From the Category drop down menu, select the type of action that will be
completed.
vii. From the Action Name drop down menu, select the action that should be
performed in the Field Bridge.
viii. When finished, click Add Action.
ix. To add another action for this step, repeat steps f–h.
e. To add more items on the protocol checklist, repeat step 7.
f. When finished, to save the protocol, click Done.
g. Repeat steps b–f until all desired protocols are added.
5. When finished, click Submit.
Setting Up Run Locking
You can choose to automatically lock runs for editing a certain number of days after they are
created.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click System Controls.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under System Controls, click Runs Locking.
The Runs Locking Option page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 418
4. To allow individual services to set up run locking, in the Service Control section, select
Yes.
OR
To set up run locking for all services,
a. In the Service Control section, select No.
The run locking options appear.
b. In the Number of Days text box, type the number of days that should pass before
a run is locked.
5. Click Submit.
Setting Up Custom AMA Questions
When working with custom AMA questions, you can choose to give services various levels of
access to custom AMA questions. If you want to set up custom AMA questions for all your
services, please refer to the Setting Up AMA Questions for the System section in this manual.
This section will explain how to set up what services can customize for AMA questions.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click System Controls.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under System Controls, click AMA Questions.
The AMA Questions page appears.
4. To allow services to add and edit their own AMA questions but not deactivate the systemlevel questions that you set up, select Yes.
OR
To prevent services from setting up or editing their own AMA questions and force them to
use the system-level questions that you set up, select No.
OR
To allow services to add and edit their own AMA questions, and turn off system-level
questions for their service, select Full Control.
5. Click OK.
The settings are applied.
Setting Up Activities and Training Options
You can determine whether individual services have the ability to work with their own training
categories and templates. You have the option to keep all categories and templates at the system
level, to allow services to add their own but not update the system level items in any way, or to
allow services to add their own items and mark system level items as inactive for their service.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click System Controls.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 419
3. Under System Controls, click Activities and Training.
The Activities and Training Setting page appears.
4. To allow services to add and edit their own categories and templates but not deactivate
the system-level items that you set up, select Yes.
OR
To prevent services from setting up or editing their own categories and templates and
force them to use the system-level items that you set up, select No.
OR
To allow items for their service, select Full Control.
5. Click OK.
The settings are applied.
Setting Up QA/QI Questions
When working with QA/QI questions, you can choose to give services various levels of access to
QA/QI questions. If you want to set up custom QA/QI questions for all your services, please refer
to the Creating QA/QI Questions section in this manual. This section will explain how to set up
what services can customize for QA/QI questions.
1. From the top right, click Admin.
2. Under Run Forms, click System Controls.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under System Controls, click QA/QI Question Options.
The QA/QI Question Setting page appears.
4. To allow services to add and edit their own QA/QI questions but not deactivate the
system-level questions that you set up, select Yes.
OR
To prevent services from setting up or editing their own QA/QI questions and force them
to use the system-level questions that you set up, select No.
OR
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 420
To allow services to add and edit their own QA/QI questions, and turn off system-level
questions for their service, select Full Control.
5. Click OK.
The settings are applied.
12.27 Working with Emergency Alerts
Emergency alerts can appear in the inboxes of all staff members in selected services. System
administrators can view a list of past alerts or create a new alert.
Viewing and Editing Past Alerts
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Correspondence & Alerts.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Correspondence & Alerts, click Emergency Alerts.
The Emergency Alerts page appears, displaying a list of all past alerts.
4. To view additional alert information or to edit the alert, click the alert title.
5. To edit the alert,
a. Use the provided text boxes to make any desired changes.
b. To change only the banner that appears when users log in, click Update.
To change send a new alert to users’ inboxes, click Send.
Creating New Alerts
Alerts allow system administrators to create one message that will appear as the subject of the
message and another longer message when the user opens the message.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Correspondence & Alerts.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Correspondence & Alerts, click Emergency Alerts.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 421
4. Click Create New Alert.
The Emergency Bulletin Broadcast page appears.
5. In the Title text box, type a name for the alert.
6. In the Full Message text box, type all information that should appear in the message or in
the full alert when it is opened from the banner.
7. In the Summary text box, type a short message to appear in the banner.
8. When finished, to send the message to users’ inboxes, click Send.
To create a banner, click Update.
12.28 Working with Correspondence
System administrators can send messages to staff members that will be emailed to any system users
who have an email addresses listed in their profile. These messages must be based off templates, which
can also be created by the system administrator, and can contain merge fields to automatically
personalize messages to different staff members. Before any correspondence can be sent, system
administrators must create correspondence templates.
Working with Correspondence Templates
Templates provide a base document off of which system administrators can build individual
pieces of correspondence. Templates can provide a standard title, content or layout for
correspondence, allowing administrators to efficiently send out common communications. The
information from this template can be edited when an individual piece of correspondence is built
from it.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 422
Adding New Correspondence Templates
In addition to creating templates with content for messages that may be frequently sent
out, system administrators may want to create a template with no body text that can be
used for unusual pieces of correspondence.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Correspondence & Alerts.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Correspondence & Alerts, click Correspondence Templates.
4. Click Add New Template.
The Correspondence Templates page appears.
5. In the Name of Template text box, type a title for the template.
6. In the body of the message, type any information to be included in the template.
7. To add the template to the system, click Save.
The new template appears in the list of correspondence templates.
Viewing and Editing Correspondence Templates
System administrators can work with existing correspondence templates.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Correspondence & Alerts.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Correspondence & Alerts, click Correspondence Templates.
A list of existing templates appears.
4. To view or edit an existing template, click the template’s name.
5. In the provided fields, make any desired changes.
6. When finished, click Save.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 423
Working with Merge Fields
Merge fields allow the system to automatically customize correspondence for each recipient when
mass correspondence is sent. These fields insert a placeholder into the correspondence, which is
replaced with each recipients’ specific information when the correspondence is sent. System
administrators can view the merge fields that are currently set up and view the information to
insert them into templates. Users must be extremely familiar with the database being used to
store system information in order to create new merge fields. If unfamiliar with the database,
please contact ImageTrend for assistance finding the correct values and terms to create a merge
field.
To use a merge field in a template, type the text in the Merge Name field into the template at the
desired position, including the brackets.
To view information about current merge fields:
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Correspondence & Alerts.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Correspondence & Alerts, click Correspondence Merge Fields.
A list of current merge fields appears.
4. To view additional information about a merge field, click the field name.
Creating New Correspondence
Once templates have been created, system administrators can create and send correspondence
based on those templates.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Correspondence & Alerts.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Correspondence & Alerts, click Correspondence.
4. From the Select a Correspondence Template to work with drop down menu, select the
template off of which this piece of correspondence should be based.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 424
5. Click Continue.
The Send New Correspondence page appears.
6. To select the staff members to send the correspondence to,
a. To narrow down the users in the Email List section, use the Region, Service,
Permission Group and/or State Certification drop down menus to select criteria.
b. From the Email List scroll list, select all users to receive the correspondence.
HINT: To select more than one user, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each
name. To select a range of users, press and hold Shift while clicking the first and
last name in the range.
NOTE: Only users who have email addresses listed in the system will display
in the User list.
c. Click the Add icon
.
d. Repeat steps a–c until all desired recipients are displayed in the Selected scroll
list.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 425
e. When all desired users are added to the Selected list, click Continue.
The Preview Template screen appears.
7. In the Select Type section, select whether this correspondence should be sent in an
email message, saved to be sent as a paper letter or sent to the user’s inbox within
Service Bridge.
8. In the From text box, type the email address that should be seen as the sender and
should receive replies to email correspondence.
9. In the Subject text box, type a subject line for the message.
10. In the Comments text box, type any additional comments about the message.
11. In the body of the message, make any changes to the text.
12. When finished, to send the messages to all recipients or to save files for paper letters,
click Send.
12.29 Setting a Background Image for Field Bridge Xpress
If your service uses Field Bridge Xpress, you can set a custom image for the background of the login
page. Individual services can also upload their own custom background images.
The recommended size for the background image is 768x719 pixels. If your image is a different size, it
will be resized automatically. However, uploading a picture of the recommended size can ensure that
your image does not get stretched or distorted in order to fit on the login page. Images must be in JPEG
format.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Product Settings, click Field Bridge Xpress.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 426
3. Under Field Bridge Xpress, click Login Background Image.
The Login Page Background Image page appears.
4. In the Upload Image section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
5. Navigate to and select the image you want to set as the background image.
6. Click Open.
The file is selected.
7. OPTIONAL: To set this as the background image for Field Bridge Xpress for all services, select
the Overwrite All Services checkbox.
HINT: If any services have set up their own background image, this will override those service
settings with the image you uploaded here.
8. From the bottom of the page, click Upload.
The new background image is applied.
Reverting to the Default Image
At any point, you can revert the system-set image back to the default background image, or reset
all services to the default background image.
5. From the upper right, click Admin.
6. Under Product Settings, click Field Bridge Xpress.
A sub-menu appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 427
7. Under Field Bridge Xpress, click Login Background Image.
The Login Page Background Image page appears.
8. To revert the system-set image to the default background image, from the bottom of the
page, click Revert to default.
9. To revert all services background images to the default image, from the bottom of the
page, click Revert All Services to Default.
12.30 System Reports
System administrators can access reports summarizing the performance of the Service Bridge system
and its users. These reports are available from several different sections in the Admin tab.
User Login Report
The User Login report displays a list of users who have logged in to the Service Bridge, their user
ID, service, the date of their last login and the number of times they have logged in to the system.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Users & Security, click User Login Report.
The report appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 428
User Lockout Report
The User Lockout report displays a list of users who have attempted to log in to the Service
Bridge and been locked out, along with those users’ username and service, the data of the
lockout and the IP address the attempt to log in came from.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Users & Security, click User Lockout Report.
The report appears.
User Performance Report
The User Performance report displays the connection type, number of runs and average time to
submit a run form for each service.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Users & Security.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Users & Security, click User Performance Report.
The report appears.
Field Changes Report
The Field Changes report displays a list of all fields that have been changed.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Site Management, click Site Resources.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Site Resources, click Field Changes Report.
The Field Changes Report criteria page appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 429
4. Use the fields to enter any specific criteria to locate specific field information.
5. Click Continue.
The report appears.
Services Reporting Report
The Services Reporting report displays a list of services and their basic contact information based
on criteria set by the system administrator, including region, organization type, primary type of
service, and status (i.e., reporting or not reporting runs) or service.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Administration Reports, click Incident Reports.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Incident Reports, click Services Reporting.
The Services Reporting Information page appears.
4. Use the fields to enter any specific criteria to locate specific service information.
5. Click Continue.
The report appears.
Runs Per Month Report
The Runs Per Month report displays information about run reports submitted in each month of the
year. Run reports can be filtered by region, service or import method (i.e., Field Bridge, Service
Bridge, XML import or Access import).
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Administration Reports, click Incident Reports.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Incident Reports, click Runs Per Month.
The Runs Per Month criteria page appears.
4. Use the fields to enter any specific criteria to locate specific run information.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 430
5. Click Continue.
The report appears.
System Report
The System report displays a summary of the information imported into the system, the methods
used to import the information, and the users and services adding information (including run form
submissions).
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Administration Reports, click Incident Reports.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Incident Reports, click System Report.
The report appears.
Import Processor Status Report
The Import Processor Status report displays information about imports and incidents that are
current processing within the Service Bridge, including information about how many records are
being processed for which agency.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Administration Reports, click Incident Reports.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Incident Reports, click Import Processor Status Report.
The report appears.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 431
Application Exception Report
The Application Exception report displays a list of all errors within the system and their details
(including who received the error and when).
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Administration Reports, click Errors.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Errors, click Application Exceptions.
The report appears.
4. If necessary, to find a specific issue, use the filters at the top of the page to select criteria
to narrow down the results.
5. Click Filter.
The page is refreshed to display only results that fit your criteria.
Field Bridge Error Log Report
The Field Bridge Error Log report displays a list of all Field Bridge error logs that have been
submitted.
1. From the upper right, click Admin.
2. Under Administration Reports, click Errors.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Errors, click Field Bridge Exceptions.
The report appears.
4. If necessary, to find a specific issue, use the filters at the top of the page to select criteria
to narrow down the results.
5. Click Filter.
The page is refreshed to display only results that fit your criteria.
6. To view all the results in a specific error log, click associated the Show List link.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 432
Printing System Reports
1. Open the report as detailed in the section for that report.
2. Click the Print Report icon
.
3. In the Print dialog box, select any custom options and click Print.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 433
CHAPTER 13
GLOSSARY
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 434
Glossary
Active
Active records or features are currently available for use in the system.
Active Protocol
An active protocol is a set of steps that can be set up for any provider impression or protocol,
and will automatically bring up sections of the run form or power tools that are needed to
document those steps. Active protocols can be used on the Field Bridge and, if the dynamic
run form is used, on the Service Bridge.
Activity
An activity is a record of a task that must be done, such as changing the oil in a vehicle.
Add
1) You can add something to the system by creating a new record (e.g., a run report, staff
member, training course).
2) Add rights give you access to create new records in a specific section of the application.
Ad Hoc Report
An ad hoc report is a report that you can create from scratch, allowing you to set your own
criteria to display the exact information you need. Also called a transactional report.
Addendum
An addendum is an additional document that can be attached to a run form with more
information. Addendums can be added to a run form at any time, even if the run form is
locked.
Administrator
An administrator is a general term for a user with a high level of access to the system. Most
administrators will be able to configure the system to some degree and may also have
additional access to records within the system. Your organization may have several different
levels of administrators who have different levels of access to the system.
Agency Transferred To/From
An agency transferred to/from or a transferring agency is a record containing the information
for a single agency (e.g., nursing home, hospital) that a patient might be transferred to or
from. These records can be selected from a drop down menu on the run form so that
providers do not need to enter all the information for common agencies on every run form.
AMA Questions
AMA questions are additional questions that are displayed in the Against Medical Advice
signature panel for patients, which allow you to collect more detailed information.
Ascending
Ascending order sorts records from the top down (e.g., 1–10, a–z).
Association
1) An association in a training record is other training records that have been marked as
pertaining to this one (e.g., another session of the same course).
2) For users who need to access multiple services, an association links the staff profile that
user has in each service and allows that user to have only one username and password.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 435
Attachment
An attachment is a file that is associated with a particular email or record. Whenever
someone opens the record or the email, they can then view or download the file.
Attendee
An attendee is an individual who will be present to take a course, as recorded in training
records.
Auto Call Number
An auto call number is a number that is automatically generated by the system for each new
run form, which uniquely identifies that run form for that particular call. The format of auto call
numbers can be set up by service administrators.
Auto Narration
Auto narration is a feature that will complete the narrative on your run forms for you based on
the information already in the run form and your answers to questions that it will ask once you
choose to generate a narrative. These narratives can be generated to fit one of several
different formats and allow you to make changes after information has been automatically
generated.
Automatic Posting
Automatic posting is a feature that will prompt Field Bridge users to post their run forms at a
specific time. This feature is controlled by the system administrator, who can determine
whether the prompt appears, when it appears and what it says.
Average
An average, as discussed for reports, is a mathematical average for the numbers selected.
Break
A break, as discussed in reports, is a space between sections of information.
CAD integration
A CAD integration refers to special setup and development done by ImageTrend to allow
your service to share information with an EKG monitor or computer aided dispatch program.
In order to send or receive information from outside monitors or software, CAD integrations
must be done to allow the systems to “talk” to each other.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 436
Calendar
A calendar displays a small image of a calendar, allowing you to locate the dates you need
from a familiar calendar interface.
Change
Change rights allow you to view and edit existing information or records in the selected
section, but not add or change any information.
Child
Some records and features can be created as a sub-entry under a larger feature or record
(referred to as the parent).
CMS Billing Calculator
The CMS Billing Calculator automatically generates a suggested CMS billing rate.
Content Rights
Content rights are set up within a user’s profile by the system administrator, and determine
which region and service that user can access.
Controlled Substance
A controlled substance in the system is any medication that you define as a controlled
substance. When controlled substances are defined, they will appear in the Controlled
Substances signature panel on the EMS run form.
Correspondence
Correspondence refers to any letters or emails generated and/or sent by the system to any
people whose contact information is within the system.
Correspondence Template
Correspondence templates are patterns for letters and emails that can be customized and
sent out for individual pieces of correspondence. (This is also referred to as a merge
template.)
Data Element
A data element is a single field or piece of information within the system; for example, the
ePCR number or the cardiac arrest field. Each data element also contains all possible
answers for fields with suggested answers (e.g., drop down menus or checkboxes). Data
elements are extremely complicated and should not be changed without consulting
ImageTrend, to avoid making changes that cannot be reversed.
Data Exchange
The data exchange is the section of the system that allows you to manage any files that you
import or export through the system.
Data Set
1) A data set is a standard assemblage of information that should be collected. Many data
sets are created by agencies such as NEMSIS and NFIRS.
2) A data set is a category of information that you can create a transactional report from in
Report Writer.
Default
A default is something that will be used automatically unless a different value is selected. For
example, a default value in a run form will be filled in automatically in each run form, although
the user can manually change that value.
Defined Criteria
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 437
Defined criteria are used in reports, where they allow you to determine limits on the data that
will be displayed every time this report is displayed. For example, in a report that displayed
patients in Rice County by city, criteria would be used to dictate that only records where the
county field contains the value Rice should be included.
Delete
1) Deleting something removes a record from the system. Deleting records is not
recommended, as you will not be able to refer to that record again.
2) Delete rights allow a system user to view, edit, add and delete records within the section.
Descending
Descending order sorts records from the bottom up (e.g., 10–1 or z–a).
Destination
A destination indicates the location or facility that an EMS patient was transported to in the
run form.
District
A district is a division within a zip code that you can choose to set up to get more targeted
geographic information. Districts are also known as zones
Document Category
Document categories are organization categories that can be used to classify documents in
staff profiles.
Download
Downloading information brings selected information onto your system using an Internet
connection.
Drop down menu
A drop down menu is a field that allows you to pick one choice from several choices that will
be displayed. To view the choices, click the arrow on the menu
Drug Database
A drug database is a separate database or application that can be accessed by earlier
versions of Service Bridge, which allows you to access a huge library of drugs that might be
used and/or recorded.
Dynamic Run Form (DRF)
The dynamic run form is a type of EMS run form template that provides additional features for
quick data entry.
Element details
The element details of a data element contain information about where this element is in the
database structure of the application, as well as a label and description of the element.
Emergency Alert
An emergency alert is a message that will be distributed into the inboxes of all staff members
in selected services.
EMS Audit Events
EMS audit events are actions within an EMS report that cause the system to record the user
performing the action and/or request a reason from the user for that action.
EMS run report
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 438
An EMS run report is the report you need to fill out for any EMS calls.
Error log
The error log is a list of all errors any Field Bridges associated with your system have
generated. You can submit this list to your Service Bridge if necessary, and it allows
ImageTrend to view the exact errors you may have received in case you need support.
Export
Exporting data is sending it to a file that can be referred to and used outside of the system.
Favorite Destination
A favorite destination is a record for destinations that you bring patients to frequently; these
destination will appear at the top of the list for easy selection.
Favorite Location
A favorite location is a record for frequently visited cities that will allow you to select the city,
county, state and postal code for that location with a single selection.
Favorite Report
A favorite report is a report that you have created in the Report Writer and saved to view
again from an easily accessible list of reports.
Field
A field is a space for a piece of information. Fields are often used for collecting information,
but also refer to a particular piece of information. Most fields are associated with a question to
let you know what information to enter.
Field Bridge
The Field Bridge is a field data collection program for EMS run reports which can be
connected to the system to gather data in the field without an Internet connection.
Filter
A filter is a field that allows you to view different information on a particular page or report
according to your current needs (e.g., a filter at the top of a page to select how many records
should appear on each page, or on the top of a report to indicate whether you want to view
records for active staff, inactive staff or all staff).
First EMS Unit Arriving
This option can record the first EMS unit that arrives on the scene of any incident on EMS run
forms.
Flag
A flag is an indicator you can add to messages in your inbox. You can use this to mark
important messages, messages you want to save or messages that you need to respond to.
Flagged messages will display a red flag icon to draw your attention.
Form
A form is a collection of questions and fields to gather information.
Group
1) A group is a collection of records with similar properties. For instance, you can create a
permission group for staff members who should have the same level of access to the system.
2) Grouping within a report is clustering information based on a particular criteria to create
visual “groups” within the report (e.g., grouping by zip code would gather together all records
for each zip code).
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 439
ImageTrend
ImageTrend is the company that provides and supports the EMS Service Bridge.
Import
Importing data allows you to copy data from a properly formatted file into the system.
Inactive
Inactive records are not available for use in the system, although they are saved in the
system for reference.
Inbox
The inbox is a section within the system that allows you to send and receive messages, much
the same as email.
Incident Clearing
Incident clearing is an option that can be used if you are setting up Field Bridge systems. It
allows administrators to set the Field Bridge system up to automatically delete incidents that
have been posted after a certain number of days.
Incident List
The Incident List is a feature allowing you to easily search for past run reports.
Incident Report
An incident report is the paperwork you need to fill out to report on any incident you are
involved with. Incident reports are also referred to as run forms and run reports.
Interactive Physical Assessment
The interactive physical assessment is a graphical, Flash-based tool that allows you to record
medical, injury and burn assessments on the image of a person.
Invisible
Invisible rights prevent system users from seeing or working with the section in any way.
Layout Editor
The Layout Editor is the tool that can be used to create and edit EMS dynamic run forms, as
well as to set up provider actions and give access to specific dynamic run forms.
Leave of Absence Reason
Reasons, if they are set up for your service, can document the purpose behind leaves of
absence that are recorded in staff member profiles.
Level
The level of a provider is based on their training level, which should be stored with the staff
member’s profile.
Locked
Locked run forms cannot be edited.
Login
1) Your login information is your username and password, which are used to access the
system.
2) To log in to the system is to enter your credentials (username and password) so you can
access the system.
Logout
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 440
Logging out of the system is closing the system so that no unauthorized user will have
access to the information within the system.
Lookup icon
The Lookup button brings up a scrollable list of the possible options, preventing you from
needing to remember information such as codes.
Merge Field
A merge field is a short amount of text included within brackets, which signals to the system
that it needs to fill in the information for those fields from a particular record (e.g., a staff
member’s first or last name).
Merge Template
Merge templates are patterns for correspondence that can be customized and sent out for
individual pieces of correspondence. (This is also referred to as a correspondence template.)
Message Type
A message type is a category that can be assigned to messages sent within the inbox, to
help with organization.
My View
A view that is saved as a My View will be available only for you. You can use this kind of view
to view the incident and you will be able to edit it at any time, but no one else will be able to
access it.
Now button
The Now button will automatically enter the current time into the corresponding field.
Order
The order of a record is its position within the list of records for that section (e.g., first,
second). Order should always be recorded as a number.
Other Responding Units
Other responding units are records for other units that might assist with a call, such as fire
departments, police departments or utility companies.
Owner
Owner rights give the user full access to that section and all records within the section.
Panel
A panel within a run form is a section containing several fields, within a single tab. Panels will
have a header with the name of the panel at the top of the section.
Password
A password is a short collection of letters and/or numbers that, in combination with your
username, identifies you to the system. Your password should be kept secret.
Permission Group
Permission groups, also referred to as security groups, are groups that users can be
assigned to that define their level of access to the system. Permission groups control access
to each major section of the system.
Permissions
Permissions are controls on how much access to the system a particular group has.
Populate
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 441
Populating a field is automatically filling information in according to data that is elsewhere in
the system or the run form.
Post
Posting is sending the data from your run forms to the EMS Service Bridge that your Field
Bridge is connected to. You must post in order for your service to be able to access your runs
or submit them to the state.
Power Tool
A power tool is a pop up page that allows you to quickly enter common information regarding
a patient, such as vitals or IV information. Power tools provide larger buttons and fields with
common information more easily accessible, allowing you to quickly enter information that
can then be saved in the run form. When finished with a power tool, you will be returned to
the page you were previously working with.
Primary Role of Unit
The primary role of unit is a setting that will assign the role of a particular vehicle or unit to its
most common role by default.
Provider Action
A provider action is a group of procedure and vitals fields that allow you to quickly document
information for a specific situation or action.
QA/QI Batch
A QA/QI batch is a set of incidents that have been assigned to specific individuals for review
by a certain date and with a certain review form.
QA/QI Form
A QA/QI form is a type of form within Service Bridge that allows reviewers to answer QA/QI
questions while viewing incident information in read-only mode.
QA/QI Group
A QA/QI group is a way to organize QA/QI reviewers so they can easily be assigned to
batches and incidents.
QA/QI Note
A QA/QI note is a message related to quality assurance, which can be attached to a run form.
QA/QI Question
A QA/QI question is a question that can be added to QA/QI forms for reviewers to fill out
when checking an incident.
QA/QI Reviewer
A QA/QI reviewer is a person who can be assigned to review run forms through the QA/QI
module.
QA/QI Status
The QA/QI status for an incident reflects its progress in being reviewed by all reviewers within
a specific batch.
Quick Launch Links
Quick launch links are used in the Field Bridge and provide a way to add links to the toolbar,
allowing Field Bridge users to quickly navigate to a common program or website.
Range
A range is a series of records in a line.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 442
Rapid Entry Listbox
A rapid entry listbox is a type of field that appears on the dynamic run form that allows you to
click within the field to bring up a list of options, type to narrow down the options for quick
selection or open the Lookup window for a complete list of possible options.
Read
Read rights allow a user to view information in a section, but not edit, add or delete
information.
Repeat Patient
A repeat patient is an EMS patient who is frequently involved with calls; a repeat patient
record can keep track of some of that patient’s information (e.g., address, medical history,
etc.) so that it does not need to be entered for every call.
Report Writer
The Report Writer is a section of the system that allows you to view and create new reports
based on the information within the system.
Role
A staff member’s role refers to the role he plays on a call.
Rule Error Message
The rule error message is the text that will appear to notify a user of why points were taken
off if a validation rule is not met.
Run
A run is any call or incident you go on, or the report you fill out for that incident.
Run form
A run form is the report you will fill out for each call. This is also known as a run report,
incident report or run.
Run Form Field Default
A run form field default is the value that is automatically entered into a field on a run form.
This can be set up for templates that will be used in the Field Bridge or any dynamic run form.
Run form template
A run form template is one particular layout for the run report’s form. Using templates allows
you to work with forms that are tailored to your service or the type of call. For instance, there
may be a cardiac arrest call template that gives you the forms for cardiac arrest calls, while
the standard form does not include that information.
Run History
Run history is a section where all previous run reports that have been completed are
accessed.
Run Locking
Run locking is a feature that automatically prevents run forms from being edited after a
certain number of days.
Run report
A run report is the paperwork that you fill out for reporting your incidents. A run report is also
referred to as an incident report, run form and run.
Scheduled Exports
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 443
A scheduled export is a system feature that will automatically export a file with set information
at a particular time.
Search Report
A search report is a report that contains links to every run form listed within the report,
allowing you to easily open any run form for reference.
Security Group
Security groups are groups that users can be assigned to that define their level of access to
the system. Security groups control access to each major section of the system.
Security Question
A security question is a question that will be asked when a user logs in to verify their identify,
as an extra security measure.
Service Defined Question
A service defined question is a custom question that can be added to an EMS run form to
collect additional information that may not be collected in the existing run forms.
Service Views
Service views are available for the service the view is created in and can only be created or
edited by individuals with service administrator-level permissions. All other users will be able
to apply service views when looking at the incident list for that service but will not be able to
make any changes.
Session timeout
The session timeout is the amount of time that can pass when a user does not do anything
on the system before that user is logged out of the system. Session timeout is a security
feature, making it less likely that someone can access the data on the system if a staff
member forgets to log out.
Signature Consent Text
Signature consent text is the short amount of text explaining what is being agreed to before
requesting a signature.
Signature Validation
Signature validation is a feature that allows administrators to set up which signatures will be
required for run forms collected with the Field Bridge.
Sort Criteria
Sort criteria are settings for reports that determine how the records will be put into order,
based on the values within each field.
Staff Profile
A staff profile is a record for an individual staff member at your agency. Staff profiles contain
demographic and certification information, as well as the permissions settings that control
that person’s ability to log in to the system and access data. Staff profiles can also contain
additional details, including emergency contact information, equipment allocations or lists of
completed training courses.
Standard Report
A standard report is a report that has been pre-created in the system and can be viewed from
the Report Writer at any time.
Standard Run Form
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 444
The standard run form is the traditional EMS run form, which does not require any additional
plugins to use.
Station
A station within the system is a record for any stations within your organization. When you
create station records, you can note which station was responsible for a particular incident.
Statistical Year
A statistical year is the year for which you want to run statistics (e.g., if you want to calculate
statistics for the fiscal year, you can set up the year from July to July).
Status
A status is the condition of a particular record (e.g., active or inactive for users, in progress or
submitted for run forms).
Sum
Displaying a sum within a report will show the product of adding all values.
Sync
Syncing, or synchronizing, is the process of passing all information set up on the Web-based
system to all Field Bridge systems, Tap Chart systems, Fire Inspections Client systems or
other field data collection systems that are connected with the Service Bridge. This ensures
that all data is up to date in the field systems.
Synchronize
Synchronizing, or syncing, is the process of passing all information set up on the Web-based
system to all Field Bridge systems, Tap Chart systems, Fire Inspections Client systems or
other field data collection systems that are connected with the Service Bridge. This ensures
that all data is up to date in the field systems.
System Administrator
The system administrator is the individual in charge of setting up and maintaining the entire
system.
System Views
System views are available for all services in the system and can only be created or edited by
individuals with system administrator-level permissions. All other users will be able to apply
system views when looking at the incident list but will not be able to make any changes.
Tab
A tab in a run form is an individual page containing related fields.
Tag
A tag is the name of an individual field that can be included on a run form, as set up in the
dynamic run form.
Template
A template is a pattern that can be used to create individual records; for instance, a run form
template can be used to create multiple run forms.
Timeout
The timeout is the amount of time that can pass when a user does not do anything on the
system before that user is logged out of the system. Session timeout is a security feature,
making it less likely that someone can access the data on the system if a staff member
forgets to log out.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 445
Toolbar
A toolbar is a horizontal bar containing multiple links or buttons that can help you navigate
through the system or complete certain tasks.
Training Record
A training record is a record for a particular course that is being used to educate staff.
Transferring Agency
A transferring agency is an organization or agency that is transferring EMS patients either to
or from their facility.
Unlocked
An unlocked run is editable.
Upload
Uploading bringing a file into the system.
User
A user is a person who can log in to and use the system. In contrast to an administrator, a
user can only use the features of the system and not set up the system.
User Defined Exports
User defined exports is a section that set up which exports a user can have access to.
Username
A username is the name the system uses to identify you when you try to log in to the system.
Value
As used in this manual, a value is any text, number or selection that should be entered into a
field.
Validate
Validating a run is checking for any required fields that have not been completed in a run
form.
Validity
Validity is the percentage that the run form is complete, based on the rules set up for required
information.
Validity Compliance Documentation
Validity compliance documentation is a feature that can be set up for the Field Bridge,
allowing administrators to prompt users for reasons why required fields have not been
completed.
Validity Reason
A validity reason is an explanation of why a required field has not been completed in a run
form.
Validity Rule
A validity rule is a setting created by the system administrator, which determines when a field
is required and how many point should be deducted from the validity score if the field is not
completed.
Web-based system
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 446
Web-based systems are applications that must be accessed over the Internet. In this manual,
the most common Web-based systems that will be referenced are Service Bridge, Rescue
Bridge and State Bridge.
Widget
A widget is an on-screen tool that can be displayed on the home page of the Field Bridge to
give you quick access to information.
XML
XML is a type of file creating using the XML markup language. Service Bridge uses XML files
for importing and exporting information, as well as for determining how to create PDF files.
XSLT
A stylesheet used to create PDF versions of forms.
Zone
A zone is a division within a zip code that you can choose to set up to get more targeted
geographic information. Zones are also known as districts.
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 447
CHAPTER 13
HELP AND SUPPORT
7/3/2013
www.imagetrend.com
EMS SERVICE BRIDGE V.5.8: ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 448
Help and Support
Before Contacting ImageTrend
Please have the following information accessible when calling ImageTrend:





A description of your computer system.
The name of your operating system and service pack version (if applicable).
A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred.
The exact wording of any error messages you see.
Your company name and contact information.
Contacting ImageTrend
If you are unable to find the information needed to use EMS Service Bridge effectively, please
consult ImageTrend in any of the following ways:






Phone
EDS Support Phone
Toll-Free
Fax
Web
Email
(952) 469.1589
(888) 730-3255
(888) 469.7789
(952) 985.5671
http://support.imagetrend.com
[email protected]
ImageTrend support services are available:
Monday – Friday
8:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. central time
Technical Support
For 24-hour technical support, ImageTrend provides online assistance through their website and
email services:


7/3/2013
Web
Email
http://support.imagetrend.com
[email protected]
www.imagetrend.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement